Library of Congrps Computr Assisted Technology, to Improve Learning. 160, with Emphasis

-T RES tiiviE ED 056 486 EM 009 341 TITLE New Tech 'ology in uca ion; Selec ed INSTITUTION Library of CongrPs References. Washington,D.C. Congressional Research Service. SPONS AGENCY Congress of the U.S.,Washington, D.C.House Committee onScience andAstronautics. PUB DATE Sep 71 NOTE 146p.

EDRS PRICE , $0.65 HC-.:6.58 DESCRIPTORS *Audiovisual Aids;*Bibliographies;Computr Assisted Instruction; Consortia;Disadvantaged Youth; Educational Change; Educational Facilities;Films; Handicapped Children;Higher Education; Study; Individualized Independent instruction;instructional Inprovement; *InstructionalMedia; Technology; Radio; *Instructional Simulation; Standards;Systems Approach; TeachingMethods; TeamTeaching; Television; VocationalEducation ABSTRACT The definitionof instructional this bibliography technology used in is basedon the definitionused by the the Connissionon Instructional report of Technology, ToImprove Learning. InstructionalTechnology in thissense is not confined specific media,but also includes to the use of human and non-human systematic approachesto thr use of resources to bringabout more effective instruction. Thematerial cited includes books a::ticles, monographs, and reportspublished since160, with emphasis published since1965. The rin materials bibliography isdivided into three Part one containscitations relating parts. uses of educational to issues,problems, and future technology ingeneral. Parttwo contains references to thevarious uses of a variety of specificmedia. Part three citesalternative methodsto (mo he organizationof instruction. [COMMITTEE riu-Nal

NEW TECHNOLOGY IN EDUCATION SELECTED REFERENCES

PREPARED FOR THE SUBCOM ITTEE ON SCIENCE, RESEARCH, AND DEVELOPMENT

OP THE COMMITTEE ON SCIENCE AND ASTRONAUTICS U.S. HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES NINETY-SECOND CONGRESS FIRST SESSION

BY THE EDUCATION AND PUBLIC WELFARE DIVISION CONGRESSIONAL RESEARCH SERVICE LIBRARY OF CONGRESS Serial F

SEPTEMBER 1071

Printed for the use of the Committeeon Science and Astronautics

U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 65-861 WASHINGTON : 1971 COMM WEE ON SCIENCE ANDASTRONAUTICS GEORGE P. MILLER, California, Chairman OLIN E, TEAGUE, Texas JAMES G. FULTON, Pennsylvania JOSEPH E. KARTH, Minnesota CHARLES A. mosnErf. Ohio HEN HECIILER, West Virginia ALPHONZO BELL, California JOHN W. DAY! 4, Georgia THOMAS M. PELLY, Washington Ls, v THOMAS N. DOWNING, Virginia JOHN W. WYDLER, New York DON FUQUA, Florida LARRY V 'INN, /a., Kansus EARLE CABELL, Texas ROBERT PRICE, Texa8 IAMBS W. SYMINGTON, Missouri DEW'S FREY, Jit., Florida RICHARD T. HANNA, California BARRY M. GOLDWATER, Jn., California WALTER FLOWERS, Alabama MARVIN L. ESCH, Michigan ROBERT A, ROE, New Jersey II, LAWRENCE COUGHLIN, Pennsylvania JOHN F. SEIBERLING, Jtt,, Ohie JOHN N. HAPPY CAMP, Oklahoma WILLIAM R COTTER, Connecticut CHARLES B, RANGEL, New Yoth MORGAN F. MURPHY, MIKE MeCORMACK, Washington MENDEL J. DAVIS, South Carolina CuArtixs F, DUCANbER, ExcestimDirector and Chief Counsel ToliN A. CARSTARPHEN, Jr., Chief Clerk and Counsel Paimi, IL YEAGER, Coun8e1 FRANK R. HAMMILL, Jr., Counsel W. H. Boon, Technical Consultant JAMES 11 WILSON, Technical Consultant RICHARD P. HINES, Staff Consultant HAROLD A. GOULD, Technical Consultant J. THOUAS RATCIIPORD, Science Consultant FBILH P. DicKINsoN, Technical Consultant WILLIAM G. WELLS, Jr., Technical Consultant FLIziBLTH S KEnNAN, Scientifio Research AssistaW FRANK J. Ginotlx, Clerk DEnis C. Quzolxv, Publications Clerk CARL SWARTZ, Minority Staff

SUBCOMMITTEE ON SCIENCE, RESEAitC A D DE:ELOPMENT JOHN W. DAVIS, Georgia, Chairman EARLE CABELL, Texas ALPHONZO BELL, California JAmns W. SYMINGTON, Missouri CHARLES A. MOSHER, Ohio RICHARD T. HANNA, California LOUTS FREY, Ja.., Florida JOHN P. SEIBERLING, Ja., Ohio MARVIN L. ESCH, Michigan MIKE McCORMACK, Washington R. LAWRENCE COUGHLIN, Pennsylvania U.S. DEPARTMENT Of HEALTH. EDUCATION & WELFARE OFFICE OF EDUCATION THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN REPRO- DUCED EXACTLY AS RECEIVED FROM THE PERSON OR ORGANIZATION ORIG- INATING IT. POINTS OF VIEW OR OPIN- IONS STATED DO NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT OFFICIAL OFFICE OF EDLI CATION POSITION OR POLICY.

LETTER OF TRANS- TTAL

HOUSE OP REPRESENTATIVES, COMMITTEE ON SCIENCE AND ASTRONAUTICS, TV asngton, D .0 September 4, 1971. Hon. GEORGE P. Alrux,R, Chai,,wan, Committee on Science am? Astronautics,House of Repre- sentatives,Ww.hington,D.C. DEAR MR. CHAIRMANI am transmitting herewithtt bibliosaraphy prepared for the Subcommittee by the CongressionalResearch Service entitled "New Technology in Education; SelectedReferences." This bibliography is designed to provide teady referencefor all Congres- sional committees which must deal with the impactsof teehnolog:- upon the American educational system. I commend thisreport to you and to the Congress. Sincerely yours, JOHN W. DAVIS, Chazrmal,. SubcomnvitteeOIL Science, Research, and Development. LETTER OF SUBITTAL

TIM LIBRARY or CoNortEss, CONGRESSIONAL RESEARCH SERVICE, ashington, D .0 kagust 6, 1971. Hon. Joirx WT. DAvis, C Itairm an, Sub commWee on, Science, Research, andDe velopm Science and Astronautics Committee, U.S.HOUseof Rep'esen tives, flrashin.gton, D.C. DEAR REPRESENTATINE DAVIS : in respome to your request for references on the use of new technology in education weare transmitting a bibliograrthy entitled "New Technolog$ in Education; Selected Rae rences: The bibliography is in three parts. Part I includes citationsrelat- Mg to issues, problems and futureuses of educational technology in general. Part II contains references to the varioususes of a variety of specific media. Part III cites alternative methodsto the organization of inst ruct ion. Thc selection of items included in he bibliographywas based on ustructional technology"as defined.1 the report of 'the Commission on Instructional Technology, To ImpPt, ve Loaning. Instructional technology in this sense is not confinedto the use of specific media but also includes systematic approachesto the use of human and non- human resources to bring aboutmore effective instruction. e hope that these cifatiruis willserve as a useful reference tool for Members of Congress and for all those whoare interested. in the present and potential uses of technology in education. The bibliography was compiled by LillaM. Pearce and Helen A. Miller, education analystson the staff of the Education and Public Welfare Division of the Congressional flesearchService. Yours sineerely) LESTER S. JAYSON, Director.

1 INTRODUCTION

"New Tecio ogy in Education ;Selected References" includes books, articla monographsand reports published since1960, with emphasis on mhterials publishedsince 1965. In addition tc,our o wn resources, Research, in Education,the index to documents collected bythe Educational Resourcesinformation Center (ERIC) cf the Office ofEducation has been searched.Docu- ments cited from thissource are followed by a document immber in brackets, i.e. [ED 000 000].Additional informationon these docu- ients may be obtained by consultingthe appropriate entry in Resear'cli ducation. The selection of items forinclusion in the bibliographywa s based on the definitions of "instractional technology"contained in the report of the Commissionon In tructional Technology. The Commission's report, To Improve Lecnyting (1970),defines instructional technology in two ways : First,as "the media born of the communicationsrevolu- tion which can be used for instructionalpurposes alongside the teacher, textbook, and blackboard ;" andsecond, as "a systematicway of designing, carrying out, and evi;luatingthe total process of learning and teaching in terms of :43ecific objectives,based on research in human leai nino. and communication, ardemploying a combinat"on of human and nAhumanresources to brlizts about more effective instruction." In general, items correspondingto the former definitionmay be found in Part II, Uses of Specific Media. PartsI and III contain citations largely relating to the second and broadeidefinition. Part I also contains entries dealing witlithe relationship of media to certain groups andareas in education such as teachers or educational research. Headings, suchas "Teachers and technology," ho- ever, include only general references to the subject An articleon the specific effect of programmed instructionon the teacher would be found under "ComptLers and programmed instruction"in Part II. In other words, Part deals primarily with the effect of media ingeneral, while Part II focuses on the uses of specific media ina variety of contezta re- latina to education. Part IIIis concerned with alternatives to traditional methods of organization for instruction.While the use of non- human resources is secondary to much of the material cited inPart III, new organizational designs for schooling 'nave been includedas they may be considered an integral part of edr.-ational technology in the 'broadest sense of the term. (VII) CONTENTS

Page Introduction ______VII I. Educational TechnologyIssues., Problems and future Uses __ __ A. General discussions_ B. Standards for school media _ 11 C. Higher education mid technology lading open university concept) 12 D. Technology and the education of the disadvantaged 13 E. Technology and the handicapped child 15 F. Vocational education, guidance and counseling, and technology _ _ _ 17 G. Teachers and teehnologY 18 H. Cost of educational technology_ 21 I.Faciiities and technology (including learninz centers, lan- guagelaboratories,educationalparks,a iln open-plan schools) 99 .T. Business and educational technology - chiding insr.ructional K. Research in educational technology 99 obj calves ) _ --- L. Systems analysis (including PPBS and cost-benefit analysis)_ M. Accountability,performancecontracth:g,andeducation vouchers _ . _ 38 IL Uses of Specific Media.______------______43 A. Audio-visual instruction, equipment, and materials (-including uses of multi -media) ___ _ 43 B. Films and film-making in education _ _ 50 C. Television and radio (including educational uses of commercial and public television as well as instructional television, cable television, and uses of satellites) _ ---______- 62 D Computers and programmed instruction (including computer-. assisted instruction and uses of data processing in education) 77 E. Video tape recorders and electronic video recording 119 P. Information r.o_trieval and dial access systems 121 G. Games and simulation 122 H. Drugs and learning 126 Ill Organizing for Instruction 127 A. Consortiums in educatien and technology 127 B. Team teachino. 128 C. Inclividualizecr instruction 129 D. independent study 133 E. Non-graded schools 134 F. Flexible scheduling 135' G. Free schools, schools without wails 137 H. Extended school year_ 139 (Tx) NEW TECHNOLOGY IN EDUCATION Selected References I. EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGYISSUES, PROBLEMS _2.cD FUTURE USES A. GENERAL DISCUSSIONS A. selected bibliography on visual literacy. Audiovisual h nstrnct ion. v. 16, Febru ry 1971 : 49-51. The advent of educational technology. UNESCO chronicle,-.1 February 1971 : Aerospace Education Foundation. Technology and innovation in education ; puttm p. technology to work in America's schools. NewYork, Frederick- A. Pnwger, Publishers, 1908. 149p. Allen, J. E., jr. Technology and educational renewal. Educationv. 90 September 1909 : 1-0. Allen. William II. Tedmology: roles for men and machines. h? Bri- tannica review of American education, edited by DavidG. Hays. Vol. I. Chicago, Encyclopaedia Brit annica, Inc., 1969; 139-157. Trends in instructional technolog.y --the Kale at St;Inford planning report. Stanford, ERIC Clearinghouseon Educational Media and Technology. 1970, 32p, An ethicationa I system 'for the seventies. Finalreport. New York, E. F. Shelly and Co., 1969, 246p. [ED 040 507]. Anderson, Charnel. Technology in American education,1650-1900 Washington, U.S, Govt. Print. Off.,1962. 53p. Anderson, Richard T. Planning for the futureforecastingimplica- cations due to technological change. 1968. 21p. [ED 020 7411. The application of technology to education.AVashington. American Society for Engineering, 1909. 39p. [ED 034 418]. Apter, Michael J. Thenew technology of education. London, Mac- millan and Co. Ltd., 1968. 144p. JEI ) 038 0181 . Audiovisual education. American school boardjournal, v. 151, Oct. 1965 : 25-56. Baran, Paul. On the impact of thenew communications media upon social values. Lftw and contemporary problems,v. 34, Spring 1969 : 244-254.. Berthold, Jeanne Saylor, and Mary Alice Curran.Educational technology and the teaching-learningprocess; a selected bibliography. Arlington, Virginia, Division of Nursing, Bureauof Health Man- power, National Institutes of Health, 1968. 63 p. Blaschke, Charles L. The DOD: catalyst ineducational technology. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 48. January 1967: 208-214, Bolvin, John 0. Thenew technology : its implications for organizational and administra6ve changes.Washington, Ae.ademy for Edu- (1) cational Development. Tue. One of the support papers for -To Im- p:.ove Lrnrning; a report to the President and the Coo.ffress of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 26 p. [ED 039 742]. Loocock, Sarane S. Technolory and educational structure. Educa- tional technology, v. 9l11111 try 1969 : 19-21. Bosley, Howard E., und irarold E. Wigi-en. eds. Television and related meClia in teacher education. Baltimore, Alulti-State TeacherEduca- tion Project,1907. 53 p. Briault, E. W. Learning and teaching tomorrow. London, National Council for Educational Technology 1969. p. [ED Oil 461]. Brickman, William W.. and Stanley L'elirer. Automation, education, and human values. New York, School and Society Books,1966. 419 p. Brown, James IV., and Ruth II. Aubrey. Newmedia, and changing educationtiA patterns,a smmnary of the preparations for, presentations, and group reports of thenew media workshop. Sacramento, California State Department of Education,1966. 95 p. [ED 016 383 ] Bundy, Robert F. Futures perspectiveand educational technology; a high energy reading diet.Educational technology, v. 9, December 1960 : S2-90. Burris, Russell W. Majorareas; of emphasis for Mstructional Pnmneer- jug. Washington, Acadenk forEducational Development, Inc. One of-the support, papers for "To ImproveLearning; a report to the President anu the Congress of theUnited States by the Commis- sion on Instructional Technology."1970. 7 p. [ED 039 763]. Carpenter, C. R. A constructive critiqueof educational technology. AV communication review,v. 16, Spring 1968 : 16-24. Adapting new educational mediafor effective learning by students. Educational record,v. 46, Fall 1965: 416-120. Carroll, John B. Measurementand evaluation in educational technology. Washington, Academy for EducationalDevelopment, Inc. One of the support papers for "To ImproveLearning; a report to the President and the Cono-ress of the United Statesby the Commis- sion on In,tructional Teci.nology." 1970.26 p. [ED 039 747]. Cassi1.01., H. R. Adult education in theera of modern technology. Con- vergence, v. 3, no. 2, 1970 :37-44 ,&he challenge of technology, ; a symposiumon educafional technology. An I/D/E/A occasional paper. Melbourne, Florida,I/D/E/A, [1967]. 12 p. Chanping directions in American education; exclusivereport and ana lysis presented annually with the Committee for Fconomic De- velopment. Saturday review, v. 50, January 14, 1967: 37-r. Chisholm, Margaret. Educational teclmology: how humane can it be? Educational leadership, v. 25, December 1967: 225-228. Churchman, C. West HumanizMg education. Center magazine,v. 1, November 1968 : 90-93. Comment on the report of the Commissionon Instructional Teelmol- o!Ty. AV communication review, v. 18, Fall 1970 : 306-326. Committee for Economic Development. Research and Policy Commit- tee. Inno-in in education: new directions for the American School. New York, Committee for Economic Development,1968. 75 p. 3 The schools and the challge of im.ovation. A, CETI supplementary paper. New York, McGraw-Hill Book Co.. 1969. 341 p. Cord zon. Jolm E. Technology and educational planning. Educa tional tee] molop.y, v. 8, February 28, 1968 : 3-7. Council of Chief St2tte School Officers. State department of education leadership in developing the use of new educational media. Wash- ington. T Council. 1)t)-:i: 2 t p. Corseu offersnew tools for understanding technology. Nation's schools v. 81 April 1971 : 106+. Cum ungham, R. Science. t echnology, ;ind ref implications for educational policy. Journal of general education,v. 22, J:11111aly 1971 : 215-22,5. tsa(jk, Alttry A1)11. New media in Africa: trends lind strategies. Edu- cationai broadcasting review, v 4. October 1970: 23-30. Dale Edgar, and Gregory Trzebiatowski. A basic referenceshelf on auaiovisual instruction.Series 1. Stanford, ERIC Clearinghouse on Educatiowal Media and Technology, 1 18 17 p. deGrazia. Alfred, avd David A. Sohn, eds. Revolutionin teach new thet)ry, technology and curricula. New York, Bantam Books 1964. 310 p. de Lone, Richard H. Sketchinga context for instructional technology. Washington, Acialent,,; for EducationaA Development,Inc. One of the support papers :tor "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Congress of the United Statesby the Commissicn on -instructional Technology." 1970. 25 p. FED 039 769]. Dempsey, Michael J. Relatio-hips between therestructuring of sciiouls and communications technology. Washington7Academy for Educational Development, :rile. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve, Lea rnMg ; a report to the Presidentand the CoiigrPss of the United States by the Commissionon _Instructional Teclmology." 1970. 16 p. EED 039 7431 Dodge, James W Machine-aided languagele'uiintg IiBritannica, review of foreign language education,edited by Emma Marie Birk- maier. Vol. I. Chicago, EncyclopaediaBritannica, Inc 196S: 311 341. Dwyer, Francis M. Recent developments and theimpact -if the newer media. Paper presented at Annual ElementaryPrincipals Work- shop, University Park, Pennsylvania, 1967.12 p. rED 928 606]. Edling, Jack V. The new mediain education; a rcp:Irf of i lie Western Regional Conference on Educational MediaResearch hell at Sacra- mento, California, April 20-22, 1960. Sacramento,California, Sac- amento State College, [1961]. 99p. Education and thenew technology ; symposium convened by the Cr,na- dian Council for Research in Education.Ottawa, The Council, 1967. 177 p. [ED 025 145] Education U.S.A. Technology in education.Special report. Washing- ton, National School Public Relations Ivssoclation.1967. 24 p. Educational media]. Development digest,v. 6, April 1968 : ducational media in transition. New York,Educational Media Cou cil, Inc., 1963.,54 p. [ED 015 646] Educational Policy Research Center.Alternative futures and educational policy. Menlo Park, California, StanfordResearch Institute, 1970. 40 p. 4 Educatiomil technology. Bulletin of theInternational Bureau of Edu- c;ition. year 44, 4th quarter, 1971):entire issue. Educat:onal tcclmology around theworld. EdtvJational technology, v. 9, November 1969 : whole issue. The educ.ition technology bibliographyseries. Vol. 1. Englewood New del.sey. Educationa I TechnologyPublications, [1971- IoIhul technology : constructiveor destructive? In U.S. TVhite Conference on Chddren. Report to the President.Washing- ton. t.T.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1971: 143452, Eiss, Albert F., and Gabriel D. Ofeish, eds. Scienceeducation and educational technology. Educational technology,v.10, January 1970 : 9-69. Engler, David. Instructional technology and the curriculum. Pin Delta Kappan, v 51. March 1970 : 379481. Evans, Luther H., and George E. Arnstein, edN. :Symposiumon educational hnplications of automation. Washington, National Education Association, 1962. 190 p. Evans, R., H. Roney, and W. McAdams. Automation and the challenge to education. Washington, National Education Association, 1962. Fallon, Berlie J. Fifty States innovate to improve their schools. Bloomington, Indiana, Phi Delta Kappa, 1967. Farrell, Edmund J. English, education, and the electronic revolution. Champaign, National Council of Teachers of English, 1967. 85p. [ED 017 498]. Finley, Robert M. A superintendent's view : stop stumbling over technology. Nation's schools, v. 86, October 1970 : 78-80. Flanagan, John C. The educational program in the schools of the seventies. Education, V. 90, February-March 1970 : 207-212. Foreign language. Audimisual instruction, v. 13, May 1968: 447-470. Frankel, Charles. Education and telecommunications. Journal of higher education, v. 41, January 1970 : 1-15. FreedmanMorris. A proposal for a course of study in AVcommuni- cations. 'Audiovisual instruction v. 13, May 1968 : 494 496. Friedenberg, Edgar Z. Effects of technolocrical mystique on school. ashington, Academy for Education eevelopment, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning; a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 23 p. [ED 039 767]. Fujimura, Osamu. Technological developments for language learning. University of Tokyo Research Institute on Logopedics and Photh- atrics, 1969. 30 p. [ED 035 870]. Ginther, John R. Technology, philosophy and education. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commissionon Instruc- tional Technology." 1970. 36 p. [ED 039 772]. Goldberg, Maxwell E. Needles, burrs, and bibliographies; study resources : technological change, human values, and the humanities. University Park, Pennsylvama State University, 1969. 200p. Goldhammer, H. and R. Westrum. The social effects of communication technology.R-1-86-RSF), Santa Monica, California, Rand Corporation, 1970, 38 p. Goodlad, Jolni I., ed. The changing American school. The sixty-fifth yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education; part IL Chicago, The Society, 1966. 319p. ± . The future of learning and teaching. AV communicationreview, v. 16, Spring 1968: 5-15. Goulet, Richard R., ed. Educational change: the reality and the promise. New York, Citation Pres. 1968. 286p. Green, Thomas F. Schools and communities: a look forward. Harvard educational review, v. 39, Spring_1969: 221-252. Guggenheim, Fred, and Cormne L. Guggenheim, eds. New fiontiei in education, -New York, Grune and Stratton, Inc., 1966.310 Heathers, Glen. Educational philosophy and educational technoogy. Washington Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 40 p. [ED 039 771]. Hechinger, Fred M., John Henry Martin, and Louis B. Wright. The electronic revolution in the classroom: promise or threat ? Occa- sional papeis, no. 14. Washington, Council for Basic Education, 1968. 32 p. I Ieinich, Robert. What is instructional technology ? Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, Mardi 1968 : 220-222. Herbert, Evan, A. special report on technology for education. Inter- national science and technology, no. 68, August 1967: 28 Hirsch, Werner Z. Inventing education for the future. San Francisco, Chandler Publishinff Co., 1967. 353 p. Hitchens, Howard 9, jr. Instructional technology in the Armed Forces. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Com- mission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 62p. [ED 039 746]. Hoban, Charles F. Instruction as a systematic approach to instructional teclmology. Washington, Academy for Educational Develop- ment, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Impi.ove Learning;a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970 18p. [ED 039 751]. Ian, ritual, the establishment and instructional technology. Educational technology, v. 8, October 30, 1968: 5-11. Hocking, E. Technology in foreian language teaching. Modern language journal, v. 54, Febi nary 1670 : 79-91. Hooper, Richard. A diagnosis of failure. AV communication).e vie v. 17, Fall 1969 : 245-264. Humanizing education through technology. Educationaltechnology, v. 11. June 1971 : 9-33. Ianni, Francis A. T. Schools head down the road of change.Southern education report, v. 2. September 1966: 20-23. lanni, Francis A. J., and Peter S. Rosenbaum. Technologyin the urban education market place. Educational technology,v. 10, Sep- tember 1970 : 39 -44. 6 Mich, Ivan. The alternativeto schooling. Saturday 19, 1971 : 44+. review, V. 54, June ,Deschooling society. New York,Harper and Row, 1971.116 p Education without schoolhow it can be done.New You TeView oks, v. 15, January 7,1971 : 23-31. Institute i, Development of Educational of Project A ristot1P .Nctivities, ed. Proceedings Symposium, 1967. Washington,Ntitional Secu- rity IndustrialAssociation, 1969. 642p. Instructional materials : educational media and technology.Rei, iew of educational research,v. 3S, April 1968 : entire issue. Instructiomil teclmology:s',!lectedsources. Allusic educators journal, v. 57, January 1971: 6-7+ . Instructional technology;speci 1 feature Today's November 1970: 33-40. education, v. 39. Iverson, Maurice T.,et al. Educational use in adult basic education technolctry, preparationand pi-ograms. ,polis, National TTni- VerSity EXt0111011ASSOCiat1011. 1967. IED 014 014]. Jackson, Phihp W.The teacher and themachine. Horice Mann ture, 1967. Pittsburpth,University of Pittsburgh lec- Jameson, Spenser, avriFrancis A. Ianni. The Pr(ss, 1968. 90p. processed readMg. readingprocess and WashingtoD, Academyfor EducationalDevel- opment, Inc 0of the supponpapers for "To Improve Learninir; a report to the President andthe Congress of the the Commissionon Insi ructional Teclmology." United States r3y 737 J. 1970. 15 p. [ED 039 Jason, Hilliard.Instructional technologyin medical education. Washington, Academyfor Educational the supportpapers for "To ImproveDevelopment, Inc. One of President and the Congress Learning; a reportto the of the United States-bvthe Commission on Instructional Teclmology."1970. 39 p. [ED 039'1581. Jennmgs, Robert B.Techincal devices andstudent delmmanization. Clearing house,v. 43, September 1968: 17-18. Joyner, Orville D. Social change and educationalinnovation ina Latin American univei.sity.Final report. Pittsburgh 1969. 144 p. [ED 045 048]. University, Judd, M. Educational technology reappraisal.Educational guide, v. 49. Febrmiry1970 : 17+. screen ANT Keeping man's mind. Industry week,v. 169, April 12. 1971: 27-32. Kirschner, Joseph. Educationas technology : implications history ofan idea. Teachers College record, from the 121-126. v. 70, November 196S: Knirk, Fred G., andJohn IV. Childs, eds.Instructional technology. New York, Hok, Rinehartand Winston, 1968.300 p. Kong, S. L. Educationin the orberneticage: a model. Phi Delta Kap- pan, v. 49, October 1967: 71-74. Icristy, Norton F. Thefuture of educationaltechnology. Phi Delta, Kappan, v. 48, January1967 : 240-243. Kurland, Norman. Educational technology in New YorkState : theory, pradtice, and the future.Washington, Academyfor Educa- tional Development,Int;. One of thesupport papers for "To Im- prove Learning; a report to thePresident and theCongress of the United States by the COMInissionon Instructional Technology. 1970. 33 p. [ED 039 757]. The impact of technologyOf education. EdiicationiJ technology, v. 8, October 30, 1968 : 12-15. Lzinf-re, Phil C. Technology, learnhigand mstni( tioiiAudiovisual instruction, V. 13, March 1908: 220-231. Lewis, Philip. Instructionaltechnology : revolutionon the horizon. Nation's SJ1OO15 V 82, December1968 : 58+. Lindquist, E. F. The impact ofmachines on educationalmeasure- ments. BloomMgton, Indiana, Phi DeltaKappa, 1968. Loeliwing, David A. The challengeof technologyi symposium on educatiomd technology. An IDEAoccasional paper. Dayton, Ket- terilw Foundation. 15p. [ED 021 480]. MacKenzie, Norman, MichaelEraut, and Hywel C. Jones.New resources for learning. Prospects in education,v. 1, DO. 3. 1970 : 47-57. Margolin, Joseph B. Psychologicaland social implications of technology for education. The Program ofPolicy itudies in Science and Technology. Washington, George Washingio- p. aud appendices. University, 1967. 70 MartM David W. Urbanizationand media :a new sense of coin- munfty? Educational technology,v. 10, October 1970 : 37-45. McGinn, Noel F., et rd. Thetechnology of instruction in Mexican uni versifies. New York, Education andWorld Affairs, 1968. 76-p. [ED 030 387]. McKee, John M. Dramatic appbcationsof educational teclynology in corrections. Paper presented at AnntialConference on Correctional Education, Carbondale, Illinois,1967. 7 p. ED 025 1541. McLaughlin F. Of knights, lancesand windmills. Media and methods, V. 6. March 1070 : 36+. McLulian, Marshall. Educationin the electronic age. Interchange,v. 1 no. 4, 1970:, Understanding media: the extensions of man. New York, Me Graw-Hill Book Co., 1965.364 p. Time media sixties reviewed.Clearing house, 319-320. v. 44, Januaiy 1970 : Media to teach internationaldevelopment. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, March 1970: entire issue. Meiethenry, IV. C. Instructionaltechnology : humanizingor delmman- izing ? National elementaryprincipal, v. 49, Febrnary 1970: 2:3-28. Meisler, Richard A. Technologiesfor learning_ Washington,Academy for Educational Development,Inc. One of the supportpapers for "To Improve Learnincr; a report to the President find the Congress of the United States'-'by theCommission on InstructionalTech- nology." 1970. 32p. [ED 039 754]. Meredith, Patrick. Edticationalmedia in the next decadeasystem Ole educational analysis.Educational sciencesaninternational journal, v. 2, February 1968:129-136. Mesthene, Emmanuel G. Howtechnology will shape the futltre. erice, v. 161, July 12, 1968: 135-143. Sd- Miller, George E., and WilliamG. Harless. Instructionalteclmology and continuing medical education.Washington, Academy for Edu- 3 65-- -71 2 cational Development, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To 1:;n- prove Learning; a report to the President and the ConaressJf the United States by the Commissionon Educational fWinology." 1970. 27 p. [ED 039 762]. Miller, James G. A suggested ten-yearphased program for developing, evaluating and implementinginstructional t:.lelmologies. Wash- ington, Academy for EducationalDevelopment, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning:a report to the President and the Congress of the United Statesby the Commission on In- sti.nctional Technology." 1970. 19p. [ED 030 765]. Morphet, Edgar L., and David L. .Tesser. Planningfor effective utilization of technology La education. Designingeducation for the future, no. 6. New York Citn,iion Press. 1969. 372p. Muchnik, Melvyn M. Ths inedia ecologist: a man for all seasons. Den- ver, Colorado, Lan,q,uage Arts Society, 1969. 6p. [ED 037 452]. Muller, Herbert J. The children ofFra1kente'ni prhner on modern technology and human values. Bloomington, IndianaUniversity Press, 19i 0, 431 p. Murphy, Albert T. Educational materialsand individual psychology. Journal of education,v. 152, October 19(i9 : 59-68. NatiJnal Commission on Technology,Automation, and Economic Progress. Technology and the Americaneconomy. Educational implications of technolouical change. Appendixvolume TV. Washing- ton, U.S. Govt. Print7 Off., 1966. 151p. New methods and techniques in education.Educational stu ies d(icuments. no. 48. Paris, UNESCO, 1963.[ED 019 857]. Oettinger, Anthony, and Sema Marks.Educational technoto : /lel% myths and old realities, witha discussion and reply. Harvard Uni- versity Program on Technology and Society,reprint no. 6. Cam- bridge, Massachusetts, The Program,(Fall 1968). 59 p. Ofiesh, Gabriel D. Instructional proceduresand media. Educational sciences---an international journal,v. 2, February 1968: 105-07. Tomorrow's educational engineers. Educationaltechnology, v. 8, July 15, 1968: 5-10. Ohanian V. Educational technology: criti Elementary school journa:l,v. 71, January 1971 : 182,197. Ohliger, John. Themass media in adult education; a review of recent literature. [Syracuse, N.Y.], ERICClearinghouse on Adult Edu- cation, 1968. 123 p. Panel on Educational Research andDevelopment. Innovation and experiment in education. Washington,U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1964. 79 p. Perkinson, Henry J. Whither theschools? Notre Dame journal of education, v. 1, Spring 1970: 60-68. Piele, Philip K., Terry L. Eidell, andStuart C. Smith. eds. Social and technological change; implications foreducation. Eugene, Oregon, Center for the Advanced Study ofEducational Administration, University of Oregon, 1970. 67p. Podshadley, Dale W. Instructionaltechnology in dentistry. Washing- ton, Academy for Educational Development,Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learnhig;a report to the President and itt 9 the Congress of the United States by theCommission on Instruc- tional Technology." 1970. 22p. [ED 039 7611 Preschool education. Educational technology,v. 11, February 1971 : entire issue. Ridimond, W. Kenneth. The teaching revolution.New York, Barnes and Noble, Inc., 1967. 220p. FED 041 1121. Ritterbush, Philip C. Museums and media: a basic reference shelf. With Museums and media: a status report, by Richard Grm-e. (-Ties One. Stanford, ERIC Clearinghouseon Educational Media and Technology, 1970. 15p. Rossi, Peter J., and Bruce J. Biddle,eds. The new media and education ; their impact on society. Chicago,Aldine Publishing Co., 1966. 417 p. Saettler, Paul. A history ofinstructional technology. New York, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1968. 399p. The physical scienceversus the behsvioral science concept of instructional technology. Washington,Academy for Educational Development. Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve Learning a report to the Presidentand the Conaress of the United States by the Commissionon Instructional TecOology." 1970. 18 FED 039 776]. p. chmandt, Juergen. Technology andeducation. In Issues in American education, edited by Arthur M. Kroll.New York, Oxford University Press, 1970 : 76-97. School boards and instructionaltechnology or 'my, how you'vegrown, A-V !' American schoolboard journal, 15-26. v. 157, September 1969: Schramm, Wilbur. The educationalmedia and national development. Washington U.S. NationalCommission for UNESCO, [ED 017 188]. 1963. 8 p. Educational technology andthe ERIC Clearinghouse.Educa- tional technology,V. 8, January 15, 1968 : 10-11. The new media: memo to educational planners. Paris,United Nations Educational, Scientificand Cultural Organization, 175 p. 1967. chure, Alexander. Technologicalsystems for education whichadapt technology to people.Washington, Academy forEducational De- velopment, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To ImproveLeal-n- Mg ; a report to the Presidentand the Congress of theUnited States by the Commissionon Instructional Technology." [ED 039 760]; 1970. 26p. Science education andeducational technology.Educational technology, v. 10, January1970 : 9-69. Shane, Harold G. Futureshock and the curriculum.Phi Delta Kap- pail, v. 49, October 1967: 67-70. Sidwell, Robert T. Coolingdown the classroom: some educational implications of the McLuhanthesis. Educational March 1968: 351-358. forum, v. 32, ,Sizer, Theodore R andDavid L. Kirp.Technology and education who controls1 V ashington,Academy for Educational : Inc. One of the Development, support papers for "To ImproveLearning ; a report 10

to the President and theCongre.is of the United Statesbythe Com- misqion on TustrnetionalTechnolo!,-y." 1970. 19 Sp ulding, Seth. Advanced p, ED 039 732]. educational technologies.Prospects in education, v. 1, no. 3, 1970: 9-19. Developments in educationfor the seventies.Audiovisual instruction, v. 16 January 1971: 10-14. Spencer, Richard E.The role of measurementand evaluation in instructional technology.Washington, Academyfor Educational De- velopment, Inc. One ofthe supportpapers for "To Improve Learnhig; a reportto the President and the States by the Commission Congress of the United on Instrmtiomal Technology."1970. [ED 039 756]. p. Squire, James R. Takingthe long view of delivered at the media and machines.Paper International ReadingAssociation Conference, Kansas City, Mo.,1069 12p.[ED 032 206]. Taylor, Calvin W. and Frank E. Williams,eds. Instructional media and cieatvity NewYork, John Wileyand Sons, 1966. 397 Teaching- social studieswith media. A liovisual p. April 1969: entire issue. instraction,v. 14, Technology in learning. An interim reportof the StudyCommitteeon Instructional Aids andTechniques. Toronto, Institute, 1965. 111p. [EI) 031 927]. Ontario Curriculum Teclmology in music teathing, [Specialsection]. Music journal, v. 57, January1971 : 30+. educators Tiekton Sidney G., ed. To improve learning: an evaluation of instructional technology.Vol. I. Partone a report by the Commission Intructional Technology.Part two; Instructional on technology:selected workingpapers on "The State of theArt." New York, Bowker Co.. 1970. 441v. [ED 043 240]. R. R. Torkelson, Gerald M.Eclucational media. teacher. 110- 14. What researchsays to the Washington, Associationof ClassroomTeachers, National EdncationAssociation, 1968. 33p. Trow, William C.Teacher and technology New York, : new design for learning. Appleton-Century-Crofts,1963. 198 p. Twyford, Loren.Educational communkations of educational research. media. in Encyclopedia 380. Fourth edition. MacmillanCo., 1969: 367 U.S. Civil Service Commission. Intructionalsystems and technology: an introduction to the fieldand its use in Federaltraining. Washing- ton, TT S, Govt. Print.Off., 1969. ISp. U.S. Commission on instrtultioAal Technology. Toimprove learning. Vol. II. New York,R. R. Bowker Co., 1971.1,096 p. Congmss House. Committeeon Education and Labor. tional TechnologyAct o 1969. Hearing Educa- mittee on Education. before the SelectSubcom- 91st Congress, 2dsess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. ofr., 1971. Hearingliekl March 12, 1970.184 p. Needs of elementary and the seventies. Parts1, 2 and 3. Hearmgssecondary educationfor committee before -the General Sub- on Education. 91st Congress, 2dsess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Prhit. Off., 1970.Hearings held October November 12, 13, 26 2, 8, 9, 14, 15, 16; ; December 2, 3, 4, 16, 17, i8,1969 ; and March 6, 7, 9 ; April 24, 25, 1970.1,499 p. 11 Needs of elementary and secondary education for the seventies ;a compendium of policy papers. Compiled by the General Subcommittee on Education. 91st Congress, 1stsess. Waslthigton, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1070. 982p. (Committee print To improve learning ; a report to the President and the Co.igress of the United States by the C,,mmissionon In- structional Technology. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1970. 124 p. (Committee print). Committee on Science and Ast';.onautics. A study of technology assessment. Report of the Comm;Iteeon Public Engineer- ing Policy, National Academy of Engi ,ering. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1969. 208 p. Joint Economic Committee. Automation and technology in education. Report of the Subcommitteeo i Economic Progress. 89th Congress, 2d sess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1966. 11p. ( Joint Committee print). Technology in education. Hearings before the Subcom- m'ittee on Economic Progress. 89th Congress; 2dsess, Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1966. Hearings held June 6, 10, and 13, 1966. 273 p. Senate. Committee on, Labor and Public Welfare. Notes and working papers concernincr the administration ofnrograms authorized under Title III of Public Law 89-10, the Ellemcntary and Secondary Education Act of 1965 as amended by Public Law 89450. Prepared for the Subcommitteeon Education. 90th Congress, 1st sess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1967. 557 p. (Committee print). Visual hteracy, ; new developments. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, October 1969 : entire issue. Waomer, Robert W. A series of motion picture docmnents on commuth- gtion theoryand the new educational media. Final po,nt.Cohim- hug, Ohio Stnte trnivPrQity. 1966. 90 p. [ED 010 Ci2F]. Weisgerber, Robert A., ed. Instructional process and mediaiflOi a- tion. Chicago, Rand McNally Co., 1968. 569 p. What is educational technology' ? Educational technology,v. 8, Janu- ary 15, 1968 : entire issue. What schools are doing. Natimi's schools, v. Sfi April 1969: 76+. Wilson, Elizabeth C. The knowiedge machine. Teachers Collegerec- ord. v. 70. November 1908 : 109-119, Wirth, Arthur G. The technological and the ltheian general education. Educational leadership, v. 27, -J17:_;:y 1970 : 796-799. Witt, Paul W. F., ed. Technology and the curriculum. New York, Teachers College Press, 1968. 146 -1-)

B. STANDARDS FOR SCHOOL MEDIA A major educational event in 1968--AASL and DAVI issuenew standards for media programs. The instructor, v. 78, November 1968 : 81-84. American Association of School Librarians and the Department of Audiovisual Instruction of the National Education Association. Standards for sc4eool media programs. Chicago, American Library 12 Association, and Washington,N tio al Education 66 p. .t hon. 1969. Gilman, David Alan. Caninstructional technology survivethe joint media standards ?Educational leadership, 155-157. v. 28, November 1970 : Media standards: myth or reality. Clearing house, 127-128. v 44 October 1969 : Norberg, Kenneth. The challenge of the new media standaids.Audio- visual instruction,v. 14, September 1900 : 19-20.

C. HIGHER EDUCATIONAND TECHNOLOGY Alter, Chester M. Instructionaltechnology and the less affluentcollege. Washington, Academy forEducational Development,Inc. One of the supportpapers for "To Improve Learning dent and the Con ; a report to the Presi- o i.ess of the United States by theCommission on Instructional Tecamlogy." 1970.22 p. [ED 039 7751. Audiovisual 1970-71; report on multimedia technology in iiigheredu- cation. Collegemanaoement, v. 5, October 1970: 11-13. Banisi er, Richard E. Cow-costtechnology in higher education.Educa- tional technology,v. S. No vember 15, 1968 : 14-17. Brown, James IV., andJames W. Thornton. Thenew media in hiplier education : a rationale. Newmedia in higher education.Washington. National Education Association,1963. 182 p. Bntler, Ralph, and JohnStai-key. Educationalcommunications media in the Illinois junior colleges.1970. 9 p. [ED 042 4391. Council on Higher Education inthe American Republics. Educational technology and the university. New York, The Council.1969. 41 p. Davis, John A. "Using instructionalmedia in college. Phi Delta Kap- pan, v. 49, November 1967 : 152-154. Dennis, Lawrence E. Theother end of Sesame Street.Insertion by Hon. Harley 0 Staggers (W.Va.) in the Congressi9nal Record,v. 117, April 27, 1971: E3560-62. (Daily edition). Engel, M. jeremiadon the medium lag in higher education.Educa- tional forumv. 34, January 1970 : 203-207. Farquhar, J A, et al. Applicationof advanced technology toun graduate medical education.Memorandum. Santa Monica, Rand eiorp., 1970. 81 p. [ED 041 474]. Greenberg, D. S. Open university: Britain's new venture in higher education. Science,v. 165, August 29, 1969 : 881-882. Harcleroad, Fred, et al. Learningresources for colleges and universities. Hayward, CaliforniaState College, 1964. 174p. [ED 015 647]. Increasino- the effectiveness ofcommunity college edncafionalpro- grams 'through the use of coordinated instnictionsystems. Sacra- mento, California Junior C,)31egeAssociation, 1970. 32 040 709] p. [ED Instructional Technology Committee ofthe Commissionon Educa- tion of the National Academy ofEngineering. Educational technology in higher edneation thepromises and limitations of ITV and CAI. Washington., The Committee,1969. 22 p. Lippincott, W. T., and R. C. Brasted.Modern teaching aids for college chemistrypottable videorecording syglems,new uses for 18 films, computer assisted instruction. Stanford UniversityAdvisory Council on College Chemistry, 1966. 54p. [ED 01,A 1]. Mac lure, Stuart. England'sopen university ;revelIon at Milton Keynes. Change,v. 3, March-April 1971 : 62-68. McIntyre, Charles J., and John B. Haney. A study of the implications and feasibility of the full application of technologicalaide to the solution of staff, space, and curriculum problems associatedwith a rapidly growing urban university. Finalreport. Chicago Circle, Illinois University, 1967. 104p. [ED 014 228]. Miller, Thomas E. Educational media in instructionalsystems development at the Ohio State University. Cohimbus, Ohio State Univer- sity, Research Foundation, 1967. 76p. rED 013 781]. Nonresidential c(Ilege plans 1971-72 openinguniversityestablishes Empire State Colleffe. Insertion by Hon. Jacob K.Javits (N.Y the Congressional i1ecord,v. 117, May 11, 1971 : E4227-28. (Daily edition) The open university. Reportson education, no. 56, June 1969. 4 p. (Issued by the Department of Education and Science,Curzon Street, London, W. 1). Philipson, Willard, et al. An exploration of the learningresources philosophy and service being developed hi thejunior colleges of Minnesota. Minneapolis, Minnesota University,Department of Audio-Visual Extension, 1968. 4p. [ED 025 257] . Royce, Marion. Theopen university. Continuous learnhig, v. 9, March- April 1970 ; 52-60. Scuphain, John. Broadcasting and theopen -university. Journal of educational technology-,v. 1, january 1970 : 44-51. Siebert, Fred S. An analysis of university policystatements on instructional recordings and theirre-use. Stanford University, ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Media and Technology,1968. 10 p. [ED 023 310]. Snow, Glenn Gardner. An analysis of the doctorallevel prepnration programs in the field of instructional technology at selected institutions. East Lansing, Michigan State Uthversicy,College of Educa- tion, 1969. 160 p. [ED 044 029]. rfhornton, James W., jr. and James W.Brown. New media and college teaching. Washin&ton, AmericanAssociation for Higher Edu- cation ; Department of Audiovisual Instruction,1968. 189 p. [ED 026 863]. University management, (special issue).Educational teclmology,v. 11, May 1971 : 11-45. Unwin, Derick. Media and methods; instructional technology in higher education. New York, McGraw-Hill,1969. 219 p. When college is open to alltheexperiment in Britain. U.S. news and world report, March 1, 1971: 63-64.

D. TECHNOLOGY AND THE EDUCATIONOF THE DISADVANTAGED Allen, William H., et a?. Effects of audiovisual materialsin changing the attitudes -of culturally disadvantagedyouth. Final report. Los Angeles, University of Southern California,1968. 59 p. [ED 020 298] Block, Carl F. Communicating with the urbanpoor : an exploratory inquiry. Journalism,v. 47, Spring 1970 : 3-11. 18 14 Bumpass, Donald E., and Roirc'r L. Gordon. Bridging thegap for the disadvantaged. Audiovisual instruction,v. 12, May 1967 : 44245. Corner, James P. Teclmology and the inner city school. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve Learning ; a report to the President and the Con!vress of the FInit,ed States by the Commissionon InFtructional Technology." 1970. 20 p. [ED 039 7401. 'Conte, Joseph M., and George H. Grimes. Media andthe culturally ditiermt learner. Washington, National Educat ion Association,1969. 47 p. Correcteiv reading programs, Wichita, Kansas :model programs. Childhood education. Prepared for the White HouseConference on Chilthen. Palo Alto, American Institutes forResearch, 1970. 20 p. ED 045 7851. Denmark, George W., awl Marion Metzow.Trends in early childhood and elementary school programs associated withthe current emphasis upon the disadvantaged child. A study of the concentrat ionon educational media resourcesPart IEducationof the culturally disadvantaged. Washington, Educational MediaCouncil, 1967. 19 p. FED 016 6971 Dentler, Robert. Urban education development.Center forum, v. 2, March 15, 1968 : 3-4. Dobbert, Daniel J. Media, anthropologyand the culturally different. Audiovisual instruction,v. 16, ., anuary 1971 : 43-45. Dubrowsky, Edward, and James Fornear. Usingmedia in teaching the disadvantaged. Audiovisual instruction,v. 12, June-July 1967 : 599-600. Edgarton, W. D. Utilization of instructionalmaterials ; practical application to disadvantaged education.Educational screen AV guide, v. 48, October 1969 : 10-11. Frtmsecky, Roger B. Visual literacy and teachingthe disadvantaged. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, October 1969 : 28 . Haberman, Martin. Materials the disadvantagedneed and don't need. Educational leadersiiip, v. 24, April 1967: 611-615. Johnson, Harry A. The educationalneeds of economically deprived children. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, December 1969: 16+. The promises of educational technologyin ghetto schoolsim- plementing the Coleman Report.Washington, Academy for Educa- tional Development, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve Learning; a report to the President and the Congressof the United States by the Commissionon Instructional Technology." 1970. 32 p. FED 039 7381. Martin, John Henry. Kaleidoscope for learning. Saturdayreview, v. 52. June 21, 1969 : 76+. Mathews, Virginia H., and Wenda S. ThompsOn. Mediaand the culturally disadvantaged. Washington, EducationalMedia Council, Inc., 1967. 28 p. [ED 015 221]. Media and the culturally different. Audiovisualinstruction, v. 14, December 1969 : entire issue. Media and the education of the disadvantaaed:., Audiovisual true- tion, v. 10, January 1965: entire issue. 20 c, Ellen Catherine. Audio-visual media and the disadvaiitnged child: a reporton a feasibility study into the contribution which :Indio-visual materials might maketo the education of young dis- advantaged_ children. London, Booksfor School Ltd., 1970. 97p. Parke, Margaret B. Teaching materialsand their implementation: the culturally disadvantaged. Reviewof educational reso:trch,v. 36, June 1966 : 3S3. Ross, Jerrold. The relationship o-F shaple audiovisual techniques to the and the disadvantaged. Audiovisualinstructimi, v. 13, January 1968 : 44-45. Singer, Ira J. Media and the ghettoschool. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, October 1968 : 860-864. Smith, Richard W., et al. Media, andthe education of the disadvantaged. Washington, National [ED on so5]. Education Association, 1965. 70p. Thompson, Wenda. A selectivebibliography on new media and the education of the culturallydisadvantaged. Washington, Educa- tional Media Council, Inc., 1966.23 p. [ED 015 9611. Turney, David. Educationaltechnology and the disadvantaged adolescent. Washington, EducationalMedia Council, Inc., 1967. 12p. [ED 015 219]. Wade, Serena. Media and thethsadvantageda review of the literature. Stanford, ERIC Clearinghouseon Educational Media and Technology, 1969: 24 p. Weinberg, Meyer. Instructionaltechnol ry and the disadvantaged child. Washington, Academyfor Educational "Development, Inc. One of the supportpapers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Congressof the United States by the Com- mission on Instructional Technolo 1970. 15 p. [ED 039 734].

E. TECHNL-OLOGY ANDTHE HANDICAPPED CHILD Blackhurst, A. E. Technology inspecial education. Exceptional children, v. 31, May 1965: 449-456: Erickson, D. The Instructional-MaterialsCenter Network for Handi- capped Children and Youth. Audiovisualinstruction, v. 14, Novem- ber 1969 : 41. Goldstein, Edward. -Selective.audio-visual instruction for mentally retarded pupils. Springfield, Illinois,Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, 1964. 111 p. [ED 012 118]. Haring,-Norris G. Thenew curriculum desion in special education. Educational technology,v. 10,May 1970 ; 241.. New curriculum desion in special education.Seattle, Wash- ington University, Child Developmentand Health Retardation Center, 1958. 36 p. [ED 042 282]. Haring Norris G., and T. C. Lovitt.Operant methodology and educational technology in special education.In Methods in special education, edited by N., G. Haring andR.- Schiefelbusch. New York, McGra-. -Hill, 1967 : 10-48. Hewitt, F. M. Educational engineering withemotionally disturbed children. Exceptional children,v. 33, March 1967: 459467. 21 16 Holland,.Audrey L. Training speechsound d scrimination in children who misarticulatea demonstrationof the use of teaching machine technioues in speeeh correction. Finalreport. Pittsburgh University, 1967. 128 p. [ED 014 476]. [Instructional Materials CenterNetwork for Handicapped Children and Youth].Exceptional children,v. 35, December 1968 : entire issue. Kafafian, Haig. Stiidy of man-machinecommunications systems for the handicapped. C/R/I Secondreport,. Vol. I. Washington, Cyber- netics Research InstituteInc., 1970, 151 p. [ED 043 171]. Kerlsen, Bjorn. Teachingbeginning reading to hearing impaired children, using a visual methodand teachino. machines. Final report. Minneapolis, Minnesota University, 1966'7138 p. [ED 015 603]. Perrin, Donald. Educationaltechnology and the special child. Educa- tional technology,v. 10, November 1970 40-42. Platt, Henry,et al.Automation in vocational training of the mentally rotarded. Final report. Devon,Devereux Foundation, Institute for Research and Training, 1966. 1'79p. [ED 025 046]. Robinson Jacques H., et al. Bimodaleducational inputs to educable mentallyretarded children. Final report. SilverSpring, American Institutes for Research,Communication Research Program, 1966. 147 p. [ED 026 751]. The role of media in special education.Audiovisual instruction, v. 14, November 1969 : entire issue. Ross, Dorothea M. Use ofnew audiovisual techniques to teach mental] v retarded ch'.Idren. California, StanfordUniversity, School of Meaicine, 1965. 3.cp. [ED 010 548]. Seitz, Sue, and Peggy Goulding. Aninvestigation of factors influenc- ing learning in the mentally retarded,and their use in the design of instructional materials; training procedures and automation : effects on MR performances. Interimreport. Austin State School, 1968. 24 D. [ED 025 0871 Stepp. Robert E. A feasibility studyto investigate the instrumenta- tion, establishment, and operation ofa learning laboratory for hard- of-hearing children. Final report. Lincoln, Universityof Nebraska, 1966?I. 299 p. [ED 010 1071. Symposhim on research mid utilization of educationalmedia for teaching the deaf : individualizing instruction for thedeaf student. Lin- coln. Nebraska. Midwest Regional Media Center for the Deaf,1969. 245 n. [ED 043 987]. ITS. (for ,7reNe.HovRe. rommittee on Pducationand Labor, National Center on Educational Media and Materiale for theHandicapped. Hearings before the Select Subcommitteeon Education. 91st Con- gress, 1st sess. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1969. Hearing held June 4, 1969. 26P. National renter on Educational Media rind Ma- terials for ti-.e Hiredicanned; renort to accompany S. 1611. 9ist Congress, 1st sess. Washington, U.S.Govt. Print. Off., 1969. 11p. (Report No. 91-395). Withrow. Frank B.. and Donald W. Brown. An experimentalpro- gram of langna cre development using a systematic flppliention of andio-visual aids to reinforce the classroom teacher'sprogram for 17 children with impaired hearing. Finaleport. Jacksonville Illinois School for the Deaf, 1968. 53 p. [ED 042 294]. Wolinsky, Gloria. Special instructiona_ matenals, nnovations de- velopMg and disseminating materials for thexceptional child. Teacher education, v. 21, January-February 1970 : 12-13. Workshop II : video technology and programs for the deaf ; current developments and plans for the future. Knoxville- Southern Regional Media Center for the Deaf, 1969. 130 p. [En 034 334],

F. VOCATIONAL EDUCATION, GUIDANCE AND COUNSELING, AN TECHNOLOGY Bangs, F. Kendrick, alid Mildred C. Hillestad. Automated dataprocessing for education--cimictilar implications. Detroit, Management Information Services, [1970]. 375 p. Bard, Bernard. Counselors, computers and college selection. School manageme t, v. 13. Septomber 1969 : 44+. Burnham, Frank J. A tentative philosophy for data processMg education in the liigh school. AEDS journal, v. 1, December 1967: 72-80. Bushnell. D. S. Applications of technology in V ocational education. Educational technology, v. 11, March 1971: 9-10. Calder, Clarence R. Modem media for vocational-teclmical education. Hartford, Connecticut State Department of Education, Division of Vocational Education, 1967. 45 p. [ED 030 '726]. Computer careers. Montvale, New Jersey, American Federation of Information Processing Societies, 1968. 24p. Computer science for high school students, School and society,v. 9 January 1970 :6. Cooley, William IV., and Raymond C. Hummel. Systems approaches in guidance. Review of educational research,v. 30, April 1969 : 251-262. Cotrell, Calvin J., and Edward F. Hauck. Educational media invo- cational and technical education a report ofa national seminar. Columbus, Ohio State Uthversity, Center for Vocational Educa- tion, 1967. 225 p. [ED 017 730]. Counseling technology. Educational technology,v. 9, March 1969 : entire issue. Finn, James D., et al. A study of the concentration of educational media resources to assist in certain educationprograms of national concern. Part IIEducational media and vocational education. Final mport. Washington, Educational Media Council, Inc., 1967. 213 p. [ED 014 906]. Katz, Martin R. Can computers make guidance decisions for students ? College Board review, no. 72, Summer 1969: 13-17. Kraft, Richard H. P. Vocational-technical training and technological change. Educational technology, v. 9, July 1969: 12-18. Lewis, Philip. Special equipment perksup vocational education. Na- tion's schools, v. 87, April 1971: 121 + Mecha and vocational education. Audiovisual instruction,v. 15, April 1970 : entire issue. Ryan, C. W., and R. A. Whitman. Video aids in school counseling: some practical innovations. School counselor, v.18, September 1970 : 6944. 2.? ls Swanson, Edwin A. ed. Now media in teachingthe buness subje National Business Education vearbook,no. 3. Washington, National Busines_s .Education Association, 1965.21" v. [EI) 026 512]. Swanson, J. Chester. Instruct ional tethnolgy in service to -rocational- technical education. Washin.olon, Academyfor Ethwational Devel- opmeM, Inc. One of the support,pape!=:,4 for "To Improve Learning; report to the Presidetit and the Congress ofthe United States by the Commission on InstriW ionniTechnoloff." 1970. 24p. [ED 039 759]. Technology in gnidtince; applicatio 1 ','TIUiL1 -nd guidance journal, v. 49, .November 1970: 171-244. Thedford, Shirley... ProoTanunimr: toteach or not to teach inec- ondary schools. AEDS monitor,v. 0, Janutay 1971: Tonkin, William. Vocational guidancethrough -videotaping and television. 1967. 6 p. FED 036 0471. U.S. Office of Education.Conumter-based vocational guidancesys- tems. Washington, T.T.S. Go-,t. Print. Off.,1969, 168 p. Vocational education. Educationaltechnolocryv. 11 en ti re issue. 7 -1 March 1971 : G. TrAmERs AND TECLINOLQGY Acquino, Charles C. Teacherattitudes toward audiovisualinstruction as they are influenced by selected factorswithin teaching environments. AV communication review,v. 18, Summer 1970: 187-195. Allen, Dwight, and KevinRyan. Microteaching. Reading,Massachu- t ts, Addison-Wesley PublishingCo., 1969, 151p. Aspy. David N. Towtu.cla technology which helps teachers humtmize their classrooms. Educationalleadership,v. 626-6:28. 2S. March 1971 : Association for EducationalDataSystems. Training teachers technology. A special for report of two conferences of deans ofeducation. Washington, TheAs,mciation, 1967. 44p. Borg, Walter IiPhilip Langer,a dal Marjorie L. Kelly-. The mini- course: a new tool for the educationof teachers. Education,v. 90, February-March 1970: 222-238. Brabner, George, jr.The leeline of pedagocentricity.Educational technology, v. 10, November 1970: 11-18. Brown, Donald J., andJames W. Brown. Effectsof special media instituteprograms upon the behavior of Title XINDEA Institute &rectors. Final report.Washington, National EducationAssocia- tion, 1966. 75p. [ED 016 406]. Brown, James W., andKenneth D. Norberg. Administeringeduca- tional media, New York,McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1965,357 p. Carter, Luther J. Technologyin the schools: educatorsare uneasy. Science, v. 153, September30, 1966 : 1624-1626. The changing role of theteachcr. Educational technology,v. 10, Feb- ruai.y 1970 : entire issue. Crim, Alonzo A. Technologyfor pre-service and in-servicetraining of teachers of ghettochildren. Washington, Academyfor Educa- tional Development, inc.One of the supportpapers for "To Im- prove Learning; a report to thePresident and the Congressof the .19 United States liy the Commission on instructional Technology." i 970. 21 p. [ED Culkin, J Caring for media teachers. Media zind inethods,v. 7, Oc- tober 1970: 56 Dible, I. W. Teacher in a multi-mediated satin.% Educational leadership- NoVellther 1971) : I 2 8 Dunn, Rita, Stafford. Individualizing instructionteuming teachers and imdizt specialists to meet individual student needs. Audiovistua Mstruction, v. 16, May 1971: 27-28. ELS teacher education prognint. '%V t'1t ingtou, E -Janguage Services, Inc., 1067. 7,000 p. [ED 036 795]. Eboch, Sidney C. Toward a profession :certification. Audiovisual instruction, v. 14, April 1069: 72-- Edinger, Lois V. Educational technology and the teachino. profession. Washington, A. :aderny for Educational Development,bIne. One of the support papers for "To improve Learning; a report to the President and the Congi.ess of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 22 p. [ED 039 7411. Erickson, Carlton W. H. Administerino. instructional mediapro- gams,r New York, Macmillan Co., 19687660 p. Freeman, Stanley L., jr., Mtehers and televisicn; the master-slave re- lat ionship. Clearing house,v. 42, Deeeniiier 1967 : 198-203. Glasser, Ira. Confrontation in the classroom: technology vs, the teacher. Rotarian, v. 3, October 1967: 22+. Gri-ant, Alfi.ed D. A study of the personality characteristics of theac- ceptor and the rejector of the newer educational media among sec- Ondary teachers of Wisconsin. Madison Wisconsin University, School of Education, 1969. 125 p. [ED 04 899]. Haney, John B., a nd tldon J. Ullmer. Educational media and the teacher. Issues and Innovations in Education 'Series. Dubuque, Wil- 1 ir,m C. Brown Co., 1970. 130p. [ED 043 237]. Harrison, Charles II. When Nvill technologymove in on tehchers? School management, v. 13, Octo-oer 1969 : 76 ± Heinich, Robert. Technology and teacher productivity. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, January 1971: 79-82. Horst, Donald P., et a7.Experimental evaluation of the ELS teacher education program. Final report. Pittsburgh, American Institutes for Research, 1970. 66 p. [El) 042 073]. Ingle, Henry T. A basic reference shelfon the new media and teacher training. Series 1. Stanford, ERIC Clearinghouseon Educational Media and Technology, 1968. 11 p. Jackson, P. W. The teacher and the machine. Pittsburgh, University o P ittsburgh Press, 1968. 90 p. Joyce, Bruce R. The teacher and his staff : man, media, and machines. Washington, National Education Association, 1967. 28p. Knezevich, Stephen J.., ed. Instructional technology and the school administrator. Washington, American Association of School Ad- mithstrators, 1970. 146 p. Knirk, Frederick G. Basic functions of an A--Vprogram. American school and university, v. 40, April 1968.: 43-14. Lange, Carl J. Teacher education and educational technology. Edu- cational technology, v. 8, December 30,1968 :13-16. 20 Larson, L. C. Increasing demand Yor educational technologistsputs bee on colleaes, uthversities to hdp fillgap. Educational media, v. 1, Novembe;1969 Le Baron, Walt. Systems analysis and learning systems in the development of elementuy teacher education models. 'Washington. T GoVt. Print. Off., 1970. 49 p. Lem ler, Ford L. The teacher and media. Audiovisual instruction,v. 15, May 1970 : 47=19. Lewis, Edward Eugene. A study to determine teacher perceptions in relation to educational media. Lubbock, Texas Technological Col- lege, School of Educatioll. Paper presented at annual meeting of the Deputnient of Audiovisual Instruction, National Education Association, Detroit, 1970. 84 p. [ED 040 601]. (Ann Arbor, Uni- versity Microfilms Inc.). Loughary, John W. Can teachers survive the educatiomil revolution ? Phi Delta Kappan, v. 48, January 1967 : 204-207. Media and teacher education. Audiovisual Mstruction,v. 12, De e ber 1967 : entire issue. Melching, William IL. Edward W. Frederickson, and Paul G. r more. Introducing hmovation in instruction :in-service teacher workshops in classroom management. Technical reportno. 70-104. Alexandria, Virghlia, Human Resources Research Organization, 1970. 39 p. Mikes, Donald F. Contract practices for 'IT teachers. Audiovisualin- struction, v. 13, December 1968 : 1091-1094. Teachers in television ancl other media. Washington, Natiomtl Education Association, 1969. 75 p. Miller, Paul David. The relationship of teacher perceptionsof a school's audiovisual climate to the organizational structureof its media program. Madison, -Wisconsin University, Schoolof Edu- catien, 1969. 123 p. [ED 042 337] (Ann Arbor, UniversityMicro- films, Inc.). Morrison, James. Educational TV and audiovisual teachertraining program for Title I board of education teachers of disadvantaged pupils in the nonpublic schools. New Yolk, Center forUrban Ed- ucation, 1967. 44 p. [ED 024 285]. Olivero, James L. Micro-teaching: medium for improving instruction. Columbus, Ohio. C. E. Merrill, 1970. 83 p. Perlberg, Arye. Microteaching : an innovative laboratoryprocedure. Pi.ospects in education, v. 1, no. 3, 1970 : 31-39. Popham, IV. James. Instructional product development: two approaches to training. AV communication review,v. 15, Winter 1967:402-411 Professional education. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, January 1969 : eiitire issue. Radvak, Betty Jean. The teacher and technology. Theoryinto practice, v. 7, October 1968 : 142-145. Ramsey, Curtis Paul. Elementary teacher preparationinterfacewith media. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, April1971: Ryan, Kevin. Teacher training in instructional technology.Washing- ton, Academy for Educational Development, Inc.One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President 21 and the Congress of the UnitedStates by the Commissionon In- structional TechnoloTv." 1970. 25p. [ED 0:l9 745]. Sehueler, Herbert, and *Gerald S.Lesser. Teacher education and the new media. 1Vashington, American Association ofColleges for Teacher Education, 1967. 122p. Selden, David, mid, Robert Bhaerman.Instructional technologya I the teaching profession. Tca,chersCollege record, 71, February 1970 : 391-4(i6. Shipley, C. pitIorton, et al. Asynthesis of teaching methods. Toronto. .11eGraw-Hill CO. Of C:111 :Ida, Ltd.,1904, 270 p. [ED 028 634]. Stowe, Richard A. Putting salton the ticrer's tail, or how to work with teachers. Audiovisual instruction,v. 13, Lk_pril 1968 : 335-337. Systematic observation. Journal ofresearch and development in education, v. 4, Fall 1970: entire issue. Teacher education. Audiovisualuisti 'tion, v 16, March 1971: er tire issue. Thatcher, David. Teachersvs technicia is: we still have a choice. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 49, A_pril 1968 : 435-438. Tobias, Sigmund. Dimensions of teacheisattitudes toward instructional media. American educationalresearch journal,v. 5, January 1968 : 91-9S. iderMeer. A. W. How teachers and administratorscm be given a better indoctrination on the potentialities anduses of instructional technology. Washington. Academy for EducationalDevelopment, Inc. One of the support papers for "ToImprove Learning:a report to the President and Congress of theUnited States by the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970.25 p. FED 039 744]. Wilson., Norman Ward. Newer media education;problem solveror problem maker? Clearing house,v. 43, September 1968: 1.4-16. Y,amg, David B. The modification ofteacher behavior using audio video-taped models in a micro-teachingsequence. Educational leadership. v. 26, January 1969 391+. Ziener, George H., et al. -Educational technologyproject. Vol, 1. The development of materials for the trainingof science education personnel in educational technology. Finalreport. Washington, National Science Teachers Association, 1970. 112p. [ED 044 292].

H. COST OF EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY

Carter, C. M.. and Itf. J. Walker. Costs of installing andoperatIno- instructional television and computer assistedinstruction in palic schools. Booz, Allen and Hamilton, Inc., 1968. The cost of aud;o-visual instruction. Schoolmanagement, v. 10. June 1966: 111-120. The cost of audio-visual instruction1962-63/68-69. School management, v. 12, October 1968.67 . The cost of audio-visual instruction, 1970-71.School management, v. 14, October 1970 : 25-29. --;rf--r- Cost study of educational mediasysterns and their equipmentcompo- Es= nents. Vol. III, a supplementary report: computer assisted instruction. Final report. Washington,General Learning Corp., 1968. 114 p. [ED 024 281]. 22

Dressel. Panl L. et a7. Aprocedural and cost analysisstudy of media in imitructiona 1 system,:development. Quarterly technicalreport. East Lansing, MichiganState University, 1965,89 p. [ED 011 050]. The educotion technologymarket. New York, Frost Inc., 1969. 170p. and Sullivan, Evers, ANT. C. Mediaseminar on mediacost-effectiveness. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, June 197077. olinson. li Cra. mid Tohn E,bietrich. Costam lysis of instruction :11 echnology. W-ashington,Academy for Educational inc. One Development, the supportpapers for "To Improve Learning:a report to the President, and theCongress of the United Statesby the Com- mission oil Instruction:11Technolopy." 1970. 19 Km rk, Frederick G. p. [ED Oln 780]. Technology and curriculumplanning: cost-effee- tiveness of Mstruction.Audiovisual instruction, 260-.262. v. 13, March 1968: Kopstein. Felix F.. mlRobert J. Seidel. C struction versus traditionally 'Triter admithstered in- administered instruction: economics. AV communicationreview, v. 16, Summer1968 : 147-178. Marlowe, John W.Media and May I 969 : 57-59. money. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, Miller, James G.Decidin!, whether andhow to use educational nology in the lightof cost-effectiveness tuh- Academy for Educational evaluation. Washington, Development, Inc. Oneof the support papers for "To improveLearning': a reportto the President and the Congress of theUnited States bythe Commission tional Technology."1970. 49 p. [ED on Instruc- Quade, E. S. 039 728]. Cost-effectivenesssometrends in analysis.Santa Monica, Rand Corp.,1967. [ED 013491]. (Clearinghouse eral Scientific andTechnical information). for Fed- Sovereign, Michael G. Costs of educationalmedia systems, Series Stanford, ERICClearinghouse II. nology, 1969, 38p. on Educational Media andTech- Speagle, Richard E.The costs of ington Academy instructional technology.Wash- for EducationalDevelopment, Inc. Oneof the supporlpapers for "To ImproveLearning; dent and the Congressof the United a report to the Presi- Instructional Technology." States by the Commissionon 1970. 36p. [ED 039 727].

I. FACILITIESAND TECHNOLOGY American Associationof SchoolAdministrators. School Buildings.Schools for America. Commissionon tion, 1967. 175p. Washington, TheAssocia- Anderson, D. Carl.Open-plan schools. vember 1970: 840. Education digest,v. 36, No- Architecture andeducation. Harvard 1969: entire issue. educational review,v. 39, Fall Association for ChildhoodEducation International. children on theirown. Washington Tite Learning centers: The audiovisualdepartment Association, 1970.84 p. comes of age. AmeHeanschool and.un versity, v. 40, February1968 : 24 . Tht -an School. bury 1(L11Califoiiiia. Timber School Dis- t! ict. 1967.19 p. [1,1,) 0:17 044 Baugh: flil,M. Dale, and Robert F. Eberle. Theopen classroom ; guide- ] i, 109 the creative te:icher. Clearing heliSe,V. 39, AIarch 1965 : 387-390. Bonner, Dan. (nrd Marj Wightman.ledia units grow into service miters. Audiovisual instruction. v. 16, Atty 1971: 81-82. Brown, Robert M. The learning center. AVcommunication review 16, Fall 1968 : 2 94wo. Buch, John N',11 experimental project tomeasure certain facets of language gro th for high school students inbeginning French when variations of language laboratory equipmentare utili ed in the instructional process. Easton, Area Joint ITighSchool System. 40 p. [ ED 016 408]. Building ideas tha t savemoney. American school and university, v. 43, Februai.y 1971 : Carter, Joseph B. Learning laboratories in NorthCarofina. Educ, tional technology, v. 8, September 30,1968: 5-10. Castaldi, Basil. Creative planning of educational facilities.Chica Rand MeNally,1969.364P. Chase, William W. Off-the-shelf schoolhouses; buildino. with bigger blocks. American education, v. 7, JanuaryFebruary1971: 8-10. The one-room schoolhouse and how itgrew. American education, v. 3, May 1967 : 8-12. Urban design-athon. American education,v. 4, November 1968 : 4-6. Clark, Arvel B., and John R. Grube. Environmental implicationsof a continuous-progress program. NASSP bulletin,v. 55, March 1971 : 68-74. Clincy, Evans. North Hageistown high school,Hagerstown, Mary- land. Profiles of significant schools. New York,Educational Facili- ties Labs., Inc., 1960.23 v. [ED 031 S75]. Coffey, Samuel J. Planning facilities foran educational program. Clearing house v. 45, November 1970: 169-173. Cooper, James 6., and Carl H. Ivey. A comparativestudy of the educational environment and the educationaloutcomes in an under- ground school, a windowless school, and conventional schools.Santa Fe, New Mexico Department of Education, 1964.82p. Coughlin, Gaila ed. Transformation of the schoolhouse.New York, Educational iacilities Labs., Inc. 1969. 51p. [ED 034 370]. Cutler, Marilyn H. The future perks along in thepresent. American school board journal, v. 156, March 1969: 22-25. 1-2-3-1: what's new and bright in schools ? American school board journal, v. 156, January 1969 : 9-20. Dave Chapman, Inc., Industrial Design. Design for ETV: planning for schools with television. New York, Educational FacilitiesLabs., Inc., 1968.96 p. Davis, Donald, and John A. Shaver. New ideas in urban education. Nation's schools, v. 83, March 1969 : 67-82. Davis, Harold S. Instructional materials center: an annotated bibliography. Cleveland, Educational Research Council of GreaterCleve- land, 1965. 34 p.

-861-71- 24 Organizing a learning center. Cleveland, Ohio. Educationa 1 Research Council of America., 1968. 23 p. De BernArdis, Arno, et al. Planning schools for new m,!dia. Washing- ton, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1962. 72 p. Dickenson. Leslie. The language laboratory and ady' nt d teachh.g. English language teaching, v. 25, October 1970 : 32- 42. Di Santo. John D. The media laboratory. Education, v. Oikpril- May 1970 : Drummond, T. Darrell. The learning centern. chance for every child. National elementary principal. v. ro, September 1970 : Eberle, Robert F. The open space school. Clearing house, I-. 44, Sc-ptein- ber 1969 : 23-28. Education parks. InU.S. Commission on C Rights. Racial isolation in the public schools. Vol. 1. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1967 : 167-183. Educational Facilities Laboratories. The schoolhouse in the city. 1966. New York, Educational Facilities Labs., Inc. 1966. 44 p. Educational parks. NEA journal, v. 57,Marcli 1968: 44-47. Ellsworth, Ralph E., and Hobart D. Wagener. Th( school library facilities for independent study in the secondary school. New York, Educational Facilities Labs., Inc., 1963. 142 p. Elstein, H., and F. R. ITartz. Standards, selection, and the media center : where are we now ? Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, December 1970 : 35-39. Facility technologycatalyst for learning. Columbus, Council of Edu- cational Facility Plannem1969. 54 p. FED 029 4701 Farmer, Margaret, and Ruth Weinstock Schools without walls. New York, Educational Facilities Labs, Inc., 1965. 56 p. Featherstone, Richard. Space design and equipment for the CAI laboratory. American school and imiyersity, v. 40, April 1968 + Fernandez, Alfred P. The educational park : a second look. Journal of secondary education, v. 45, May 1970 : 223-229. Fischer, John H. The school park. In U.S. Commission on Civil Rights. Racial isolation in the public schools. Vol. 2.Washino-ton, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.,1967 : 253-260, School parks for equal opportunities. Journal of Negro ed- cation, v. 37, Summer 1968 : 301-309. Gilkey, Richard. Designing space for use of instructionalhardware. Clearing house, v. 45, December1970 : 255-256. Gilliland, John W. The trend toward functional schools. American school and university, v. 39, March 1967 : 36-38. Gilmore, Henry Martin, fr. The relationship between new instructional programs and certain selected flexible features of school buildings. (Doctoral dissertation, UniVersity of Washington, Seattle ). Ann Arbor, Michigan, UniversityMicrofilms, 1965. 196 p. (No.

65-11,462). . Gottardi, Leslie. Instructional media center survices in the nongraded elementary school. Audiovisual instruction, v.16, April 1971 : 30 +. Graves, Ben E. Modernization. Nation'S schools, v. 87. April 1971 : 57-94. Green, Alan E., ed. Educational facilities with new media.Washing- ton, Department of Audiovisual Instruction, National Education Association, 1966. 209 p. 25 ross, Ronald. and Judith Murphy. Educational change and architectural consequences ; a report on faeilitics for individualized instruction. New York, Educational Facilities Lab., Inc., 1968. 88p. Hauf, Harold, Wayne Koppes. Alan Green, Marion Gassman and David Havi land _Lew spaces 'for learning: designing college facilities to utilize instructional aids and media. Troy, New York, Cen- ter for Architectural Research, Rensselaner Polytechnic Institute, 1966 137 p. Helvey, T. C. Educational facilities in the urban environment.Edu- cational technology, v. 10, September 1970: 33-35. Hocking, Elton. Language laboratory and language learning. Wash- ington, Department of Audiovisual Insicuction, National Educa- tion Association, 1964. 210 p. Horton, LONVOli, and Phyllis Horton. Learningcentersa working bibhography. Audiovisual instruction,v. 15, December 1970 : 60-62. The instructional materials center; philosophy, facilities, and design. Audiovisual instruction, v. 12, October 1967: entire issue. Instructional media centers. Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, September 1969 : entire issue. Jennings, Wayne. Educational parks: tomorrow's schools. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, October 1970: 42-44. Keppel, Francis. Educational technology andthe educational park. In U.S. Commissionon Civil Rights. Racial isolation in the public schools. Vol. 2. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print.Off., 1967 : 269-273. Lavin, Richard J. New technique improvesschool facilities planning, Audiovisual instruction,v. 14, October 1969 : 58-59. Lawson, Alan M. Whatwe learned about K-5 learning centers. Na- tion's schools v. 80, July 1967: 30-32. Lewis, Philip. More media, services foundin modern resource centers. Nation's sehools, v. 85, January.1970: 82 . MacConnell, James D., and Clarke E. Schiller.A basic reference shelf on facilities for instructional media. Series 1. Stanford, ERIC Clearhighouse on Educational Media and Technology,1968. 13 p. Marland, Sidney P.,p The education park concept m Pittsburgh. Compact, v. 2, March 1968: 38-40. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 48, March 1967 : 328-33' Masiko, Peter, in, and Frank Bouwsma.New learnina centers stimulate media innovation at Miami-Dade.American scaol and university, v. 39, May 1967: 60-62. McBride, Otis. The library mediacenter of today. Educational leadership, v. 28, November 1970: 151-154. McDaniel, Marjorie C. A uthversity studentaid center. Educational leadership, v, 28, March 1971: 641 + McVey, E. G. Modifying the home intoa learning envimnment. Edu- cation, v. 91, April-May 1971: 323 -332. Miller, James. The learning laboratory in adultbasic education. Col- umbus, 'Ohio State Department of Education,1969. 31 IN [ED 034 950]. Model programs. Childhbod education Bostonpublic schools learn- Mg laboratories. Palo Alto, American Institutefor Research, 1970. 21 p. [ED 044 893]. Morisseau James J. Schoolhouse he city. Saturday revie 50, March 18, 1967 : 58-59. 26 Myrick, Richard. Architecturea dynamic f ctor in learning. Educa- tional technology, v. 8, April 30, 1968 : 3-6. National Council on Schoolhouse Construction. NCSC guide for planning school plants. East Lansing, Michigan, The Council, 1964. 156 v. The new learning eivoiiiiieiit. School manttgement, v. 13, October 1969 : 44 -I-. Nimnicht, Glendon P., and Arthur P ntiiclgc Dcsigns for small h;e1 schools. Greeley, Colorado, Educational P1 tnniiig Service, Colorado State Colle,e, 1962. 83 p. Nova High School sets a new pace. American school and university, V. 38, June 1966 :4143. On the drawing board. Nation's schools, V. 87, April 1971 : 114-115. One room schoolhouse 1972 style. School management, v. 13, April 1970 : 17-20. Pearson, Neville P., and Lucius Butler. Instructional materials centei.s ; selected readings. Minneapolis, Burgess Publishing Co., 1969. 341 p. Performance plus with today's high-style language labs. American school and university, v. 39, April 1967 : 38-39. Pettigrew, Thomas F. Urban integration : the metropolitan educational park concept. In Issues in American education, edited by Arthur M. Kroll. New York, Oxford University press, 1970 : 118- 1g8. Planning modern learning facilities. Educational technology, v. 10, June 1970 : entire issue. Powell, Judith. From lthrary to media center : theie s a difference. NASSP bulletin, v. 55, March 1971 : 79-85. Reindorp. Reginald C. The ole of the !Am 1 tory in the fureign language ,program. Wichita, American Association of Teachers of Spanisn and Portuguese, 1962.8 p. [ED 017 209]. Rhodes, Charles W. Educational parks provide cooperative services. Appalachia, v. 2, September 1968 : 9-11. SCSD : the project and the schools. New York, Educational Facilities Labs., Inc., 1967. 92 p. Shaw, Frederick. The educational park in New York : archetype of the school of the future ? Phi Delta Kappan, v. 50, February 1969 : 329-331. Smith, Philip D., in, and Emanuel Berger. An assessment of three foreign teaching strategies utilizing three language laboratory systems. Harrisburg, Pennsylvania State Department of Public In- struction, 1968. 229 p. [ED 021 512]. Smith, IV. Flint, and Gail Littlefield. The language laboratory and the electronic classroom : a comparison. Bloomington, Indiana Univer- sity, Indiana Language Program, 1967. 408 p. [ED 037 103]. Stack, Edward M. The language laboratory and modern language teaching. Fair Lawn, Oxford University Press, 1966. 234 p. [ED 023 293]. Static in the language lab. Today's education, v. 58, October 1969 : 49-51. Systems : an approach to school construction. New York, Educational Facilities Labs., Inc., 1971.96 p. 27 Tanzman. Jack. I-Tow to get. rolling withyour media center. School Ina na!,ei oent, v. 13, March 1969 : 90. Taylor, Kenneth 1. The instructional materialscenter : a theory um. lying its development. Wilson library bulletin,v. 43, October 1968 : 165-168. They're cai es. not cagesand (wouldyou believe) children learn in them. American school board journal,v. 158, May 1971 : 20-22. Commisximi Rights. Educationarks ;appraisals of plans to improve educational quality and desegregatethe schools. Clearinghouse publication, 9. Washington, U.S.Govt. Print. Off., 1967. 104 p. U S Offie of Education. Descriptivecase studies of nine elementary chool media centels in three Miler cities.Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., [1969]. 200p. Von Eckardt. Wolf. "Life-styl education. Satu .day review,v. 54, April 3, 1971 : 64. Wanzel, J. Grant. On the containment of education.Interchange, V. 1 no. 4, 1970 : 89-95. What's happening to SCSD and why.Interview with Ezra Ehren- krantz. Nation's schools,v. 83, April 1969 : 55-57. Wines, Donald B. The direction of school design.Compact, V. 3, Feb- ruary 1969 : 34-37. AVitherspoon, John P., and William J. Kessler.Iristiuctionaltle- u ision facilities : a plr fining guide. Washington, U.S.Govt. Print. Off., 1969. 73 p. Wolff, Max. The educational parkconcept. Wilson library bulletM,v. 42, October 1967 : 173+. Educational park development M the UnitedStates, 1967. New York, Center for Urban Education, 1967.33 p. Wrenn, Harold 'W. First SCSD unitopens in North California. American school board journal.v. 154. April 1967 : 12-15. Yamasaki, Kim, and David M. Cox. A schoolfor the 70's; the module of one. Nation's schools,v. 85, March 1970 : 56-72. Young, Clarence W., and Charles A.Choquette. An experimental study of the relative effecfiveness of foursystems of language laboratory equi?ment in teaching French pronunciation.Hamilton, Col- gate Umversity, 1963. 114 p. [ED 018 162].

J. BUSINESS AND EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY' Ardman, Harvey. The electronic schoolroomof tomorrow. Themaga- zine of Wall Street,v. 120, May 27, 1967 : 29-47. Baqta, Trudy W., and Patricia Marshall.Bringing schools and industry tocrether. Manpower,v. 2, June 1970 : 24-31. Beckwith, thigh. Innovations in industry likelyto affect instructional technology during the next tenyears. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Tmprove Learning; a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commissionon Instrulional Technology. 1970. 33 p. [ED 039 735]. Burt, Samuel M., and Leon M. Lessinger.Volunteer industry involvement in public education. Lexington,Massachusetts, D.C. Heath and Co., 1970. 203P. 33 Carlson, Elliot. Educa ion and industry: troubled partnership. Satur- day review,V.53, _August 15, 1970 : 45+. Chamber of Commerce of the United States. What isthe responsibility of business in modernizing education? Washington, The Chamber, 1-1963]. 19p. Educators OK indugtryin ghetto schools Natrnn schools, March 1970 : 108. Goodinan, Paul, Donald W. Oliver, Gerald Holton, 0.Howard Goold, und Edward L. Katzenbach. Discussion: the education industries. T Tar yard educational review,v. 37-, Winter 1967 : 107-124. Gould. Karolyn. Why it's beenso tough to innovate in education. Iip,ovation, no. 14, 1970: 12+. Harrington, Michael. The social-industrialcomplex. Thirper's magazine, v. 235, November 1967: 55-60. Heddinerer, Fred M. Industry's role in educationdeflned. AnThrican schoolboard journal, v. 154, September1967: 29-31. High marks in tbe teaching business. Businessweek, May 2 1970: -k Industry and education. Library journal,v. 92, October 15, 1967: 3807-3814. Kaplan, Ralph. Learning the hardway, ; in the knowledge industry, ost corporate freshmen have flunked. Barrons, 3+. November 18, 1968 : Keppel, Francis. The business interest in education.Phi Delta Kap- pan, v. 48, January 1967: 187-190. The knowledge industry and theschools. Independent school bulletin, v. 27, May 1908: 14-17. New Mationships between educationand industry. Public administration rPview, r. Jnly-Augnst 1970 : 353-359. Kobrak, Ingrid B. Education market.Editorial research reports,v. 11, December 21, 1966 : 927-944. Koerner, James D. EDC: GeneralMotors of curriculum reform. Saturday review, v. 50, August 19, 1967: 56 + Krich. Percy. Educationservantof industry. School and society,v. 97. Summer 1969 : 280-281. Lf.haney. Francis. The shakeoutin education. Exchange,v. 30, May 1969 : 1-7. Leisure and education. Forbes,v. 103, January 1969 : 170+. Liebeiman, Myron. Big business,technology, and education. Phi Delta Kappan, V. 48, January 1967: 185-186. Locke, Robert W. Has the educationindustry lost its nerve? Saturday review, V. 54, January 1, 1971: 42+. Locke, Robert W., wmi David Engler.Instructional technology: the capabilities of industry to help solveeducational problems. -Wash- ington, Academy for Educational Development,Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Conefress of the tTnitedStates by the Commissionon In- strudional Technology." 1970. 16p. [ED 039 731]. Logan, Edgar. Schools andcorporationspartners in Detroit. Scho- lastic teacher, v. 94, March 21, 1969: 14-15. Mayer, Martin. Schools and business worktogether...but not often. Bell telephone magazine,v. 4, July-August 1969 : 10-15. McLuhan, 7,v_oarsha1l. The mediumis the 1essnge. NEA journal October 1967: 21 27. National Industrial Confemnce T3o t.-trdo Industry aid to edu -1,;ton; a research report from the Conference Bo:Ardo [New_York. The Con- ference Board, 0. 1965] 91 p. (/ts Studies in public airours, no. 1. Nelson, Bert. Industry and education. School and society, vo 96. No- vember 9, 1968 : 4W101. Ofeish, thtbriel Do The new educatifEi and the Ic lining industry. Educational leadership, v. 26, 1969: 760-703. Pearse, Benjamin 11. Business industry :Ind education inc. ;kmerican education, v. -1, November 1968: 13-15. Peyser, Joseph L. The educational consult. and commercially diwed instructional media. School and soci V. 95. 4un utici Prime, Jo D. A school district enters priv-tteiiiiii ss . Educooional technology, vo 9, August 1969: 53-55. Ramo, Simon, (old Leo E. Persselino Changin[r funci ;011S":)-1' 'whim schools: the role of industry. Educational technoloo-y, v. Septem- ber 1970 : 58-60. Rice, Robert L. The relationship between educationo tibusiness. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, February 1968: 124-126. Schmidt. Charles To, jp. Education : can business do a liettcr jot agement of persomwl quarterly, V. 7, Spring 1963: 36-39. Shrag, Peter. Kids computers, aiml corporations. Saturday r0VieW,V. 0, MaV 20, 1967 : 78 Efrem. The education hidustry; busines and schools takea second look. School manaoement, v. 12, October 1968: 89+. Silverman, Charles. Technolbogy is knocking at the schoolhouse door. Fortune, vo 74, August 1966: 120+. -Slaughter, Robert E. The educator and Cie indn4u alist. NEA journal, v. 56, February 1907 : 27-29. Smith, Robert G., jr. The media uninnfacturer tind the edncitor. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Imprw e Learninw;a report to the Presi- dent and the Conaress of the ITTotited Statesby the Commission(1 Instructional Technology." 1970. 19 p. [RD 039 733]. Strogott, Alfred. Business takes a new look at educationo Educational forum, v. 31Janunry 1967; 135+. Tools for teaching. Fot:bes, vo 102. August 1, 1968: 38+. Vanderslice, Thomas A. Four problems, four opportunities. Saturday review, v. 51, January 1968: 45÷. Woltle, Davi. Industr wad education. Science,v. 153, September 30 1966: 1598.

K. RI:Sri ARCH IN EDUCATIONAL TECHNOLOGY The affective domain; a resource book for media specialists. Conti. butions of behavioral science to instructional technology, 1. Wash- ington, Communication Service Corp., 1970. 179 p. Allen, William II. Categories of instructional media research. View- points, v. 46, September 1970: 1-13. Instructional media research: past, present, and future. AV comminication review, v. 19 Sprinff 1971: 5-18. 35 30 Baker, Eva L. The instruct onal objectives change : assistncc in ,roztl- H fereneed evaluation. Journztl of sec iziry echmttion, v. kpril 1970: 1d8-162. Ii1 r, William P. The search for quaiii IleNV ill 01-0111:II oP or edll(":tion. V. 44, Derendwr 190: Bontiy. w4'1,.(1 iiInio;,0\-im ethic:Li 1011:11 t :..tu-1:IN illVeli- toPI Ille1S111Vs 01. :I iVe h011aV1(1:*. fOr

:111d DONA0111110111, Nnt IIIII 1 E,Iticzll 19(;!). Us! p. v ioral obieel iv es ii_11 humm lii reacher zlid technology ;=upplenie :;0=;-;(;, liernabai, Raymond. Behavioral 0 an :num:ate(' rcso PennsvIvani:, pw.tinent ()I Puldic in,;: nuIt In, [0(;91. -1-r) lienjamin (I i oduca t 11:11ol)j,oct the riassificition of edit commit-leo of co nuIvcrsity unitive doinain. Nev: Longman:, Creen. Handbc domain. Netv David AlcKav, 1964. .T. ILIndbook or piot ttltiu'-, for the designii ih-tutt tshuryli, American Institutes for Research, 1970. Sequencing of Mstruction in relation to hierarchies ofcompe- tence. Pittsburgh, Americzin institutes for Researdi. 1312 p. gs, Leslie J., Peggie L. Campeau, Robert AI. Gagno, a ad Mark A. May. Instructional media : a procedure for the design of intrki-media instruction, a critical review of research, and suggestions for future research. Pittsburgh, American Institutes for Research, 1967. 176p. Bruner, Jerome S. Toward a theory of instruction. Cambridge, Mass., Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,1966.17tip. Burns, Richard W. Behavioral objectives: a selected biblicgraphy. Educational technology, V. 9, April 1969: 57-58. Objectives and classroom instniction. Educational technology, v. 7, September 15,1967 : 1-3. The theory of expressing objectives. Educational technology, v. 7, October 30,1967:1-3. Canfield, Albert A. A rationale for performance objectives. Audio- visual instruction v. 13, Fall 1968: 127-129. Cox, C. Benjamin. hehavmr as objective in education. Socialedu tion, v. 35, May 1971 : 435-449. Darling, D. W. Why a taxonomy of affective learning? Educational leadership v. 22, April 1965 473-475. DeCecco, J. 13. New instructional formats, the mediaand media research in a crisis age. Viewpoints,v. 46, September 1970: 165-181. Ebel, Robert L. Behavioral objectives: a close look. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 52, November 1970 : 171-173. Edlincr, Jack V. Educat ional objectives and educationalmedia. Review of educational research, v. 38, April 1968: 177-193. Eiss, Albert F. Performance objectives. NASSP bulletin,i -54, Janu- ary 1970: 51-57. Engman, B. D. Behavioral objectives: keto planning Science teacher v 35, October 1968: 86-87.

36 Filep, Robert T., and Wilber Schramm. A study of the impact of research on utilization of media for educational purposes. Final report : overview. El Segundo, California, Institute for Educational Development, 1970. 122 p. rEID 042 065]. Robert M. The conditions of learnino- New York, Hofl Rine- hart, and 'Winston, 1970. 407 p. Learning and individual differencesColuiiibiis. Ch Lrl cs E. Merrill, 1967. 265 p. Learning theory, educational media and individualized instruction. Washinpton, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papei.s for "To Improve Learning; a report to the President and the Co Tigress of the United States bv the Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 22 p. [ED639 752]. Media and the learning process. Paper presented to the First General Session, Department of Audio-visual Instruction Confer- en,e, Houston, Texas, 196S. 14 p. [ED 022 368]. c;alfo. Armand J. A studv of the elfects on pupil achievement of certain audio and visual presentation sequences. Final report. Wil- liamsbura-, College of William and Marv. p. [ED 029 505]. Harbeck. Mary B. Instructional objectives in the affective domain. Educational technology, v. 10, January 1970: 49=52. Harmon. Paul. A classification of performknce objective behaviors in job training programs. Educational technology, v. 9, January 1969 : 5-12. thirrison, A., ed. European research in audiovisual aids. London. National Committee for Audiovisual Aids on behalf of the Council of Europe. 1966. 2 vol. HflVerman, M. Behavioral objectives : bandwagon or breakthrough 9 Journal of teacher education, v. 19, Spring 1968: 91-94. Hilgard, Ernest R. The psychological heuristics of leiLrning. Washing- ton, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning; a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commission on In- structional Technology." 1970. 20 p. [ED 0:39 748]. Hitt, William I). Bringing management by objectives to schools. Bat- telle resvarch outlook, v. 2, no. 2, 1970 : 8-11. Hooper, Richard. A framework for studying histructional technology. Washington, Academy for Educational Developrnent, Inc. One of the support papers for 'To Tmprove Learning; a report to the Presi- dent and the Congi.ess of the United States by the Commission on Instructional Teclmology." 1970. 56 p. [ED 039 773]. Institute for Communication Reseni.ch, Stanford University. New teaching :lids for the American classroom. Washington, U.S. Gov't. Print. Off., 1962. 173 p. Jarolimek. .1. Taxonomy : guide to differentiated instruction. Social education, v. 26. December 1962 : 445 147. Kapfer, Miriam B. Behavioral objectives and the gifted. Educational technology, v. S, June 15, 1968 : 14-15. Behavioral objectives in curriculum development. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Educational Ty, lmology Publications, 1971. 400 *0. iaI)ter, Phjlip G. Bea -ioral objectiv the cognitive anda live domains. Educational tcclmology,v Jurit 15, 1968: 11-14. Kibler, Robert .T., Lari.yL. Barker, and Da\ idT. ATiles. Behavioral objectives and instruction.Bosto,,, Allyn and Bacon, Inc., 196 p. 1970. Krathwold, Dav id R. Stzttingobjectives :wpropriately forproo-ram, fol. curriculum, and forinstructional materials development. j-Jour- na 1 of teacher ethical ion, v. 16. Alai.ch 1965: 83-92. Lewy, Arich. The empirical validityof major properties ofa taxonomy of :iffectire eductitional objectives.Journal of experhiraital education. v. 36, Spring 1968: Lindvall. C. M.. eel. 1 >etiningeduccItional objectives. Pittsburgh,Uni- versity of Pittsburgh Press,1961. 83 p. Lumsdaine, A. A. Instructionalresearch : some aspects of itsstatus, defects, and needs. /n Reseal.chand development toward the impi.ovement of education, edited byII. J. Klausmeira nti G. T. 01-1-earn. Madison, Wisconsin,1)emb9 r Educational Research ices, 196S : 95-101, Serv- Mager, Robert F. Preparinginstructional objectives. Palo Alto,Cali- fornia. Fearon Publishers,1962. 60 p, Pmparing objectives forprogranim d insti uctioji.San F risco, Fearon Publishers,1962. 62 p Maguire, Thomas 0. Valuecomponents of teachers judgments ofedu- cational63-74. objectives. AVcommunicat ion review,v. 16, Spring- 1968 :

Media, research in tlu school.Clearing house. 055-956. v. 42, December 1967 : Meierhenry, Wesley C ed.T. eii ning theory and Vutili itio1 AV communication review, v. 9supp. 4. Washington, Department of Audiovisual Instruction,National Education Association,Sep- tember-October 1961. p. Montague, Earl J., and DavidP. Butts. Behavioral objectives.S ; teacher, v. 35, March 1968: 33-35. Moore, Maxine Ruth. Theperceptual-motor domain anda proposed taxonomy of perception. AVcommunication review 1970: 379-413. 18, Winter Motivating leaimer-centeredhistruction : applying contingencvman- agement techniques. Educationaltechnology, v. 11, April 1971 tire issue. : en- Norberg, Kenneth, ed. Percep6ontheory and AV education. AVcom- munication review,v. 10, supp. 4. WasMngton, Department ofAu- diovisual Instruction, NationalEducation Association, Septeniber- October 1962. 108p. Ojemann, R. H. Should educationalobjectives be stated in behavioral terms. Elementary school journal,v. 68, February 1968 ; 2.23-231. Popham, W. J., and E. L. Baker.Measuring teachers attitudesto- ward behavioral objectives.Journal of educational July 1967: 153-455. research, v. 60, Popham, W. J., Elliot W. Eisner,Howard J. Sullivan, and LouiseL. Tyler. Instructional objectives.AERA monograph serieson curriculum evaluation, 3. Chicago,Rand McNally and Co., 1969.142 p. 33 Salomon, G. and R. E. Snow, eds. Commentari, researcin instructional media : an examination of concept" schemes. View- points, v. 46, September 1970: entire issue. Slack, Charles W. The politics of educational objec tnes Educational technology, v. 7, July 30, 1967 : 1-6. Snow, R. E., and G. Salomon. Aptitudes and instructio ild media.AV communication review, v. 16, Winter 196S: 341457. Svobodny, Dolly D.. comp. Research and studies about theuse of tek vision and film in foreian language instruction: a bibliography with abstracts. New York, Mhoderli Foreign Language Association: ERIC Clearinghouse ou the Teaching of Foreign Languafres,igib. 37 [ED 026 936]. Television :Ind film in college English instruction: a bibliography of research and studies with abstracts. New York,Modern Language Association of America; ERIC Clearinghouse on the Teaching of English in Higher Education, 1969. 29p. [ED 033 674] . Travers, Robert M. IV., ed. Research and theory relatedto audiovismil Mformation transmission. Kalamazoo, Western Michigan Univer- sity l3ook Store, 1067. T7ow, Clark. Behavioral objectives in education. Educationaltechnol- ogy, v. 7, December 30, 1967 : 6-40. Webb, Jeanine Nelson. Taxonomy of cognitivebeha'iioa system for the analysis of intellectualprocesses. Journal of research and development, v. 4, Fall 1970 : 23-33. Wynne, Edward. School outputmeasures as tools for change. Educa- tion and urban society,v. 2, November 1969 : 3-21. Yeager, John L., and Robert Glaser. The LearningResearch and De- velopment Center at the ITniver:z.ity of Pittsburgh. PittsburghUni- versity, 1968. 33 p. rED 028 4931.

L. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS Alkin, Marvin C. Systems analysis problems andprospects. Planning and changina v. 1, JItly 1970: 83-89. Andrew, Gar;111., and Ronald E. Moir. Information-decisionsystems education. Ttasra, Illinois, F. E. Peacock Publishers,1970. 177 p. Applying systems engineering techniquesto education and training. TAlucational technology. v. 9, June 1969: entire issue. Banathy. Bela H. Instructiowt1 systems. Palo Alto,California. Fearon Publishers, 1968. 106 p. Banghart, Frank W. Educational systems analysis.New York, Macmil- lan Co., 1069. 330 p. Baynham, Dorothy. PPBS and several goodreasons it shouldn't scare you off. American school board journal, v. 15S, August 1970: 27-29. Beach, Kenneth M., fr., and Robert F. Mager.Developing vocational instruction. Palo Alto, California, Fearon Publishers,19V7. q3 Bullock N., et al. Theoretical model for universityplaiminp.. skies ouarterly, v. 22, March 1968: 124-141. Bushnell, David S. A suggested guide for developinga systems approach to curriculum development. Education,v 90, April-Way 1970 : 351-362. A systems approach to curriculumchange in secondary education. Educational technology,v. 10, May 1970 : An educational system for the 70's.Phi Delta Kappan,v. 51, December 1969 : 199-203. ES '70 : a systems approachto educational reform. Education, v. 91, September-October 070 : 61-1-. Journal of secondary education,v. 46, April 19n : 159-- 155. Carpenter, Margaret B. and Sue A.Haggart. Cost-effectiveness ysis for educational planning.Educational technology,v. 10, Octo- ber 1970 : 26-30. Carter, Launor F. The systems approachto education : mystique and reality. Educational technology,v.9, April 1969 : 22-31. Carter, Vernon. PPBS ina small high schoolit can be done. Journal of secondary education,v. 45, November 1970 : 313-319. Centner, S. 1., et al. Systems analysisand higher education plannMg. Toronto, Systems Reseamh Group, 1969.62 p. [ED (M5 205j. Chambers, George A. The concepts andproblems of planning-prooTam- ming-budgeting system. Jourmtlon State sc:lool systems, v. 1,t-Win- ter 1968 : 223-236. Cogswell, John F. Humanistic approachesto the design of schools. In issues inAmericaneducation, ecEted by Arthur M. Kroll. NewYork, Oxford Un ive rsity Press, 1970: 98-117. Cogswell, John F., and Donald G. Marsh.System design fora continuous progress school-computer simulation of autonomousscheduling pmcedures. Santa Monica, System PevelopmentCorp., 1966. 21p. [ED 010 564]. Cogs.sx. ell, John F., et a7. Analysis ofinstructional systems. Report of a project ; new solutions to implementing instructional media through analysis and simulation of school organization.Santa Monica, Sys- tem Development Corp., 1966. 276p. (Technical memorandum TM-1493/201/00). Cohn, Elchanan. Economic rationality insecondary schools. Planning and changing, v. 1, January1971 : 166-174. Crane, Peter, a-nd Clark C. Abt. A modelfor curriculum evaluation. Educational technology,v. 9, October 1969 : 17-25. Curtis, William H. Program budgeting designfor schools unveiled. with much work still togo. Nation's schools, v. 84, November 1969 : 40-43. Drost, Walter H. ES '70sthe educationalinnovation of the 1970's? School and society, v. 99, April 1971: 224-226. Dyer, J. S. The use of PPBS ina public system of higher education : is it cost-effective ? Santa Monica, Band Corp.,1969. 10 p. Bash, Maurice J. Is systems analysis forsnpervisors ? Educational leadership, v. 26, February 1969: 482+. Egbert, Robert L., an,: John F. Cogswell. System designfor a continuous progress school--Part I. Santa Monica, System Development Corp., 1964. 87 p. [ED 010 561]. System design for a continuous pi.ogress schoolPart II,sur- veillance and detection system Santa Monica, System Development Corp., 1964. 52 p. [ED 010 .,G2].

40 System design for a contiuous progress schoolPart III, the instructional niaterials center. Santa Monica, SystemDevelopment Corp., 1961. 23 p. [ED 010 563]. Ethenngton, aiul R. 'kronen. Systems it, Ld simulations: new technology goes to woik on decision-making. Collegeand university business, v. 46, March 1969 : 55-62. Exton, Elaine. USOE uses computer-based models to evaluateeduca- tion. Anwrican school board journal.V. 154. J anuary 1967 : 15+. Flanagan, John C. How instructional systems willmanage lealning. Natimi's schools v. 86. October 1970 : 65+. .no, Orlando F Planning programming budgeting systems: boon or lninePlii Delta KappLtn, v. 51, November 1969: 142-144. Gibson, Terry L. Instructional systems design through in-servieeedu- cation. Audiovisual instruction,v. 13. September 1968 : 710-714. Hapgart, S. A. Developing a program budgetMg systemas an aid in planning higher education. Santzi Monica, RandCorp., 1969. 13 p. 1969. 13 p. Hamblen, John W. Institutional research today, systems anal to- MOLT° w for institutions of higher education. AEDS journal, v. 3, March 1970 : 70-78. =formes, H. M. fmprovement in education: eiiteiia for ehonee. Educa- tional technology, v. 10, November 1970 : 46-50. numon. Pori Curriculum cost-eilectivenesse alu'ition Audiovisual Mstruction, v. 15, January 1970 : 24+ Hartley, Harry J. Educational planning-program :10--budge g; a systems approach. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1968. 290 p. imiLitions of systellis analysis. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 50 May 1 969 : 515-519. PPBS : economic strategy for urban education. Urban review, anultry 1969 27-30. Twelve hurdles to clear before yon take on systems analysis. American school board journal, v. 156, July 1968: 17-18. Hauer, Alfred, mid ID Philys Clark. POBAS ;a giant step toward educational accountability. NEDS monitor,v. 9, April 1971 : 12-14. Haugh, Bobbin R. A. study LO extend the development and testingof a systems model of the classroom. Final report. Rochester, Michigan State University, 1968. 70 p. [ED 033 4521 Hoye, Robert E. Application of the systems approach to the sel, on of relevant teaching method's and media. Education,v. 90, April- May 1970: 363-365. Johns, Roe L., and Edgar L. Morphet. The economies and 11:-ince of edueahon- a systems approach. Enroqwood Cliff's, New Jersey, Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1969. 580 p. Jones, David M. PPI3S--a tool for improving instruction. Edu - tiOnal leadership, v. 28. January 1971 : 405-109. Joyce, Bruce. The prineipal and his staff : the multiplesys ems approach to curriculum. National elementary principal,v. 48, Septem- ber 1968: 24-29. Judy, R. W. A research progress report on systems analysis for effi- cient resource allocation in higher education. Toronto, University 36 of Toronto, Institute -fur theQiiantttive Analysis of Social and Economic Policy, 1, O. 24 p. Koenie-, I I A systems model formanagement, plan lung and-resource ;dlocation in institutions of higbereducation. Journal. of engineering education, v. 59, _April I 969634 6 6. Koskev, B. Engene. Tt's abouttime we practice whatwe teach ! Au- diovisual instruction,v. 16, April 197148+. Lehmann, Henry. The systems approachto educati Audiovisual instruction, v. 13., February1968:144-148. Livingston, James A. Educationalgoals and program p1uniiiig budgetino. svstems (PPBS).Jommal of secondary education,v. 45, N ovember 1970: 305-312. Mannintr, William R. Costanalysis and curriculum decisions.Edi tional leadet.ship,v. 27, NoVember 1969: 179+, Meals_ Donald 1V. Ifenristicmodels for systenls planning.Phi Del t a 11)(iil v. 4S. January 1967: 199-202. Merrill, M. David. Componentsof a cybernet ic instructionalsystei Educational technology,v. 8, April 15, 1968: 5-10. Mitchell, Edward E. PPBS:panacei or pestilence? Systematicap- proaeh to the decisionproCeSs in edliCation. -VEDS monittn., February 1970: H v. Mitchell. .Tames. PPBSpanacei= or pestilence ? A series ofcom- ment... AEDS monitor.,v. 8, .ianuary 1970 : 6+. Murphy. Thonhis P. Theconvergei::.e of PPBS and educatimi. AEDS mon-uor, v. 8, March 1970:6 + No ihi ILi rold J. Educationneeds rational decisic-making. Teachw- College record.v. 72, December 1970: 187-200. Organization for EconomicCooperation and nRvelopment. ing, pi.ogramme analysis Budget- and cost-cifediveness ineducational planning. raris, TireOrganization, 1968.304p. Systems analysis foreducational planning. Paris, nization, 1969.219p. The Orga- PPBS and school management. NCSPSnews, September 1968: 6p. PPBS gobbledy(rookor panacea? In The shapeof education for 1971-72.1-01. VC, by theeditois Jf EducationU.S.A. Washington, tional Sc:lool PublicRelations Association,1971: 47-51. Perkins, J. A.. and DaleM. Scott. PPI3S;an interim report. AEDS utonitor, v. 3, September1970 : 4-6. Persselin, Leo E. Systemsimplications for secondaryeducation. Jour- nal of secondary education,v. 44, April 1969:159-466. Pfeiffer, John, New lookat education; systems analysis in our schools and colleges. New York.Odyssey Press, 1968.162p. Pihecki Francis J. Thesystems perspective and leadershipin the edu- oational organization.Journal of education, :38-49. v. 153, October 1970: Pinnell, Charles. Apelicationof scientific managementtechniques to college and university administration.AEDS journal, ber 1968 : 19-22. v. 2, Septem- Program budgeting: schools charta new course. Nation's schools, 62, November 1968: 51-59. v. 7

RappapotDonald, New apprea cltes in public education. Journalof aceountancy, v. 126, July 1958: 31-42. Research Corporation of the Association of SchoolBusiness Officials. Report of the Iii st iion ii confei.ence on PPBES in education. Clinq go, The Corpol'ation, 1969. 90p. and appendices. lob. i:j0111 GVI'ftlel J PPBS: plaiming for schools of the future. Bat- telle. researeh olitlook, v. 2,no. 2, 1970 : 22-26. Scott. Dale 11 flow PPBS is being used in California.School management, 15. February 1971 12-17. Silvern, T.,eonard C. cybernetic system model for occupational educatien. Educational technology,v. S. .1a nn:try 30. 1968 : 3-9. Systems analysis and synthesis, quantitatively to crea e an instructional system. Los Angeles, ')pliedEducation and Training Con- sultants. 0969]. 131 p. "Systems approach"--what is it ? Edit( ationaltechnolocry, V. 8, August 30, 106S: 5-6. Spiegehmtn. Robert G. A benefit/cost modelto evaluate educational programs. Join-nal of socM-cconomic planning sciences,v. 1. 1968 : 44$-460. Springey, C. H. The 'systen apr10 tel1 S atur0 review, v. 50, Jaminry 14. 1967 : 56-58. State-Local Finances Project,Jeorg( Washington University r-lan- ning for educatimuil development ina planning, pro{franinnng, budgeting system. Washington, National Education 1,-dociation, 1968. 46 p. System analysis, program development, and cost-effectivenessmodel- ing of Indian education for the Bureau of Indian Affairs.Volume III Manning and cost-effectiveness modelingfor BI A schools. Cambridge. I.BT Associates, Inc., 1969. 227p. [ED 032 9921 Systems analysis and public education: a symposium. Journal of secondary education, v. 42, October 1967: 243-266. Systems approach spreads from industiy to public schools; specialre- port. Nation's schools, v. 80. October 1967 : 57 +. Tanner, C. Kenneth. Techniques and application of educationalsys- tep's analysis. Audiovisual instruction. v. 14, March 1969: 89-90. Tannian, Francis, (old Jon Macroon. Systems analysis for urban school decision making. Educationa71 technology,v. 10, October 1970 : 31- 33. C;vil, Service Commission. Application of the systems approach to training: a case study. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.,1969. Van Dusseldorp, Ralph A. The systems approach. NEA journal,v. 56, February 1967 : 24-26. W1l:3u, Carl E. Program budgeting: an easy guide with the confusion removed. American school board journal, v. 156, May 1969:16-19. Wohlferd, Gerald H. Cost analysis in education. Educational forum, v. 34. March 1970 : 339-345. Woodhall, Maureen. Cost-benefit analysis in educational planning. Paris, UNESCO, 1970. 49 p. ooton, Leland M. The systems approach to educationas viewed from the classroom. Ed'Ic ition, v. 91, February -March 1971: 215-219. 43 M. ACCOUNTABILITY, PERFoRMANCECONTRACTING, AND EDUCATION VOUCHERS arket economy" for the schools.Business week, no. 2162, Febru- ary 6, 1971 : 76+. Abt, Clark C. Reforming urbaneducation With cost-eirectiveness analysis. Educational technology,Y. 10, September 1970 : 36-38. Accountability in education. Educationaltechnology, V. 11, 1:11111ary 1971 ; entire issue. Accountability in elementary andsecondary education. COMpaCt, October 1970 : 19-23. V. 4, Accountability '70. Compact,v. 4, October 1970 : 2+. Annotated bibliTiraphy011 accountability. Andiovistud instruction, v. 16,May 1971:93 161. Areen, Judith. EduciitionVOUC hers. Har ard civil rightscivil liber- ties law t.eview, v. 6, May 1971:466-501, Vsbell, Bernard. Schools hireont the job of te:Achinr. Think, September-October 1970: 54). Banneker at bay. NeWsweok,M:_trch 15, 1971 : Bondi xsen, Marian F. Performance contra6Mg:a road to accountability ? Washington, NationalCommittee for Supp(n.t. of thePublic Schools, 1971. 7 p. Berson, Minnie Perrin. A littlebit about EVA. Childhood v. 47, January 1971: 227-231. educalion, -- Texarkana and Gary : a tale of two performancecontracts. Childhood education,V. 47, Mai.ch 1971 : 339+. Bliaermani Robert, and John Oliver.Children's 1,31401 businessmen s booty ? American teacher,v. 55, Jannary 1971 : 20-21. Blaschke, Charles, PeterBrigo.s, and Reed Martin. Theperformance contractturnkey approachto urbanschool system reform. Educa- tional technology, v. 10, September1970 : 45-48. Boardmen can't thMk ofone good thing to say about voucherplans. American school board journal,v. 18, October 1970: 33-37. Bmtten, Dale, Caroline Gillin,and Robert E. Roush. Performance contracting : how it works inTexarkana. Schoolmanagement, v. 14. August 1970 : 8-10. Briner, Conrad. Admthistratorsand accountability. Theoryinto practice, v. 8, October 1969: 203-206. Brozen, Yale, and Roman L.Weil. The vouchersystem. Insertion by Hon. James F Ickley (N.Y.) inthe Congressional Record,v. 117, May 6,1971 : S6355-59. (Dailyedition). Om, Ray A., and Gerald C.Hayward. Edwation by chit; an examination of voucher proposals.Education and urban society, ruary 1970 : 179-191. v. 2, Feb- Cass, James. Accountable to whom? for what ? Saturdayreview, V. 54, March 20, 1971: 41. Profit and loss in education.Saturday review,v. 53, August 15, 1970 : 39-40. Center for the Study of PublicPolicy. Education vouchers;a report on financing elementary education bygrants to parents, Cambridge, Mass., The Center, December197'0. 348 p. Financing education bygrants to parents; preliminaryreport. Cambridge, Mass., The Center,Mareh-1970. 219 p. 44 39

Coleman, James S. Towardopen schools. Public interest, no all 1967: 20-27. 'Contracting' ftices big tectIii The shape of education for19 vol. 13, by the, editors of EducationU.S.1. Washington, Nat onal Scliool Public Relations Association,I Ii: 17-22. Coon., John E. Recreating the family's.ol, ilk education. Inequality in education, nos. 3 and 4: a-5. Coyne, John R. Slates and hampsters. Nationai iw 23, ?IaiIi 03, 971 : 309-311. Cray, Douglas W. What's happeningin tool mam lit, v. 15, May 1971 : 22=25. Cunningham. Luvern L. Ciii accountabilityproblems. Theory into pracrice. V. S. October 1970: 285-292. The cu,iomeis pass the testor else. Businessuk no. 2140, Septe- ber 12,1970 : 42 +. rland, D. 1) rh profession's queFt for responsibilityand-0 ability. Phi Delta Kappan.v. 52, September 1970 : 4141. Education Turnkey Systems. Performancecontracting in educati-_ ("ham paign. Illinois, Research Press, 1970.122 p. Educational vouchers. Teachers Collegemcor(j, v.72. February 1971 : 327-104. Ehrle, Raymond National priorities andper fornnce contract ng. Educational technology, v. 10, July 1970: 27-28. Elam, Stanley, Theage of ac,ountal)ility dawns in Texarkana. Phi Delta Kappan, V. 51, June 1970: 509-514. English, Fenwick, and James Zahaiis Ai e accountability and govern- ance compatible ? Phi Delta Nappan, V_ 52 F Lu.ii1971 : Erickson,)onald A. Public funds for private schools?Saturday - view, v. 5September 21, 1968 : 66+. Fantim, Ma io. Options for students,1 avents. and teachers : public schools of choice. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 52, May 1971 : 541-543. Federal experiments in education. Nonprofitreport, v. 3, NOVember 1970 : 13-18. Fox, Edward J., and William B. Levenson. Indefense of the "har nful monopoly." Phi Delta Kappan,v. 51, November 1969 : 131-1 Free enterprise for schools. Time, August 24, 1970: 58-59. Freeman, Roger A. Alath and aftermath in the public schools: theconcept of accountali.itv in education. Insertion by Hon. John M. Ash- brook (Ohio) in tilt Congressional Record,v. 116, 1 )ecember 8, 1970 : E10129-32. (Daily cJition). Gehret, Kenneth G. Education vouchers: bright hopeor empty promise ? Christian science monitor, June 4, 1971. Gillis, James C., Performance contracting for public schools. Edu- cat ional technology, v. 9, May 1969 : 17-20. ErvM L., and Eleanor Roberts. Accountability for student learning. Junior college journal, v. 41. March 1971: 27-30. Hempel, Marvin W. Accountability and technology: a change of emphasis for business education. Audiovisual instruction,v. 16, May 1971 : 32+. Fryer, Anna L. From gold stars to green stamps. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, May 1971 : 4+. Janssen, Peter A. Education vonchers. American educationv. 6 De- cember 1970 : 9-11. 05-86 1-71-- 4 45 40

Jencks". Christopher._ Education_ vouchersc_ givinga rents i pay for. schooling. New t.epublic, v. 103, July 4. 1. : 10-2]. i 'ing parents money for schooling:eclueat vouch.s. Phi Delta ha ppa II, v. 52, September 1070: ,19-54. Ts thtpublic school obsolete? Piil,1i nit erest, no. 2. Winter 1900:18-27. Private schools for black children. No\ York timesmagazine. November 3.196s: 30+. Joydan. Bennett. Educational account Aility: a crucial question. Jun- ior (o11e,7e journal,y. -f I., March 1971:23-41. Judgement day i LI the schools :trial hy accountLJility_ kLI14I 1(tI11 .Leacher, v. 55 November 1970 : entire issue. Kornegay, William. Theopen market.: a new mod& for on r scho I- ? Phi Delta Kappan, v. 49, June MS: 583-580. Kruger, IV. Stanley. Accountabilityand the educationalprogram atiditor. Planning and chairing,y. 1, October 1970 : 110-114. La None. George, R. Political questions inthe next decade .of urban -ThleatiolL Teachers Colleev recorl,v. O. March 1068: 517-528. e majority favors teacher accountability. Nation's schools,v. 86 ?-vcember 1970 : 33. Le_ssiier, Leon M., cd. A symposittrilon accountability. Journal of secondary education, v. 4. December 1970: entire issue. ,..",ccomAtability in nultlic education. Today's education,v. 59, May ifyro: 52-53. ., _ -- EVOVV kid a,iniuiaccountabillty in education. New York, Shnon and Schuster, 1970. 231p. Focus on the learner: ceittral concern of accountability n education. Autliovisual instruction,v. 15, June-July 1970: 42 14. Lessinger, Leon M., am! Dwiglit H. Allen.Performance proposals for educational funding:a new approach to Federal resource allocation. Phi Delta Kaman,v. 51, November 1969 : 136-137. Lev, Henry M. The failure of the public schoolsand the free market rernedy._urban review,V. 2, June 1968 : 32-37. z_... Why ghetto schools fail. Saturday reviev- 53, March 21 19Tj : 68 -H. Lieberman, Myron, ed. Eight articleson accountability. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 52, December 1970: 193+. Lopez, Felix M. Accothttability in education. PhiDelta Kappan, v. December 1970: 231-235. Mecklenburger, James A. Ten half-truths about performancecontr ing in education. Educational technology,v. 11, May 1971 : 6. Mecklenburger, James A., and John A. Wilson. Theperformance contracts in Grand Rapids. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 52, June 1971 ! 590- 594. ff,.rris, John E. Accountability: watchword for the 70's. Clearing house, v. 45, February 1971, 323428. Morton, John. Parents would buy schooling witha voucherPresident considers pl:cri for competing schools; UnitedStates pays for a study. Insertion by Hon. William A. Steiger (Wisconsin)in the Con- gressional Record, v. 116. February 5, 1970: E724-25. (Daily edition). _rs, Sumer, For all our children-"the right to read." Looking ahead v. 18, June 1970: 1-4. 41 New directions for education ? perforrnance contracting; the voucher systems. Compact, v. 5, February 1971 : entire issue. Nottingham, Marvin A.. and Louis D. Zeyen. Commitment to account- abilitya case study, Journal of secondliry education, v. 46, January 1971 : 3-S. 0E0 launches its voucher experiment. Nation's schools, v. 87, Alarch 1971 : 30-31. 0E0 selects performance contractors in ediu cat iona I experiment. In- sert ion by Hohl. (,c)rgo Murphy in the ConoTessional ord. v. 116..fulv 15, 1970 : Mailv edition). Outlook for teacher incentives. Nat ion s schools, V. 86, November 1970 : 51 +. Performance contracting. Nation's schools, V. 86, October 1970 : 85-88. Performance contracting as a catalyst for reform. Educational technology, v. 9, August 1969 : 5-9. Perfornuince contr:icting : why the Gary school board bought it. And how. American school board journal. v. 158, Janrairv 1971 : 19-21. Reactions to vouchershostility. scepticism. Nation's schools, v. 87. January 1071 : 89. Reynolds. Jerry D. Performance c ontracti -dapted. Ectucati dig-4, v. 36, April 1971 : -7. .TetTrv. Performance coiiti acting : some questions and swel.s. American education. \ M _ay 1971 : Schwartz. Ronald. Ac omit ibil itvspecial editoria.eport. Nation's s.-tiooi3. V. 85, June 1970 : woort reviow, Hie art of performa S. Nation ti schools. v. 87, May 1971 : 33-34. Performance contracting; industry's r, idion. Nation's schools. v. 86. September 1970 : 53-55. Performance contracts catch on ; USOE and 0E0 fundmore than 30 new projects. Nation's 6thools, v. 86, kugust 1970: 31-33. Sigel, Efram, and Myra Sobel. A ccountability and the controversial role of the performance :.ont .ictors. White Plains, New York, Knowledge Industry Publications. Inc., 1971. 137-1)- Sizer, Theodore R. The case for a free inarket. Saturday review, v. 5`.-, January 11, 1969 : 34+. Sizer, Theodore, and Philip Whitten. A proposal for apoor children's bill of rights. Psychology today, v. 2, August 1968 59-63. Southwick. Thomas C. Education assessment: resultsa step toward accountability. Science, v. 169, July 24, 1970 : 358-369. Stake, Robert E. Testing hazards in performance contracting. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 52, June 1971 : 583-589. tar, Jack. "We'll educate your kidsor your money back." Look, v. 35, June 15, 1971 : 56 +. Stenner, Jack, and Michael H. Kean. Four approaches to education performance contracting. Educational leadership,v. 28, Apr:: 1971 : 721-725. Stocker, Joseph, and Donald F. Wilson. Accountability and the classroom teacher. Today's education, v. 60, March 1971 : 41-56. Texarkana : the second year around. Nation's schooio. V. S, March 1971 : 32+. Tyler, Ralph W. Testing for accountability. Nation's schoolv. 86, December 1970 : 37-30.

4 42

Voege, G. H. Accoui1nbilty andperformance contracting:implications for the supportivestaff. Audiovisual instruction, 1971 : 16=18. v. 16. May Vouchen : reformor catastrophe ? shape of education for 1971 72, vol. 13, by the editorsof Edueauon U.S.A.Washington, Nt, tional School Public RelationsAssociation, 1971: 56-59. Webb, Harold V. Performancecontracting: is it thenew tool for the new boardmanship? American schoolboard journal, ber 1970 : 28+. v. 158, Novem- Where private firill rurls public school. U Sin ws and world report, Octi. mr 12, 1970: 41, Wiles, .1 Ai Whitney. The hidden (...ost of performan.cecontractiEg. Educational leadership,v. 28, Febrmuy 1971 : 533-535. Will induAry runour ghetto schools? Nation's schools, nary 1970 : 88+. v. 85fan- illingham. Ed. Educationreport/OE0 goes ahead withvoucher plans despite opposition fromteacher groups. Nationaljournal, v. 3, May 1, 1971: 939-946. Education report/performanccontractincr in sch-oltests Administration's 'accountability' idea. Nationaljournal,v. 2, Oc- tober 24. 1970 : 2324-2332. II. USES OF SPECIFIC MEDIA

A. AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, AND INSTRUCTIO A new A-V technology for wide-angled learnIng. American Echool and university, v. 39, April 1967 : 23+. Allen. William IT., comp. Improving instruction through andio-visiml media ; techniques in teaching science mathematics, and modern foreign languages. Los Angeles, California State Depilrtment of Education, 19C1. 77 p. [ED 025 951]. Allender. Jerome S. The importance of l'ecorded conununication. communication review, v. 15, Winter 196r: 412-422. Allison, ALary L., comp. New educational materials, pre-kindergluten through grade welve. New York, Citation Press, 1967. [ET) ll9 An evaluation of three instructional media as supplements to a graduate course in education statistics. Buffalo, State University of New York, Instructional Communir/tion Center. 1968. 20 p. [ED 0'27 7321. Xssoeiation for Supervision and Curricuhim Development. Selecting now aids to teaching. Washington, The Association, 1971. 21 p. Audio cassette tape recorders. Educational products report, v. :3 supp., February 1970 : 1-32. Audio-tutorial pinctices in California communitv colleges. Prelimi- nary report. Pleasant Hill, Diablo Valley College. 1970. 86 p. [ED 042 452]. Audiovisual happenings across the country. American school and university, v. 40, April 1968 : 34+. Audiovisual 1;)struction annual report ; what's new, what's different, what's done. :sTation's schools. v. 84, October 1969 : 80 -1-. Audiovisual mr,i.ket place 1971. New York, R. R. Bowker Co., 1971. 231 v. Banister. Richard. Case studies in multi-media instruction. Los An- geles, California University. ERIC Clearinghouse for Junior Col- lege Information, Topical paper 13, 1970. 61 p. [ED 014 098]. Comparison of two history instruction methods; radio broadcasting and visual aids versus individualized instruction with audiovisual aids. Final report. Gilman Hot Springs, Mount San Jacinto College, 1969. 16 p. [ED 032 783]. Beattie, Thomas, und Paul Frick. The telephone, method of teaching. Deliver, Colorado State Department of Education, 1963. 23 p. [ED 036 357]. Belforte, John. E:ploring ways to integrate audiovisual media with elementary school instructional practices. Daly City, California, Jeffeison Elementary School District, 1966. 68 p. [ED 015 669]. Berman, Arthur I. Seminar/autolecture. Today's education, December 1968 33-36. (43) 44 Bog slavsk7, George W. Study of characteristics contributingto the effectiveness of visual demonstrations.Troy, New York, Rensselaer Polytechnic Inst., 1967. 28p. [ED 010 045]. Bretz, Rudy, Thu/ G. F. McVey.AV equipment--beyond basics. A nontechnieal, nonmathematicalapproach to AV planning. Educa- tional/instructional broadcasting,v. 3, September 1970 : 17+. Brown, james V., Richard B.Lewis, and Fred T. Harcleroad.AV instructionmedia itnd methods. New York,AleGraw-Hill Book Co., 1969, 621p. C arpenter, C. R. The quality ofinstructional materials. Finalreport. University Park, PeimsylvaniaState University, Dept, of Psy- ehology, 1969. 41p. [ED 035 093 j. Carpenter, CI. R., awl Ruth J.Carpenter. Abstracts of seminar discussions on quality factors ininstructional materials. University Park, Pennsylvania State University,Dept, of Psychology, 1968. 179 p. l_ED 037 009]. emuth, James W. Advantagesand disadvantaoes ofa State-wide system for purchasing audiovisual equipmelt.Educational re- sourev3 and techniques, V. 10, September 1970: 12-13. Cassettes. Audiovisual instrucCon, v. 15, September 1970 : entire issue. Chapimm, Alberta. Individualdifferences met through audiovisual mat( rials. Journal of business -dueation.v. 66.1 )ecember i 970 : 117 119. Clarke Michael J., et al. Art-by-telephone:design and evaluation. Las 'Vegas, Clark County SchoolDistiiet, 1970..31r. [ED 01-1- 2221. Cohen, Arthur M. Multi-media instructionalprograms. Washington, American Association of JuniorColleg, 1969. 4p. [ED 027 8851. Coopen, Helen. Aids to teaching andlearning. Long Island Ci Per- gamon Press, 19(30. 230 p. [ED 041 453]. Gros, Louis. Correspondence tuitionin France and the development of permanent education.Strasbourg, France, Council ofEurope, Council for Cultural Cooperation,_1968. 97 p. [ED 038 597]. Dale, Edgar. A naiovisual methodsin teachin; New York, Holt, b trt and Winston, 1965. 534p. Deighton, Lee C. Instruments ofinstruction the book plus thenew media. Washington, _A cademyfor Edteational Development,Inc. One of the supportpapers for "To Improve LearniiTa report to the President and the Congressof the United States by the Com- mission on Instructional Technology."1970, 9 p. [ED 039 770]. Directory of audio cassetterecorders. Media, and methods,v. 7, Octo ber 1970: 51-52. Dorsett, Lloyd G. Audio-visualteaching machines. Norman, DOI.sett Educational Systerns, The.; New York,Appleton-Century-Cron, 1970. 136 p. [ED 037 092]. Edwards, Ronald R., et al,. Pilotstudy to explore theuse of11 auto- visual tutorial laboratory in thesecretarial skin, areaas a means of updating and improvingcurriculum offerings tit the community college level in Michigan. LansingCommunity College, Department of Accounting and Office Program,1968.35 p: [ED 027 387]. Eggers, :Edwin H. Uses and abusesof audio-visual aids in reading. Pap,Er presented at the Conferenceof the international Reading Association, Anaheim, 1970.7 p. [ED 045 301]. 45 Erickson, Canton W. IL FundiunentaL of tooching with a diovisual technologNLv York, Macmillan C.,1965. 38f p. Everly, Jack C. Instructional systems for extramural courses. Paper presented at the Adult Education Research Conference, Miimea- polls, 1970. 11 p. [ED 036 '754]. Faris, Gene, a-nd John Moklstad. Imtwoving the learning environment; a -study on the local preparation of audiovisual materials. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1963. 148 p. Fenner, Peter,(1-,i al Ted F. Andrews. Audio-tutorialiristruction :a strategy for teaching introductory _college geology. Washingto American Geological Instiute, 1970. 30 p. [ED 039 U41. Filipovic, Rudolf. Active methods and modern aids in the teaching of foreign languages. Conclusions and recommendations of the 10th C011006S of the Fed,.- 'ation International Des Profe.3-:---iC7irS de Lan- crues Vivantes. Zagreb, Yugoslavia, 771w Federation, 1908.14 p. [ED 033 630]. Final report on two inter-instructional programs utilizing amplified to-Hphone comnmnication. Columbia, Stephens Collwe, 1966. 26 p. [ED 012 621]. Finn, J. D., and Royd Weintraub. An anal.%is of audiovisual ma- hines for individual program presentation. Research mernoranduin number two. LosAeles,iw University of Southern California, School of Education,S'-chool of Medicine. 1967. 56p. [ED 029 486] . D., D. G. Perrin, ilvd L. Campion. :',.ltudies in the growthof instructional (t t lI11Ol0\ t Lltdi it1 II instruniontati6.i for instruction in the public schoo'ls, 1980-1960. A basis for take-oti. Occasional paper no. 6. Washington. National EducationAssociation. 1962. 85 p. tad,,Allan. :-ilpectrum1-1,,f electronic teachiig aids in oduc: tion thnetions.facilities, budgets. Stanford University, School Planning Laboratory and New York Educational Facilities Labs., Inc., 1965. 30 p. [ED 014 8671 Four A-V wonde-i.s boards wiii buy in the s \nt Aiiii D dii chool board journal. v. 158, November 1970: Fusaio, Ramon M.. odd Jan B. Fusaro. Edueational media; portable eari.el kit permits students to bn inp. their elassroOMS home. Colle,(_re _and university business, v. 50, February 1971 : 76. Gibson. Dan M. New A-V technology meets program needs. Arm- _school md univelity, v. 40 M tidi 196S : 43-45. Gulbe; t Ile t 13.1:3se of paperbacks mid visual aids in teachMg con posit. -.. to collec_T freshmen. Final -report. Livgston, Ala., Livirw- ston University:-1969. 23 p. [ED 035 633]. Gilkey, R. Cassettes: their promise and temporary limitations. Edu- cational product report, v. 3, February 1970 : Glazer, Clyde. Teadiing walls: a new way to paekagc AV. School management, v. 12, November 1968: 4648. Godfivy, Eleanor P. The state of nndiovisual technology : 1961-1966. Monograph no. 3. Washington, Department of Audiovisual Instruc- tion, National Education Association, 1967. 217 p. Golden, Ruth In,d Helen A. Martel lock. Teaching st:Andard English to milinn primary children. Final report. Detroit Public Schools, 1967. 31:: p. [ED 020 155j. 1 Gradtutte iiistrutioiiin te1,17!ohone. I tomer, N.Y.Supplemental _Au- cation Center, 1968. 10p. [i47,1) 032 767]. Hartz, Frt:-deric R., andHerman Elstein. _Mediasupport system for the secondary school.journal Of secondary education, m-Iry 1970 : 31-19. v. 45, Jo:u- ITinovns, Conwell, andReuben R. Rusch. Developmentand evaluation of auto-instructionalprogyams in arithmetic for educable mentally handicapped. Final report. [ED 014 100j. Albany Public Sc]mols, 1967.165 p. ILigins J. J. Towird mediacompetence : experiment inmulti-media education. Media and methods,v. (3, April 1970 :.71+. Ili_oldights of schools -usingeducational media. Washhigton,Nfttional Fducation _ASSOCiation,Depzirtment of A.udiovisual p. Instruction. IED 020 661]. 1.1-opea Thomas W. _Market review: nontheatrical flint and audio- yusual-1967. Audiovisualinstruction,v. 14, 'VT,-h. 1969 : 74+. How one schoolsystem uses -media. Specialsecti, struction, V. 14. May1969: 17+. _,-1_11(l1OVIS11 al in- row schoolsIlse new k.q...linolopT for instruction. 80. October 1067: 68-73. Nation's saools,v. Row ten top A-V-proctrams compare. Nation's schools, 1968: 7-1-78. V. 82. October Husband, D. D., am' S. N.Postlethwait. Theconcept of andio-tutorio teachiwr. Lafayette,Purdue University.Depart-moo of Biological Scieiwes,1_969. 44pI El) 034 430_], Innovative practices iaNew 7=ngland schools.NOV England Assess- ment Project, MO. 64p. I E I) 044 331]. Instructiomil materialsselect i011 : an informationservice of the EPIE institute. NASSPbulletin, v. 55, February1971 : 99401. Instructionalresource in the Oassroom. NEA October 1967: 75-77. i.esearch bulletin, Jahlonsky, Adelaide.Media for teochinp- IRCD bulletin, Afro-American studies. v. 6, numbers 1 and 2. liewYork,_ Columbia Uni- versity; ERIC Clearhtghouseon the Urban Disadvantaged, 23 p. FED 042 856]. 1070. Jansen, Walter, avdKarel Simons. Audiovisualaids and languapv teachinrr. AlituV(...jrp,Audio-visual 'TechnicalCentre, Public Utility Establame4,1967. 207 p. [ED 024 2881. JollYI Joan, alv Ch;Wes F.Madden. Amplified telephoneas a teaching medium. L.olurnbia,Stephens College, 1165 Kemp, jerrold E. Plannin

52 47 Knowlton, James..A. conceptual scheme for the audiovisual deld. Bulletin of the School of Education,1110h-ilia University, v. 40, no. 3,1964. 44 p. Lawson, Billy R. Motivatine., AVitli multi-imageat the U.S. Military Academy : ale medium for the70's-and its public 1Aatio11s side hen fits. _Audiovisua 1in st ruction, V. 1 6, May 1971: T}4-50. Laver, Harold A. Ethnic studies zuldiovisual media : a L:it ng and discussion. An occasionalpaper. Stanford, ERIC ClouriwYhou:=0 Iona' TVIedia and Technology,1969. 11 p. Philip. New teaching devi(...escome manv fhapes mid Na:ion's schools, v. 82, July 1968 62+. Responder units tell the teacher riplitaway how she's doilift. Nationl, schools, 80, Decem her 1967: 60+. Lewis, W. C. Buyingan audio casFette recorder: things to koein mind. Educational productreport, v. 3, February 1970: 8-13. LinkerJeerv Mac. Designing instructionalVisuals ; theory, composition, implementation. Austin,Temts University, Instructional Media Center. 1068. 46 I). {ED 042 :351]. AI. L., et al. -Multimedia approachto psychomotor skill learning: deutal assistant education.Etlucational technology,v. 11. March 1971 : Magisos, Joel H., and StanfordSleeth.. Effects of cooperativeover- head projection =stet. development.An experiment in use ofsum- mer workshop to stimulate development anduse of visual aids hy vocational agriculture teadiers.Pullman, AVashington State Univer- sity, i)66 55 p. [ED 010 662]. Markesjo, Gunntin Educ:_itionalelecti,onit's: a presNit_ation of rhe PE group and its work._ Stockholm, Sdiool ofEducation, Institute of Educational Psychology, 1968. 23p. [ED 022 385]. Markesjo, _Gunnar, and Petrx_Graham. An experimentin teaching electronics with thtegratedfeedback system. Stockholm,Royal In- stitute of Technology, 1970.63 p. [ED 046 221]. Carson. ESL for thenon-academic adult. Paper given fourth annual TESOL Convention, at the 038 636]. San Francisco. 1970. 8p. [ED McDaniel, R. D. Audiovisualreviews; the state of theart. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, December 1970: 63-65. McHenry, Dale E., et al. Qualitativeeffects of increasing subjectmat- ter content and mediating certainlecture portions ofan honors course in college physics. Paper presented atannual meeting of the Department of AudiovisualInstruction, National Education Asso- ciation, Detroit, 1970. 17p. [ED 042 332]. McVey, G. Equippinga multimedia lab for action. American school and university, v. 41, November 1968: 38-40. Intermediatomorrow's AV expecienee today.Educational instructional .bro9,dcasting,v. 3, October 1970: 11-14. McVey, Gary C. An experimentalevaluation of the effectiveness of audio-tutorial method in teachingVocational agriculture. 1970. 120 p. rED 042 9231. (Ann Arbor, Tiniversity Microfilms,Inc.). .:_enne, John W., et al. Use of _taped lectures to renlaceclass attend- ance. AV communication review, v. 17, Spring 1969:42-16. 53 4S

Meyen, Edwa 1. The use of overhead projectionin classrooms for the mentally retarCd. Iowa City, Iowa University, rED 029 423]. 1969. 84 p. Mialaret, G. The psychologyof the use of audi-visual aids inprimal-, edue,tion. Monographson education. N-ew York, UNESCO, rED 017 202]. 19t, Domtld M., et al. Multimedia instructionalprograms in mathe- maticsd. ,nonstrationand experimental. The assimilationof new media in the in grudionalprogram of a rural school. Finalre- port. Wisconsin Heights .74choo1 District, 028 637]. et a7., 1966. 387 p. [ED A/linear, Leon P. Project Springboard: how to develop effective A-AT saturation programs. Nation's schools,v. 82, uly 1968 : Minor, FA. Simplified techniquesfor preparing visual instructional tori New York, McOraw-Hill Book Co., 1962.123 p. Mork..John E. Preparation of inexpensiveteaching, materials. San no 1,;00. Chandler Publishing Co., 1963. 103p. Mueller, Theodore. Thc languageinstructor and teaching machines. 1966. 9 p. FED 012 1521. Mueller, Theodore, arid RobertHarris. First year college Frfnch through an audio-linpualprogram. 1966. 23 p. FED 011 7371. Noel, Francis W.. et al. States audiovisualeducation study, a summary report. California, Sacramento State Colle, 1966. 145 p. 1PD 010 1171. Donfild C.. 0.11,1, Charles D. Hilen.Telecommunications for nino EVeiptt. General Telephone Co of the Northwest! WaQhimrton State TTniversity, 1969. 59p. [ED 031 9631. Parker. Earl R. Toward educationalimprovement : eimineering 45. Final report. Los Anaeles, CaliforniaUniversity Center for the Study of Evaluation, 1970.111D. [ED 045 059]. Peterson, Bernadine H. Adult education bymeans of telephone. Paper presented at the Adult Education Research Conference,Minne- apolis, 1970. 7 n. [ED 036 758] Pitkin, R. B. Will the tape recorder revolutionize theschools ? Ameri- can Legion magazine, v. 85, August 1968 : 8+. Poorman, Lawrence Eugene. A comparative study of theeffectiveness of a multi-media systems approachto Harvard project physics with traditional approachi,s to Harvard Project Physics.Bloomington, fildifIlla University, 1967. 194p. rED 026 258]. Postlethwait, S. N. et O. The audio-tutorial approachto learning independent study and integratedexperiences. Minneapolis, Burgess Publishing Co., 1969. 149p. [ED 033 857]. Project D:scovery: no mi:.acles but improved performance. Nation's schools. v. 80, Auusto- 1967 :44745. Pula, Fred John iCpplication and operation of audiovisualequipment in education. New York, John Wiley andSons, 1968. 360 p. Quhtly, William J. Indexes to mediaresources. Audiovisual instruction. v. 15, September 1970: 4849. Schuller, Charles, et 01. Survey of audio-visuallucation ir it t. status and needs. 1960. 101p. [ED 017 184].

4 49 iene education inforinbt:on report, bibliography 1,instructional procedures. General bibliography series. Columbus, ERICInfor- mation Ailalysis Center for Science Education. 1967. 64 ,[ED 015 8771. Science education information report. bibliography 3, equipmentand materials. General biblioeTaphy series. Columbus. ERIC Informa- tion Analysis Center for Science Education, 1967. 61 p. [ED 015 SR01. Smith, M. Daniel., Morton Sclutp-rin. (,.',7r7 L. Eugene Poornum. Multi- media sysi ems :fl review and report of ft P11Ot project.AAr communication review, v. 15, Winter 1967 : 345=369. Soverly. Ronald A. An audiovisual mrriculum -a motivating force. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, April 1971 : 53. Teaching by telephone. Audiovisual instruction, v. 12. September 1967 : 683-687. Technology and self-inshmction. Audiovisual instruction. v. 15, Feb- ruary 1970: entire issue. Tharp, Robert N. Development of audio-visual techniques used at the Institute of Far Eastern Languages, Yale University. New Haven, Yale Uniym'sity, 1960. 11 p. [ET) 043 2461 Thomas, Murray_ awl Sherwin G. Swartout. Integrated tenehing materials. Revised edition. New York, David McKay co.. 1963. 555 D. Thompson, James J. Instructional communicatior. New York, Ameri- ca,' Book Co., 1969, 234 1). rED 0:u 9401. Vannan. Donald A. Educational media in the ITnited States. Part if von had the moneywhat would you buy? Educational media, v. 1, March 1970 : 11 15. Educational media in the TTnited States. Part 3 : selected statistics. Educational .nedia, v. 2, April 1970 : 18--19. Vasil, Thomas, comp. A project for the improvement of music education at elementary, junior high, senior high, and college levels through the use of non-book instxuctional media. Filial report. Lex- ington Public Schools., Mass., 196E. 145 p. [ED 029 500] Williams, Catherine M. Learning from piztures. Washingtmi, Neje! Education Association, Department of Audiovisual Instruction, 1968. 175 p. rED 024 2721. Wittich. Walter Airto, avd Charle7 FranzAs Schuller, Audiovisual materials; their nature and iie v York, Harper and Row, 1967. 4 p. U.S. Department of Commerce. Audiovisual equipment and materials; guide to sources of information and market trends. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. 011'0969. 15 p. U.S. Office of Education. Emphasis on excellence in school media pro- qyfi nis. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.- 1969. 227 p. Wendt., Paul R., and Gordon K. Butts. Audiovisual materials. Review of ecluentional research, v. 32, April 1962 : 141-155. Zimmerman, Harry P. Evaluation inference applied to programming on an :,dnentional '-elephone networkA beOnning. Paper presented at the Adult Education Research Conference, Minneapolis, 1970. 10 p. rED 036 7631. 55- 50

B. FinlisAND FILM-MAKING IN EDUCATION _._ survey of plans for 1,Aproved utilization of the educational film in the schools of New -Yotqc -State. Albany, New York StateEduca- tion Department, 1963. 87p. [ED 011 477]. Alexander, W. E,, et al. Towarda theory for the scientific manag mein; of educational film libraries. AV communication review,v. 19, Spring 1971: 89-101. Alverson, TOM. Mediaasconun NASSP bulletin, 54, March 1970: 5644. Baltimore, Gerald. Student-made communicationsfilms are popular 9aat Parkdale9 High. Amliovisual instruction,v. 15, November 1970: Beeler, Duane, and Fr.wk A1cCallistor. Creativeuse of films in education; a case stud of_an_znlult educationprogram for union leaders. Chicago, Roosevelt University, Labor EducationDivisim, 1968. 90 p. [ED 029 2611. The book vs. the film; one vote for each.School management, v. 12, April 1968: 64+. Breen, M. P. Case for the filmed demonstration.Educational screen AV guide, v. 49, October 1970: 6-8. Bushnell, DM1 D. The production and validationof edmational systems packages for occupational train:lAg of depressedarea_students; or black Judont versus tai.her evaluation of urban vocationalpro- grams. Final report. Santa Barbara, Communications Associates, 1970. 215 p, [ED 045 778]. Carrico, P. Student mum ukinu: w Ii v and how. Media and methods V. 6, November 1969 : 40 . C011irls, W. A. Learning of mediacontent: a developi1iental st-udy. Child development, v. 41, December 1970: 1133-1142. Condon, Helen W. Screen education inAmerican high schools. Audio- visue instruction, v. :3, October 1968: 868-870. Culkin, J. M. Motivate them with movies,Momentum, v. 1, April 1970: 18-25. DeMareo, Norman. The film invasion.Clearing house,v. 45, Septem- ber 1970: 61-64. 8 Pio' revisited; special sectionon student-made films Educational screen AV guide, v. 49, March 1970 13 -1-.. Evnel.iments wint film in the classroom.Toronto, Ontario Tnstitnte for Studies in Education, 1970. 25p. [ED 044 916]. Flory, John. Films for learning:some observations on the present, past,_ and future role of the edue!I tional motionpicture. 'Washington, .A._01-ademy for Educational Development,Inc. pne of the support papers for "To improve Leal.ning;repori: Lo the President and the Conaress of the tinited States by the Commissionon Instructional Technolosay." 1968. 35 p. [ED 039 706]. Forsdale. S. P., 8 Arn _film loop. Media andmethods. v. 6. November 1960 : 56+. fED 010 1151. Pr, qi-lale. Louis. 8 mm film in emei QlnQ role. New YOl'IC, Cohlmbia University, 1966, 24p. Friednum. Norinfln L. Some sociolocricalnotes on he boom in film interest. Youth and society,v2,March1971 : 323-33,

5 6 Gilmore, 1Iii1. What film teaching is not. Media and in_ hods, v. September'1970 : 40 41.

Grabowski, Stanley M. Film study is here to s _ ii ug house v. 12, December 1967 : 253-254. Leitrning about the SCArenth art. Clearing holt v. 42, March 1968 : 445=446. Hilnke, J. J FiJnni t1iii ome experiences with the gifted EiTlish jourmd, 60, January 1971: 2941 Herbert, D. Inquiry approach in 16 min sonnet films. Seim 0 -teaclier, v. 38. March 1971 : 39-40. Herman, Lewis. Educational films: writi direeting,_and produoing for chissroom, telc vision, and iiidii't i, Ne, Yor1,-, Crown Publish- ers, Inc., 1965. 338 p. [ED 046 242]. fRalgekinson, Alithony W. North Reading and the screen inecli i Ed u- cational leadership, v. 27, February 1970: 481-484. The scope of screen education. Audiovisual insli tietion, V. 1 January 1968: 16-18. Screen education. Teaching a critical approach to cinema aim television. (Reports and papers on mass communication, 42- )Paris, UNESCO. 1969 (4th impr.). 99 p. Lifer, Charles William. An evaluation of self-learning cente_ adult education. Columbus, Ohio State University, Graduate School, 1969. 151 p. [ED 040 :331], (Ann Arbor, VtliVersity Microfilms, Inc.). Mallerv, David. Film in the life of the school; programs, practices, and new directions. Boston, National Association of Indvendent Schools, 1968.53 p. The.school_and the art of motion pictures. (Revised edition). .Boston, National Association of _Independent Schools, 1966. 147 _n Meyers, N. C. Story of 8 mm cartridges. Educational screen AV gui&, V. 48, September 1969:10+. Miller, Ellen J. Tr;,ger filmmaking. Audiovisind instruction, v. 16 May 1971: 64-67. Miller, William Charles, III. An experimental study of the relationship of film movement and emotional response, and its effect on learning and attitude formation. Los Angeles, University of South- ern California, 1967. 248 p. [ED 017 172]. Mission: possiblethe story of Project Challenge. East St. Louis, Illinois, School District 189, 1967. 15 p. [ED 028 643] Moore, F. L. Films in music education: visual cues for an aural art. Music educators journal, v. 57, January 1971: 58-60. Movies thfit teach, Newsweek, March 25, 1968: 86+. Patterson, Oscar E. University film distributors: a new concept for resource sharing. .Nudiovisual instruction, v. 13, December 19(38: 1074-1077. Powell, David J. Film and the media revolution. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, January 1971 : 29-31. Reese, Wilhird Francis. A comparison of interest level and problem solving accuracy generated by single concept inductive and deduc- tive science films. Research study number 1. Greeley, Colorado State C Alege, 1966. 169 p. [ED 026 250]. 57 52 Sanderson, Sarah E. The story of a film series : access to learning. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, April 1971 : 58+. Schwartz. S. Introducing literature through film. Elementary E ng- lish, v. 48, March 1971 : 301-315. Sharkan, William W. Schooldays at the movies. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, May 1971 : 36-37. Sheratsky, R. E. .e reaking around with films. Media and methods,v. 7, November 1970 : 40 +. Silva, Fred. To look or to see : film study in the English curriculum. Oswego, New York State English Council, 1969. 9p. [ED 035 fi51]. Silverman, M. L. Film-making in the classroom. Journal of secondary education, v. 45, March -1970 : 106-112. Snyder. J. J. Marquee for every school; setting up a film program. Media and methods, v. 6, November 1969: 54+. Sohn, David A. The "eyes" have it. Media and methods,-v. 7, Septem- ber 1970 : 42+. Staples, Donald E. The visual specialist's role inscreen education. Audiovisual instruction v. 13, January1968: 19-20. Stern, Adele H. Using filins in teaching English coinposition. 1968.. 5 p. [ED 031 477]. Stevens, George, p. "The power to move the mind:and spirit." Audio- visual instruction, v. 13, January 1968 : 14-15. The student movie makers. Time, February 2, 1968: 78-79. Sullivan Lorraine M. The use of films and filmstrips in the teaching of reaCling. Paper presented. at the Third International Reading Association World Congress on Reading, Sydney, 1970. 11p. [E] 016 619]. Torrey, George N.,andRichard P. Finn. Film study : an educational goal for all schools. Journal of secondary education,v. 45, April 1970 : 180481. Valend Jack. Schools and films : the exciting revolution. NASSP bullain,v. 52, May 1968 : 40 1.7. Vandergrift, Say. Film program at Agnes Russell School. Audiovisual instruction, -v. 13, January, 1968 : 21-23. van Wieringen, II. The development of 8 mm film in education. Audio- visUal media; v. 4, February 1970 : 6--13. Weisgefo_er, Robert A.,andMalcolm' N Danoff. Evaluating the pot...,n- tial of films for improving self image in minoritygroup children. Interim Technical Report : Phase L Palo Alto, American- Institutes of Research, 1969. 128 p. [ED 041 026]. Woodman, Charles-A.,andPhillip J. Sleeman. Physical Science Study Committee films - -asset ,or liability ? Audiovisual instruction,v. 16, Apiil 1971 : 25+ C. TELEVISION AND RADIO A grand design for 'public-TV. Broadcasting, v. 72, January 30, 1967: 21-35. A history- of eduCational televisiom in -Nevi York State. Albany, New 'York State Education Department, Bureau _of -Department -Pro- , grams Eialuation, 1969..24p; ED.046 224]. A -preliminary report on San Diego:...Area- Instructional .Television 1 Authority. San Diego,Th,eAuthority, 1969. 33 p. [ED 030-302]. 5f; A report on the activities of the first fiveyears, 1963-1968. London, Thompson Foundation, 1969. 34 p. [ED 043 827]. Abel, Frederick Paul. Use of closed circuit television in teacher education relationship to achievement and subject matter understanding. Minneapolis,Mmnesota University, 1960. 175 p. [ED 020 473]. Alexander S. S. The public interest in public television. (P-3676). Santa Mimica, California, Rand Corp., 1967. 52 p. All, Stephen A., and William H. Stegeman. To establish, operate and maintain supplementary educational services: instructional television experience development and distribution. An evaluation of San Diego Area Instructional Television Authority Educational Proo-ram Activities September 1, 1968 to June 30, 1969. San Diego, TA:Authority, 1969. 299p. [ED 038 031]. An experimental study of television as a medium of French instruction. Toronto, Board of Education, 1962. 67 p. [ED 014 242]. Anderson, Ronald S. Educational broadcasting in Japan. Educational perspectives, v. 7, October 1968 : 23+. Appell, C. Television viewing and the preschool child. Journal of mar- riageind family living, v. 25, 1963": 311-318. AttitUdes toward instructional television; report prepared for the Ford Foundation. New York, international Research. Associates, 1965. Austin, H. R. History of television. NASSP bulletin, v. 50, October 1966 : Bair George E. The haunted house of public television: reconCeptn- Oiling ETV's self image.Educational broadcasting review, v. 4, October 1970 : 3-7. Ball, Samuel, and Gerry Ann Booatz. The first-year of Sesame Street :

an evaluatio-a. Princeton7 ,N. Educational Testing Service, 1970. '373 p. and appendices. Barnett, Harold.J., and Edward Greenberg. A proposal for wired city television. Washington University law quarterly,v. 1968, Winter 1968 : 1-25. Regulating GATV systems : an analysis of FCC policy and an alternative. Law and contemporary problems, v. 34, Summer 1969: 562-585. Barnett, Stephen R. Cable television and media concentration, part I :. control of cable systems by local broadcasters. Stanford law.review, v. 22; January 1970 : 221-329. Barnouw; Erik The linage' empire : a history of broacicaSting in the UnitedStateS from 1953.. New York Oxford University Press3-1-970.- Baxter, W. The mass media, ancl young people. Journal of broadcasting, t. 5 1960 :49-58. -Beck, 'Isabel H. Television andoliege instigction. tos 'Angeles 'City Schools, 1965._37 p. [ED .014 961]. _ ijeck,'Lest6f F. EfVlor pre-Schoders.:AucliOvi4uif instruCtion,v. If, September 1966 : 528-533. EchiCational ndeClia- (TV) for theêchbOichild Finl report. Konmouth. Oregon State System of HIgher Education-;=19-65. 149p. TED '010 '5361:- 7' BAIA*: CharTeS:' Nine ;OlibTo.§f:i1545,0 inStiliatiohaT televisiori knd -.city' scliools. A diávistial1nStrubtibiiV. 1oveiriber ;1961": 944 947. 59 54

Benton, Charles, Wayne K.Howell, Huah C. Oppenheimer,and Henry H. ITrrows. Television inurban education; its application to major educational problemsin sixteen cities. New York,Freder- ick A. Praeger, Publishers,1969. 141. p. Bern, H. A. Universities withoutcampuses. Educational leadership, v. 28, January 1971 : 355-358. Berson, Minnie Perrin. AliBaba, what havepn. done ? Childhood education, v. 46, March 1970: 339+. Reader reaction to Sesame Street. Childhood education,v. 46, May 1970 : 426-430. Bierschenk, B. Televisionas a technical aid in education and in educational and, psychologicalresearch : a bibliography.Didakometry. Malmo, Sweden, School ofEducation. Department ofEducational and Psychological Research,1969. 55 p. [ED 037 060]. Biggy, M. Virginia. Implicationsof satellites for education.Audiovis- ual instruction.v. 12. November 1967 : 921-922. Bogatz, Gerry Ann, and SamuelBall. Some things you'vewanted to know about "Sesame Street."American education,v. 7, April 1971 : - 11-15. Borich, Gary D. Giiidelinesfor integration of instructionaltelevision in speech and hearing facilities.Bloomington, Indiana University, Speech and Hearing Center,1969. 33 p. [ED 033 585]. Borton, Terry. Dual audiotelevision. Harvard educationalreview, v. 41, February 1971: 64-78. Botein, Michael. CATVregulation : a junable ofjurisdictions. New York University lawreview, v. 45, October 1970: 816-843. Braddock, Clayton. ETV; SouthCarolina's unappraisedgem. South- ern education report, v. 3, November1967 : 23-29. Breitenfeld, Frederick, fr.Instructional television: the state of the art. Washington, Academy forEducational Development, Inc.One of the supportpapers for "To Improve Learnin.g;a report to the President and the Cono-ress ofthe "United States by theCommission on Instructional Techntlogy." 1970. 53p. [ED 039 702]. Bretz, R. Color, televisionin instruction. (P-4402). &Luta Monica, California, Rand Corp., 1970. 7p. The self-directed. system: a simplified production method for instructional television. (P-4269).Santa Monica, California, Corp., 1969. 22 p. Rand Television and ghetto education: the Chicago schools approach. (P-4108). Santa Monica, California,Rand Corp., 1969. 17p. The University of Texas DentalBranch independ.ent-access television system. (P-4304). SantaMonica, California, Rand 1970. 21 p. Corp., Brock, Anthony. How TV affectschildren : new lighton a much- discussed problem. UNESCO features,no. 585, October (II) 1970 : 19-22. Bronfenbrenner; Urie. The split levelfamily. Saturday review,v. 50, October 7, 1967: 60-66. Who lives on Sesame Street ? Psychologytoday, v. 4, October 1970: 14+. Bronson Vernon. Cooperative instrUctionby television in the schools of An:Lrican Samoa,an outline of the organization_ and. Procedures. National Association of EducationalBroadcasters, 1966. 23p. [ED 020 653]. 55 Browning, Frank. Cable TV: turn on, tune in, rip off. Ramparts, v. 9, April 1971 : 32+. Broyles, Glenwood E. Learnino- models fortelevision : improving the program content. Audiovisal instruction, v. 12, November 1967: 917-920. Budd,_Richard W. The impact of themass media on curricula. Educa- tional technology, v. 10, Apri11970: 50-53. Carnegie Commissionon Educational Television. Public television ; a program for action. New York, Bantam Books, 1967. 254p.. Carpenter, C. IL Teleinstruction and individualized learning.Wash- ington, Academy for-Educational Development, Inc. One of thesupport papers for "To Improve Learning;a report to the President and the Congress of the United States by the Commissionon Instruc- tional Technology." 170. 24p. [ED 039 766]. CarpenterC. R., andMarlowe Froke. Description ofa practical procedure for assessing instructional film and televisionprograms. Uni- versity Park, Pennsylvania State University, Department of Psy- chology, 1968. 43 p. [ED 037 102]. Carpenter, C. R.,-and Susan Smith Reilly. Quality factors in instructional materials : significant statements by authorities. University Park, Pennqylvania State University, Department of Psychology, 1968. 107 p. [ED 037830]. Carpenter. C. R., et al. Educational and instructional television facilities evaluation: preliminary practical procedures. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, Department of Psychology,1968. 86 p. [ED 037 101]. Carpenter, M. B., L. G., Chesler, H. S. Dordick, and S. A. Haggart. Analyzing the use of technology to upgrade education ina developing country. (RM-6179-RC). Santa Monica, California, Rand Corp., 1970, la) p. Carpenter, Thomas H. The utilization of instructional television in music education. Final report. Greenville, East Carolina University, .-1969;435 p. tED 0321881 Cassirer, Henry R. Television?S role in education. School and society, v. 95, October 4, 1967 : 354-358. The Center for Educational Television: Manila, The Center,1968. 32 p. [ED 030 318]. -- Chazen Leonard. Theiirice -of free. TV:. Atlantic, v. -223, March1969 : 59761. Chazeh, Leonard.'inwl-Leonaid Ross. Federal regulation of cable tele- :vision: the visible 'hand. -liarVard law review,v. sa, June 1970 : 18204841: ' < Child deVelOtiiie,nt-and the mass media: ffell.a. "White Horase- Con f er- ence- on- Chitdien: Report fo the President: Washington-, UST-Govt. PrintcOff:,- 1971 ":-323432: . Children .and:.TV3.television's impact on-the child. Bulletin 21:-A. sWashingt6ñ,?AsSociation fOi*ChildhOod==Edication International, 1967. 61 p.. . Godwins.C:; ?aid-Wilbur' Sell/Taint:a 'reirninefram : ,.* wlia-t-the ieseareli(says:"Washingt*Waif-lona' AsoCiations of Edu- cational Broadcasters, 1968.-116p..

65---861-71-5 -56 Clay, R. C. Influence of pupil participationon learning from educational TV: an experiment in methodologyof programme presentation. Educational review,v. 23, February 1971 : 97-105. Coase, R. H., and Edward W. Barrett.Educational TV: who should pay ? Washington, American Enterprise Institutlfor Public Policy Research, 1968. 191p. Cobin, Martin. ITVin Japan. Educational television,v. 1, January 1969 : 14-17. Coleman, E. B. Management plan fora national effort in reading. Paper presented at -the Conferenceof the American Educational Research Association, New York,1971. 41 lc.. [ED 016 680]. Collin, Bennie Mae, Evangeline Morse,and Gerald Knowles. Beyond "Sesame Street :" TV and preschoolers.Educational leadership,v. 28, November 1970: 143-146. Comstock. G. A. A boomerang ina Peace Corps attempt atpersua- sion. (P-1032). Santa Monica,California, Rand Corp., 1969.24 p. The Peace Corps volunteer andachieving education change with new media. (P-4174). SantaMonica, California, Rand Corp., 1969. 25 D. Comstodk,- George, and NathanMaccobv: The Peace Corps educational television (ETV) projectin Colombiatwoyears of research. Research reportno. 1, the project as a wholeorganization. adaptation, and expansion. StanfordUniversity,' Institute for Corn- munieations Research..1966. 85p. [ED 020 663]. The Peade Corps educational television(ETV) project in Co- lombiatwo years of research. Researchreport no. 2, the project's first semestefpupil achievement,teacher attitudes, and the work -;:f the utilization volunteer..Stanford University, Institutefor Communications Research; 1966.. 160p. [ED 020 661]. The Peace Corps educational television(ETV) project in Co- lombiatwo yea....s of research. Researchreport no.-4, the Colombian teacher and the utilization volunteermakingETV workin the schools of a developing country. Stanford_University, Institute for Communications Research, 1:::66.159 p. [ED 020 6661. The Peace Corps educational television(ETV). project in Co- lombiatwo years of research. Researchreport no.- 6, instructional television for the in-service training ofthe Colombian-teacher.Stan- ford University, Institute "forCommunications' Research, 62 g. [ED 020 667]. 1966. The Peace Corps educational television(ETV) project in Co- .lombia-two years of research. Researchreport no. 8, the televised curriculum and the Colombian teacher.Stanford University,Insti- tutelor COmmiinicatibns Research,1966.1.18.p. [ED 020 668]; 'The Peace COrgs,educational television(ETV) project in Co- lombiatwo years of research. Researchreport no. 10; feedbackto . -the Peade Corgg- on projeetgrogres&:7-some models and suggestions. _Stanford -University,Instittite for CommunicationsResearch; 1966. 98 p. [ED 020 669]. emdlEdwardiL.-Palmer:Sesame Street:a lot of off- -'beat ethicatiorl .A dialogue: Nationalelementary principal,v. 50, Apri11.971 : 14-25. r t '1,^Mer,r1.1CM11.1TATXT fq I IM .1.1.11,1 . nelv sWonemorag

57 Connochie, T. D. TV for educationand,industry. Vancouver, Mitchell Press Ltd., 1969. 195 p. [ED 043233]. Continuino- public education broadcasting.Bloomington National Instructional Television Center, 1969. 237 p.[ED 038042]. Coombs, Don H. One week of educationaltelevision May 6-12, 1968. Bloomington, Indiana, National InstructionalTelevision Center, 1969. 75 p. Cooper, Bernarr, ed. ITFS, what itishow to plan, instructional television fixed service.Washington, National Education Association, 1967. 65 p. [ED 018 980]. Copeland, Jimmy Bryant. An investigation offour television teaching

-feedback techniques via a closed circuit system.Maaison, Wisconsin University, 1966. 136 P. [ED 027 486]. Corcoran, John S. Survey of literature oninstructional television advantages and disadvantages, attitudes ofteachers and students, effectiveness of televised instruction. Eugene,University of Oregon, 1969. 35 p. [ED 030 309]. Corporation for Public Broadcasting. Developing anational resource. A.nnual report of the Corporation for Public Broadcasting,1970. Washington., The Corporation, 1970. 46 p. Federal financing 'for the' CorpOration for PublicBroadcast- ing. Washington, The Corporation, 1970. 26 p.,tables, and attachments. Costello. Lawrence F., and George N. Gordon. Teachwith television : a guide to instructionalTV. New York, Hastings House, 1965. 192 p. Creshkoff, Lawrence. Television and the continuingeducation of teachers, a feasibility study ofthe potential of networktelevision for dis- semmation.of educational research information. Final report.New York, Colunibia University, Teachers College,1967. 112- p. [ED 015 667]. Cripwell, Kenneth R Fine, but will it work ? the utilizationof ETV in developing; countries. Edudational televisioninternational, v. 4, September 1970 : 168-171. _ Teaching adults by television, a report of an experiment in the' teaching:of elementary --F.5?,-lish and arithmetic to adult Afri= cans on the COpperbelt, Zamoia,1963-1965. Salisbury, Rhodesia University College, 1966. 137 p: [ED 016 386]. . Ciilhane Joh.i2RePort card on Sesame Street; New York times maga- - zine; ifitTY 244970 i '34+; Craver, 'Katherine B: New and--prornising uses ,of ITV. Audiovisual instruction, v. 12, November 1967 :-910-914. - Dallenbach; jan.,F;, 'andaehneth'IT. DeYouliz.. Special education for -the _gifted through .Research and Development Council of Northeast Miimesota, 1969. 67 p. [ED

. . Davis, Griffith J., The:challenge_ off edudational technologur inimder- -.I'develOped-: comitries. Aiicliovisual. instruction, March 1970: 64-67. Robert H.,:'aikfT:Craig JoMson. EvaluatiOn of regular classroom- lectureS- distributed by -.CCTV to campus and dormitory classrooms. Final report. East LanSing, lffichigan StateUniversity, 1966. 52 p. [ED 021 468]. .

6 3 -- 58 Day, James. Cultured beggers and social responsibilities. Television quarterly, v. 9, Wmter 19 0: 24-28. Dei Rossi, J. A., et al. A cost analysis of minimum distance TV net- working for broadcasting medical informadon. Santa Monica, Cal- ifornia, Rand Corp., 1970. 81 p. [ED 038 988]. DeKorte, D. A. Television in education and. training; a review of developments and applications of television and othir audio-visual aids. Amsterdam, Elseviers Publishing Co., 1967. 213p. [ED 021 e^ 449]. Department of Audiovisual Instruction. A survey of instructional closed-circuit television 1967. Washington, National Education As- Vf<=A sociation, 1967. 196 p. Diamond, Robert M. A guide to instructional television. New York, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1964. 301 p. Educational challenge in the Pacific. NEA journal,v. 57, March 1968: 30-32: Dirr, Peter J. A study of the usefulness of the instructional television services of Channel 13/WNDT and recommendations for their improvement New York, New York University, School of Educa- tion 1970. 117 p. [ED 037 091]. Row can broadcast .iTV survive Los Angeles, Acolyte Publi- cations, 1969. 5 p. [ED 028 657]. Dirr, Peter J., anc/ Gaetana M. Kramer. Soyou want to use instructional tlevision ! Oxford, Pergamon Press Ltd., 1969. 3p. [ED 027 766]. Dizard, Wilson P. Television: a world view. Syracuse, Syracuse -Erni-

yersity Press, 1966.-349 p. , Dlugatch, Irving. Ai-low cost conimunication satellite educationalsys- tem. Taper -Written- for'the International Astronautical Congress, August 15, 1966. [ED 021 456]. Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Dordick,- 'H.' S.Pinrning educa6onal chanae for the primary schools of Columbia : a brie cr.(RM-5532-AfD) SantaMonica, Cali- fornia, Rand COrp.,1968. 391y. . Dordick, S.;L. G. Chesler, S. I: Firstman, cvnd R. Bretz. Telecom- munications.i n urban development (RM-6069-RC). Santa Mon- ica, California, Ran& Corp:, 1969: Dornish, J. Robert. A study of-the effectiveness of ITVas a supplement to face-to-face teachiag of functional' illiterates. Bethlehem, Lehigh ijniv4irsity, -1969: 120 [ED 641 607]. (Ann'Arbor,Uni- versity , Douglas, James :Allen.Mie-4aitelind.,-revisited:a reibdeSt attack upon the-FCC74 'category *fem. UCLA: law reviewv. 17, Mateh 1970: 868-891; Doyle, Walter. ()pen Se&ame: television and the preschbol Notte Dame%journal of ecluiatiOn,v 1, %ming-1970: 1ieifds;*1-.43e S. The-one room:Saba:lite: Itradiseni-Wisconsin Univer- sity, 1966. 13 13. [1.PD 011 917]. Drey.fets;;-Lee M.---,Loofboro. Fiisb intik-Continental TV classiooia: American 'school:hi:ilia'? Journal,v. 11, September 1965 : . 64 59 Dubin, Robert,andR. Alan Hedley. The medium may be related to the message; college instruction by TV-Eugene, Oregon, Center for the Advanced Study of Educational Administration, 1969. 114 p. Barbara J. The effectiveness of teaching selected reading skills to cbildren two through four years of age by television. Paper presented at the Conference of the American Educational R...ftrch Association, Minneapolis, March 1970. 10 p. [ED 040 027]. Dvrioht, Leslie A.,et a2.Exploratory type of evaluation of TV training of elementary, mathematics teachers. Final report. Durant, Southeastern State College, 1966. 14 p. [ED 011 057]. Dwyer, Francis M.,Jr.,An experimental study of the use of visual illustrations nsed to complement oral instruction on television. Uni- versity Park, Pennsylvania State University, 1968. 13 p. [ED 029 503]. ETV study, 1967. Miami, Dade County Board of Public Instruction, 1967. 45 p. [ED 025 945]. Eck, Robert. The real masters of television. Harper's magazine, v. 234, March 1967: 45-52. Educational broadcasting review 1969 convention report, v. 3, 1969: entire issne. Educational/instructional broadcasting. Los Angeles, Acolyte Publi- cations, Inc., 1969. 41 p. [ED 027 758]. 'Educational TV"-a. progress report. U.S. news and world report, June 9, 1969 : 46. Educational television. American school board journal, v. 151. Septem- ber 1965 : 21-47. Educational television and radio in Britain, present provisions and future possibilities. Papers prepared for a national conference or- ed yointlyr by the BBC and the University of Sussex. New ork, International Publishing Service, 1966. 29z p. [ED 022 371]. Effect of television on equal educationa. opportunity. In U.S. Senate. r.Select Committee on Equal Ethwational OppOrtunity.Equal educational opportunity. Part 2---Equality-of educational opportunity; an introduction-continued. Hearincrs" on equal educational opportunity,. 91st Congress, 2nd sess. Washington, U.S. Govt Print Off., 1970. Hearing held June 30, 1970 : 928A-9281M. Egbert, Robert L. Buena Vista High School [Saginaw, Mchigan]. Santa Monica, California, System Development Ciorporation, 1966. 49 p. [ED 010 573]. Buena Vista High School [Saginaw, Dfichigan]-an introducc tion. Santa Monica, California, System Development Corporation, 1966. 7 p. [ED 010 571]. Bnena Vista High School [Saginaw, Micliiganl-descriptive analysis. Santa Monica, Califcrnia, System Development Corpora- tion, 1966. 82-p. [El? 010 572]. Electronic reading. Ne-ysweel 5, lan 'Films, Glen D. Closed circuit televisiOn modelprogram. Arliiwton Heights, Illinois, Elk Grove Training and Development Center, 1969. 60_p. JED 034 407). Eminett, Brian. Television and real life violence. EBU review, no. 123B,September 1970::25-20. 60 Ends ley, Richard C.,andD. Keith Osborn. Children's reactions to TV violence : a review of research. Youngchildren, v. 26, October 1970 : 4-11. Engel, C. E.,andR. 1). Meyrick. Television in postgraduate andcon- tmump; medical education. London, British 1ViedicalAssociation ; Awociation for the Study of Medical Education,Television Sec- tion, 1969. '71 p. [ED 031 955]. Erickson, Clifford G.,andHyman M. Chausou. Chicago's TV colleges. Final report of a threeyear experiment of the Chicago City Junior College in offering collegecourses for credit via open circuit television. Chicago City College, 1960. 104p. [ED 021 442]. Erickson CliffOrd G.,etal. -Eight years of TV College--a fourthre- port. .g.nswers to some questions about the TV collegeprogram of direct instructional television. Chicago Public Schools,1964. [ET) 017 195]. Estarellas Juan. Programmed TV instruction ina foreign language. Washiniton, NationalAssociation of Educational Broadcasters, 1D66. 17 p. [ED 010 730]. Evans Richard I., and Peter K. Leppmann. The universityfaculty and innovationtheory,a research case history (television), implications. A social psyehological analysis in depth.Houston, Houston Research Inst.,Inc., 1965, 372p. [ED 010 512]: Five years of research in television instructionin the Cincinnati Pub- lic Schools, 1955-56 through 1959-60. CincinnatiPublic Schools, 1960. 20 p. [ED 017 171]. Forman Rose. Television for children in middleEuropean count-He? Childhoodeducation. v. 44, May 1968: 549-554. Forsy the, Richard O. Instructional radio: a position paper. A series two paper from ERIC at Stanford. Asupport paper for "To Im- prove Learning.; a report to the President and the Congressof the United States by. the Commissionon Instructional Technology." Stanford University, ERIC Clearinghouseon Educational Media Technology. 1970. 16 p. [ED 014 933]. Frank, Josette. Television; bow to use it wisely with children. New York, Child Study Association of America,1969. 24 p. Freeman, Stanley L., jr. TVor not TV : how to gain teacher acceptance. Nation's schools. v. 80. November 1967: 63-64. Friendly, Fred W. Due to circumstances beyondour controL...New York, Random House, 1967. 325p. Future of non-commercial TV; exclnsive interviewwith John Macy, President, Corporation for PublicBroadcasting. U.S. news and world report. December 8. 1969: 94-97. GanstHerbert J. The mass Media aian educational iiistitution. Urban review, v. 2, February 1967 : 5-10. The uses of television and thier educationalimplication. New York, The Center for Urban Education,1968. Gattegno, Caleb. Toiirards a visual culture; educating through sion: New York, Outerbridge and DienstfreY(distributed bY KR Dutton and Co.), 1969. 117 j). Genensky, S. Closed cireuit TV 'andthe education of .'the partially sighted. (P-4343). Santa Monica, Calif:, RandCorp., 1970. 18 p. 66 61 Genensky, S., P. Baran, H. L. Moshin,andH. Steingold. A closed circuit TV system for the visually handicapped. (RM-5672-RC). Santa Monica, Califoniia, Rand Corp. 1908. 29p. Genensky, S., et al. A closed circuit TV ;ystem for the visually handicapped and prospects for future research. Santa Monica, Rand Corp., 1969, 20 p. [ED 034 4191. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scien- tific and Technical Information). General Precision Systems, Inc. Av iew of educational television. Pleasantville N.Y., General Precision Systems, Inc., 1968, 27p. Gjesdal, Tor. 'UNESCO'sprogramme in space communication. UNES-* CO chronicle, v. 16, November 1970 :439-452. Glassner, Leonard E. 'Television linguisticsprogram. 1967 report. Pitts- burgh Public Schools, 1967. 72p. [ED 023 313]. Glazier, Robert C. ICETC-TV:a catalyst for learning in St. Louis. Educational instructional broadcasting,v. 3, November 1970 : 41-44. Goldin, Hyman H. Financing public broadcasting. Lawand contemporary problems, v. 34, Summer 1969 : 650-670. Goodfriend, Herbert E..andFrank T. Pratt. Community antenna television. Financial analysts journal.v. 26, MtIrch-April 1970 : 4857. Gordon, George N. Classroom television; new frontiers in ITV. New York, Hastings House, 1970. 248p. Educational television. New York, Center for AppliedRe- search in Education, 1965. 113p. The library of education. New York, Center for Applied Research in Education, Inc., 1968. 126p. [ED 025 160]. The languages of communicaEon: a logical and psychological examination. New York, Hastings House, 1969. 334p. Governor's Committee on Public Television. A publictelevision 'network for Pennsylvania. [Harrisburg], TheCommittee, 1968. 122 p. -Goyer, Robert S.,andEariR. Harlan. Some effects of televised instruction on a basic speech course. 1967. 6 p. [ED 026 380]. -Grant, P. L. The television iceberg. Speechpresented at the National Association Physical Plant Administratorsof Universities annual meeting, Quebec, 1967. 9 p. [ED 031 891]. Grant, Stephen. Educational TVcomes to the Ivoiy Coast. Africa report, v. 16, February 1971 : 31-33. Gray, Mary Jane. The effect of home televiewingon school children. Elementary "Fluglisli, v. 46, March 1969: 300-309. -Grayson, Lawrence P. Education beyond the horizon.Science, v. 170, December 25, 1970 : 1376-1382. Great Britain. Central Office of Information.Educational television in Britain. London, British Information Services,1967. 12 p. reat Cities Research Council Educational CommunicationsProject. Final report. Appendices: exhibit A, data processing in the great cities, March 1967; exhibit C, creativity in uibaneducation ; exhibit D, the Central Cities Conference. Chicago,Great Cities Program for School Improvement, 1969. 410p. [ED 031 087]. -Greenberg; Bradaey S. Televion for children:dimensions of com- municator and audience perception& AVcommunication review, v. 13, Winter 1965 : 385-396. Greenhill, L. P.,et al.The educational effectiveness, aceeptability, and feasibility of the Eidophor large-screentelevision projector. Uni- 67 62 yersity Park, Pennsylvania StateUniversity, Division of Academic Research and Services; 1962. 27 P. [ED030 306]. Griffith, Barton. L. ETVcan Meet its audiences. Educational leadership, v. 28, November 1970: 140-142.- , Griffith, Barton L.;-`,anut DonaldW. MacLennan. ImprovenientP. of teaching by television. Proceedingsof the National ConferenCe of the National Association ofEducational Broadcasters at the Uni- versity of Missouri, March 24,1964.. Columbia, Universityof Mis- souri Press, 1961. 218p. Griffith, Kitty, and.Todd Holland.Sesame Street, South. South today, v.2, September 170: 3. Grinager, Patricia. Adult educatorSconsider, the :satellite .proposaL 1967. 13 p. [ED'023 967]. Groombridge, Brian, et al. Adulteducation and television,a compara- ,five stiidy ni, Canada, CzechoslOvalcia,,andJapan. London,- National ristitute..ofAdultEdiicition4966:142.P4ED011:9931. : Gropper; C4;:idite L. Prograinraingvisual -Tresentations for:Proce- dural learning. Studiesin 'teleVisedinstruction. Final report. Amer- ican Institute for Research inBehavorial Sciences, ,1966. 139p. . [ED 017 162]. - - GroPPer, George- L., et' al.' The 'representational:role of deinor!stra- tions in,teachnig concepts.andprinciplesi ience Stud.ies in tele-_ vised inStruction, and dithensions.of -visual representation.- 165 [ED 010 0251. _ Gryde, Stanley S. The feasibilityof "programmed" television instruc- ..tion. AV Commiinication review,*v. 14, Spring 1966 : 71-89. _ Guide to television- terroinOlogy.Educational product -.report,. v.3,

--December1.969.: 22-34. . _ Gunn, HarifOrdW: Space. satellitea s.33:4education. Phi Delta Kapp,an, 48,January 19.67: -" - Haney, John D. Television.3_ chingedthethilaiWill it chafige your teaching t.r.."...stilictOr FebruarY1971: teach-themielvei.- American Samoa; DePartMent of Eddcation,J966.21 p. Egp 01 5 6661.- Harrison; Alton jr.vand Eldon G. Scriven:-TVand youth: literature and research reviecied. Clearing.:_house,_v. 44Octoher::1969 -90- ..= 1 . HaYmarr, John A.. Janies,T. Johnson. jr. Audio-lingaal7res- '', sults iP-the sec.onclyeared-rgeaFe,11-7.--1:96.1-;e: Pellvei-S4n-foid-Piqi--- eet on the context of inkrudtioiial teleyiSion;report no. 8.-Sian-ford ,A-cM4versitY-CaliforiJia: -4.4471.4e-i for :-..00inigOcations.0.q.s.tre47.1.--96,3 37p. 018 Frazard, Patrick ,p.. TV -ik is:-some eisays -in, criticism: Papers -orig: cOMMas'sioned. hyfthe Television ;Thfoymation'Office for the National CO-3.Mil of Teachers of EnglishTelevision:Festival. Tilipois, -National CoMicil eachers-;of ,14112glish, 1966. 221 1)-

-elevon quarrerlY - Helinfre, Guy M.-Emergingpattern's of inserujtional.televisionjor CaliforgiaTuIplic sc11,045-SACTaTael#9,f.Califor4iaSt-Pitte Department Educadon, D, 014:236].

1-" 68 t-i -.4""s^.2m.Pqrrre-_,ntft,nr.t.mr-vt

63 Hennes, James D.,et al.The Thinois television project for the gifted, a combined ex:perimental and demonstration projectto testand dem- onstrate televised enrichment units for students at upper elementary levels. Final report. Urbana, Illinois University, 1965: 121 p. [ED

018 031]. , . Herman W. Land Associates, Inc. The hidden medium : educational _ radio- A status report- prepared for National Educatiónal Radio. New York, Herman W. Land Associates,Inc.4967.. 1 History of the development of, ITV._ Educational product report, v. 4, -January 1971 : 16-26.- Holloway, Donald F. Educational radio -for Appalachian adults..Ap- palachia v. 2, Sepiember 1968 : 7=8. . Horn, John.. Educational TV; still, yonngi 'still trying.- The progre§- sive, 7. 30, February 1966 : . Horway, Frank D. Television .in the servie6 of ,FLES teacher train- ingthe State University foreign lanVage project, 1965. 7 p. [ED 011 171]. a Hudson, Robert B. Report of the President's Task Force. on Commu- nications Policy. Audiovisual instruction, v: 14, October 1969 :" 61 +. Hull, Richard B. Two depth seminars on current statns,, continuous _ census, and projected uses of television in education_ for the next decade. North. Central- Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools, 1963. 471 p. [ED 010 333]. Iezzi, Fr9.-n1 Whatever happened to Signor Manzi, or whither Italian. educational TV? Educational television; v. 1; Decemher 1968 : 9-12. If kids act smarter, 'Sesame Street' may be the reason. Nation's schools, .-v. 87, March 1971 : 34-35. Instructional television fixed service. Educational product report, v. 4, January 1971 : 563. . Instructional television in Germany. International Central Institute for Youth and Educational ,TV; 1968, 31 p. [ED- 017 173] Instructional television; special feature. Today s education, v. 59, Jan-- nary 1970 :3340: Instructional television transmission systein for the Genesee _Valley Area. Rochester, Brown AsSociates; 1968.-.66 D. [ED 024 265],..` International Council for Educational DevelOpment. InstruPtional -broadeasting: a design for the future. Prepared-for the Corporation for Public Broadcasting, 1971. 37 n: Jaffe, Abram, -and Stanley. HenShiw Studies-- in. the utilization of television in the schools. Ne-vr York, Bureau of Applied ,Social-Re- ,..search, Cohmibia University, 1965. 64.p. . - Jmison, Dean. PIP/ming the use of an instructional, satellite. Educa- tionalfbroadcasting review, v., 4, October 1970 :417-53. Jomison, Dean,et Satellite syems for inst;u6tion,al.radio.-- Santa _ .Monica,- Ramd Corporation. hi-cooperation with London University, _-1968. 13-43: [ED 035 284]. (Clear,inohouselor-Federal Scientific and Technical Information), 43117, James: M. Low.-Cost receivers' and -the 'use ...t-i.2-,-direct7 broadcast . _(Stanford --jcarnal rof internx7 tionalstudie.s.,v:.a _ 5, June-1970:138466: . Jaqinth,OhaxlesE.,et alAn experimental study utilizing-closed" cir- cult. television in an indn-strial arts team teacilino- Tam: Final proo1=

- 69 :*. 64 report. Kenosha PublicSchools, Wisconsin, . 378]. 1967. 81 p. [ED016: Jellinek, Roger: Is Sesame Streetone way to reading ? NewYork times-book review,September 20, 1970: 30+. Jolmson, Eugene I. *Extending the educationalinfluence of television. broadcasts. Boston,World Peace Foundation,1967. 10 p. [ED 018' Johnson, Nicholas.Beyond Sesame Street.. cipal, v. 50, April197116-13. National elementary prin- j""Finson,- Richard A. A pilot demonstrationof the applica;tion of cational televisionto the in-service training edu- mentally retarded. needs of teachers of the Final report. St. Paul,Minnesota State Depart- ment of Education, 1967.135 p. [ED 025 050]. Joint Councilon Educational Telecommunications. cational media specialist What every edu- ought to know aboutCATV. Audiovisual- instruction,v. 14, October 1969 : 67+. Jones, Trubee. ITVon Guam. Audiovisual instruction, ber 1970: 51-52. v. 15, Septem- Jordan, James R. TheNational Center for Schooland College Tele- visiona demonstrationof a nationalprogram agency for mstructional television, 1968.208 p. [ED 020 655]. Jordan, P. L. Communications satellites, technology transfer,and economic development.(P-4317). Santa Monica, Corp., 1970. 12p. California, Rand Jorgensen, Erlino; S. Asurvey of instructional closed-circuit _sion, 1967. WaillingtOn. National televi- Education Association,1967. TV for Montana education,report of the Montana Educational Television Committee.Billings, The Committee, 014 898]. 1962. 90 p. [ED. Kanner, Joseph H. The sion: a instructional effectiveness ofcolor in televi- review Of the evidence. Series LStanford, ERIC Clearing-- house on EdithationalMedia and Technology,1968. 9 p. Kanner, Joseph H., andWesley P. Marshall. Areport on television in basic trainingtheimprovement of basictraining by television. ,Washington, Departmentof the Army, Officeof the Chief Signal' Officer, 1963. 44p. [ED 014 221]. Kenney., Brigitte L. Annotatedbibliography on television tape in psychiatry. Jackson, and video- Drississippi University MedicalCenter,- Department of Psychiatry, 1969.22-p. [ED 033 574]. KentuckY'S-ETV networktheNation's largest AmericanSchool and' university, v. 41, April 1969:27-29. Kinross, Felicity. Televisionfor the teacher. London, ilton, 1968. 140 Harnish Ham-- Kli,ger., Samuel. Foo- acir SesameStreet Teachers College September 1970 :41-56. record, v. 72,- - Knirk, Frederick G. The problemsand successes of instructionaltelevision in elementary andsecondary schools in New YorkState 1966 68. Albany, ..New YorkState EducationDepartment:Bureau of School: ProgiamsEvaluatidn: 196& 54p. [ED014 041]. Koenig, Allen E, and RuaneB Hill, -eds. The farther'vision ; educa- .tional teleyison today. _Madison:Uniyersity of Wisconsin_ Press, 167.s71'p. 65 Komoski, P.- Kenneth. A demonstration-project of programed television instruction. New York, Columbia University, Center. for Edu-

cational Technology, 1966. 193 p. [ED 011 066]. - Kornhauser, Louis H. and Pamela Brooke. Enrichment throuoh radio : a proposal to use radio as a tool of instruction from pre-kinder-t? garten through grade 12. Washington,,Arnerican University ; D.C.

Public Schools, 1968. 103 p. [ED 046 917].- - Kress Gerard C., fr., and G-eorge L.- Gropper. Sbidies in televised in7 strUction: individualizing oroup instruction. 4, a suMmary . report. Pittsburgh, American Inst%tute for -Research in Behavorial ,Sci- . ences;Metropolitan Pittsburgh -Educational TV Station, 1961. 22 p. [ED 025 157]. Kuan Tsai, Michael. Some effects of American television programs on children in Formosa,. Journal of broadcasting, v. 14, Spring 1970 : 215-228. Kucera, Geoffrey. TV in teacher-training : it works at :University of Hawaii. Honolulu, Hawaii University, College of Education, 1968. 4 [ED 026 879]. Lanib, Henry W., jr. Educational radio in Robbinsville. Appalachia, - v. 2, September1968 : 5-6. Lambeth, Edmund B. Comsat, Ma Bell and ETV. Nation, v. 201, January 23, 1967: 109-112. Lang, Gladys and Ronald Fox. Center report. Urban review, v. 3, November 1968: 39. Mass media.; television in the lives of poor children. Center forum, v. 3, October 20, 1968 : 1-2. Langer, Elinor. ETV: Ford Foundation calls for nonprofit satellite system. Science, v. 153, August 26, 1966 : 962-964. Lapham Harry It. Avoiding common. pitfalls in the planning of a proctiCal _instructionaltelevision system. Audiovisual instruction, v: 12, November 1967 : 939-943. Lorimer, George S., and W. Ward Sinclair. Some effects of two-way television on social interaction. AV communication review, v. 11, Spring 1969 : 52-62. Laurent, Lawrence." The history, ,frustrations and hopes of publid television. Washington post; March 242 1968 :1=r9, Ledford, LoWell" E. Educational television in the small school. Little Rock, Arkansas Education Association, 1968. 4 p. [ED 020 822]. H. Rex., Television foreducational- reform : the Samoan model: ComPaCt,- v...-2,-October 1968 : 23-26. Leeming- -Owen. TV in ,Senegalese adult education. School and soci- -,..ety.lv.96,. November23, -1968 : 442444. Lenihan, Kenneth J., and Herbert Menzel.-- ,The utilization of class- - room television::New Yoik, COlumbia University, Bureau - of:Ap- plied Social Research, 1963. 234 p., [ED 015 611]:- Leonard, John. inT.- not use TV for a Head Start program ? New York times magazine,--jcily_14,,196S: 5 ± -7" Lewis, CA:TV:the ftiture thaniel -for local:sch-ool programs. -i;Nition'ischools;v:;"85;Februaii1910": 92+. WMia-in C. Through- cattle -CO'classloonl-Waslunt,-. oton, National EducatibiliAssobratiolf;:--1967:14441; 1--- Lincoln, William A. Develppinene okTeChniciads(4orintilizing tele- sion in secondary schooLi adult basic education classrooms. Final , 4 N 66 report. Gardner (Mass.) Publi.c Schools, 1970. 46 p: [ED 046 231]. LintherrY, William P. Mass connmmications.New York, H. W. Wil- son Company, 1969, 206 p. (The reference shelf,v. 41,_ no. 3). Lippmann, Walter:It looks likea way out of the wasteland. Wash- ington post. May 7, 1967: C5. Little, Stuart' W. Children's TelevisionWorkshop. Saturday review, v. 52, February. 8, 1969: 60-62. From A to Z on Sesanie Street. Saturdayreview v. 53 May 9, 1970: 62-61. 3 7 Lyle, David. Washington Countyclosed-cfrcuit televisionre ort. Hagerstown, Washington County Boardof Education. 85p. on 536]. - LYnch, Charles J. Wired broadCasting-:a prePosterous idea whose time has come: Innovation, nb;21. MAY 1971 :1049. Lynch. James E., ed. Radio and televisionin the secondary 'school. V. 50, Odtober1966: entire issue. Maccoby, Nathan. and George. COM-Stock.The Peace Corps educational television (ETV) project_ inColornbiatwo_years of research. Re7 search repOrt /lb. 3, improirhig:theeffectiveness of the utilization volunteer and the_ utilization ofETV--by the Colombian teacher. Stanford University, Instittte forCOMmunications -Research, 1966. 31 p. [ED 020 665]. , MacCullough, Don., Is va,lidatiOna-:at ITVreally needs ? Los Angeles, Acolyte Publications, 1969. 5_p. [ED 028 659]. MacLean, Roderick. Television in education:London, Methuen Edu- cational Ltd., 151 p. [gD 035 292]; - MacNeil, Harold. Television: education the hope for the kituret Education Canada, -ir'; 10. Deeernber 1970: 5-9. Macy,-John W. Public brOadcasting:a medium in Search of solutions: Law-- and contemporary problems,v. 34. Summer 1969 : 636-649. Madson. Marland LeRoy. Methods,including COT of- preSehting; introductory biologk: their raffect": onicollege. freshmen. Minne- :apolis, Minnes6ta -University.,1969; .224 p.- [ED 045 412]; (Ann Arbor, University Microfilms, Inc.). Mahlmsnn,:i Giselix: Thecidea ;ofGermanY's TelekolZeg:- School and society, v. 97 Febiliatr'1969: 106=4.07 Marchese, L.-. &le TV and'.idult-ecTucatiom.Adult leademship, v: 19, Maroh1971,::299+. . . Mitrgolin, Joseplr.B., :and-0-Ohn,Hanessiaii, jr,-Brciadeast Satellites: their potential use for educationalpUrpOses And' their relationship to international:understanding -andcooperation. The Program of Policy Studies in Science.Anf,Teclmology.-.Washington,. -George ..7 Ma-rkel, ;Lester: A-proVam :". for-ipublk at. New YorktitheSMagazine, March 12, 1967: 25:40'1 , Harry R:Develop,meni,of'filitistrip.sequenrce7photographs:and sound reproduction ofeducational televis ionfTkesentations.-Côats- .ea. 7i p -[ER-1-01.-646].L Masi -conimunication: a researchrbiblioaraigay.t:Santa..33arbara-,-cali- torn* Hansenrandl4t1;sons,068 -;=- F.- Maxviell, Lee. Coo-pc:AT:nonvia telexiscdlin'itruCtion, journ4 v 11, November...1-970z, , T - _ vl ^ _ _. 67. McAnany, Emile G., et al. Television and educational reform in El Salvador. Complete report on the first year of research. Stmford University, Institute for Cominunication Research, 1970, 193p. [ED 040 596]. McBride, Jack. The twenty elements of instructional television. Paper presented at the Eleven Nation United Arab Republic Seminaron Educational Television. Sponsored by The Centre for Educational Television Overseas. Cairo, Egypt, February 6-1, 1966. 31p. [ED 011 782]. McBride Wilma, ed. Inquiry; implications for televised instruction. Washington,National Education Association, 1966. 64p. McCullough, Martin A. Mass media curriculum: fantasy or reality ? Educational leadership, v.-26, February 1969: 447-450. McDermott, John F. The violent Bugs Bunnyet al. New York times magazine, September 28, 19.69 : 95 +. McSune Lawrence. Compendium of televised education. EastLan- sing, kichigan, Michigan-State University, publishedyearly since 1954. Mendelsohn, Harold, et al. Operating gap-stop. A studyof the application of communications techniques in reaching the unreachablepoor. Final report. Vol. I. Denver University, 1968. 249p. [ED 021 788]. Operation gap-stop. A study of the application ofcommunica- tions teclmiques in reaching; the unreachablepoor. Final report. Vol. II. Denver University, 1968. 218p. [ED 021 816]. Merrill, Irving -R., and Ruby B. Yaryan. BroadcastTV as an aid to contminr:g education. Terminal progress report. San Francisco, California University, Medical Center, 1968. 42p. [ED 027 417]. Me;_cican American education researchprogram : solutions in cora- munications. Report to the California State Departmentof Educa- cation. San Jose, Santa Clara County Office of Education,1969. 14 p. [ED 033 806]. Meyer, R. J. Critical view of television and higher education.AAUP bulletin; v. 56, March 1970 : 106+. NETPTVETVITV: going public with public TV? Media and methods, v. 6, September 1969 : 33-35. Wedzinski, J. The status of-Canadian educational television. LosAn- &les, Acolyte Publications, 1969. 6 p. [ED 025 954]. Melke Keith. Mediamessage interaction in TV. Viewpoints,v. 46, Sepeember 1970: 15-31. Miller., Hairy. L. Patterns of educationaluse of a televised public afrans program.--A. studyof Metropoliscreatoror destroyer. New York.University, 1966. 198 p.-[ED 010 545]. MOhrmann, Jeanne W.,and Wilmer E. Wise. EValnation of closed dr- -cult educationaltelevision in Delaware : emphasison pro- gramseries content;and.-Commitment. Preliminary report. Doner, laware State Department .of Public Inatrietion, Planning and Evaluatioii, 1970;264 p. [:ED 038 033]. MOir,Githrie,ect Teachmg and teleVision: ETV explained: New York, Pergamon Press, 1967. 170 p. _ MOOS Malcolni.s Educational4 television isstilljust a promise: American education, v. 1, FebraarY1965 . Mbigenstern, Joseph.' Pablic.-TV:. a _power struggle: NeWS* v. 69, 'June 5, 1967 :-.90+. 38 Morris; Norman S. What's good about children's TV. Atlantic, v. 224, August 1969 : 67-71. Morriseit, L. N. Age of television and the television age. Peabody journal of education v. 48, January 1971 : 112-121. Morton, F. Rand. The teaching maclf-ne and the teaching of languages : .a report on tomorrow. New York. Modern Language Association of America, 1960.1 p. [ED 023 317]. Mukerji, Rose. A national demonstration project utilizing televised materials for the formal edr,tation of culturally disadvantaged preschool children. Washington, D.C., Greater Washington -Educa- tional TV Association, 1966. 126 p. [ED 010 529]. Instructional television and early childhood: Teacher education, v. 21, AprilMay 1970 : 6 + . Television guidelines for early childhood education. BlOoming- ton, Indiana, National Instructional Television, 1969. Why not feelings and values in. instructional television ? Young children v. 26, May 1971 : 273-281. Murphy, Adith, and Ronald Gross. Learning by television. New York, Fund for the Advancement of Educatim, 1966. 95 p. The unfulfilled promise of ITV. Saturday review; v. 49, Novem- ber 19, 1966: 88+. Naeslund, Jon. Experiments with closed circuit television (CCTV). Stockholm, Stockholm School of Education, 1967. 9 p. [ED 019 001]. Experiments with internal television (ITVLHS). Stock- holm, Stockholm School of Education, Institute of Educational Psychology, 1970. 6,p.. [ED 046 218]. National Association of EducationalBrOadcasters. Financing of edn- 6ational, television stations. Washington, The Association, 1965. 183 p. Report on survey of acceptance and rejection patterns of -network programs by educational radio and television stations. Wash- .,ington, The Association, 1969. 1:8 p.. Yearbdok and directory ',of. Aducational broadcasting. Wash- gton, The Association, 19711 120 p. . _ -National- Center -for School and College Television ,news: suPplement, number 6, television in -sdience education. ,Bloomington, The-Center, -1967. 10 p. [ED 027 180]. National Citizens Committee for Public Broadcasting. The state of --public ,broadcasting. New. Tork,,Tho COminittee, 19,68..,26 -p- National: Eau-cati6ii A-Ssociation: ::Division Of`.-tchicalional Te:ch-

_ -nologyr. Schools and ,eible-tele'vision.---.Wasljneton, The Association, f.,: NatTonal Trojedt:1-Oi: the: IMpitsi..:6"melit of Televjrlised aiff.eience: final repiort of the -National Project Ininiovem" ent -Of Televisl edati,Th.0.1.1"ti63-?; j9d6cas5:zitle96.8. ingtonNational Association_ o E catital Br a rs 119691. 43 p. 111.Actl?-J-119-bert J Tki.L,Pg radY), X°.:47:0-°Et.and P.aintaul cPPIPet-3-1qe in a fO--re-ign.language.-ERIC:locu,S-ieporth.Og. teachht -of. fOr,- eign languages number 11 NeW York Ainerican Counqon Teach- mg Of ForeignLatignages 'Modein- Language ASsociation. ERIC

7 41 69

Clearinghow3e on the Teaching of Foreign Languages,1969. 10 p.

[ED 036 2151. , , -Netzer, Dick. Long-rano-e financing- of iyablic broadcasting.New York, National Citizens 0?nimittee for Broadcasting [1969-1.29 p. :New relationships in instructional television. Proceedingsof the conference jointly sponsored by the Education Sectionof the Elec- tronic Industries .Association and the InstructionalDivision of the National Association of Educational Broadcasters incooperation with the Educational iqedia Council, April18-20, 1967. Washing- ton, Educational Media Council, InC.,[1967]. 157 p. :New systems boost educational telecasting. Americanschool and university, v.11, Apri11969 :33-35. New types of out-of-school education: combined teaching systems. Strasbourg, France, Coinicil. of Europe, Council forCultural Coop- eration,1968. 96 p. [ED 038 598]. _Niven, Harold. Radio-television degreeprograms in American colleges and universities,1967-1968.Eleventh report. Washington, Na- tonal Association of Broadcasters, 1968. 95p. -Noel, Elizabeth S.,aadGuy M. Helnake. Iii.strational television in California. A status report. Sacramento, CaliforniaState Depart- ment of Education,1968. 33 p.[ED021 466]. Norwood, Frank. CATV and educational TV.Audio-ri-ual instruction, v. 13, December1968 : 1058-4061; Switchboards in the sky. Audiovisual instruction,V. 11, Decem- ber1969 : 96-99. Nylin, Donald W. TV or not TV: what is thequestion ? Edncational leadership, v. 28, November1970 : 137-139. -Old enoug;h to 'watch TV; old. enough to learn. New York, Gellert Pub- lishino-.7nC'7o 1969. 4- p [ED 028 661]. Opzn circuit television and the community college. LongBeach City College, 1968. 8 p. [ED025 249]. rme, Maynard. E., and -Jack H. Stolz. To savea medium. Educa- tional instructional broadcasting,v. 3, November1970 : 47-50. shOrn, D. lieith, and R. C. Enctsley.Emotional reactions ofyoung children to TV violence., Child, development,v. 42, March1.971 : 321-331. . Osborn, Keibi, and William. Hale.Television. violence. Childhood education, v. 45, May1969: 505-567. :Paiva e Souza, Alfredina-de. Functional literacyand continuing edu:- cation by television. Literago discussionv. 1, Spring 1970 : 60-69. _Palmer, Edward L. Can television really teach?American education, v. 5, August:September1969 : 2-6. Sesgme Street shaping broadcast television to needsof the preschooler. :Educational technology;v. 11, February 1971 :18-22. :Palmer, Edward L.,et al.A comparative study of current educational -television ,-proams for preschool ehildren-. Finalretort. Mon- -moiith, Oregon. State System of Higher Education,Teaching Re- search DiVision., 1968. 100p. [ED 032 123]. :Panes, Rat& Benj serieg- of adult, reading-improvement lessons 'for initruCtionAl ;telefision.-NeWYork,: New. York University, 1968. -427 p.1ED 042 985], (Ann Arbor, University Microfilms,Inc.) 70 Patty, Austin Horace. A comparison of therelative effectiveness of teaching composition by closed-circuit televisionand by conventional classroom proced.ures. Corvallis, OregonState University, 1967. 75 p. [ED 029 8813. Paul, Norman L. Invisible factors ina child's reaction to television. .Childhood education, v. 47, March 1971: 303-306. Pauvert, Jean-Claude. Educational television inthe Ivory Coast. Prospects in education, v. 1,no. 2, 1970 : 13-19. Peters, David R., and Philip J. Schreiner. Theeffects of television and expert feedbackon self-perception. Paper presented in part at the Westorn Psychological Associationannual meeting, Los Angeles, 1970. Los AngelesCalifornia University, Graduate School of Business AdministAtion. 27p. [ED 042 192]. Peters, John M., and William Barclay. EDUSAT: educational television satellite system for the 1970's.Educational broadcasting review, v. 3, October 1969: 35-42. Pierce, M. Scheffel. Orientation to instructionaltelevision for facul- ties of higher education institutions bynetwork ETV in Nebraska. A study of decision-making for ETVutilization. Final report. 4 Lincoln-. Nebraska University,1969. 76 p. [ED 035 2981. 3 Postley, Maurice G. Special educationturns on with CCTV. Audio- visual instruction, v. 16, January 1971: 27-28. Potter, Carole A. Commercial TV and howto use it. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13. December 1968: 1102-1103. Poulos, Chris G. the relative-effectiveness ofa closed-circuit television team-teaching method in high school biologyinstruction. Final report. Wisconsin, Wausau Senior Righ School. 104p. [ED 028 0923. Powell.. J. W. .Channels of lea the story of educational tele- Wash-ington, Public Affairs 4962. 178 p. The President's Task Forceon Communications Policy. Audiovisual

instruction, v. 13, December 1968: 1055-1057. - Final report. Washington, The Task Force,1968. 1 vol. Price, John F. Television zacilitiesin highereducation in New York State. Albany, New York State Education Department,1965. 57 p. [ED 014 873]. Propp,. GeOrge, ed. Communicative television for thedeaf student. Proceedings of Symposium on Research and Utilizationof Educa- tional Media for Teac}ingthe Deaf. Lineoln, NebraskaUniversity, Teachers College. 1970. 282 p. [ED -043188]. . Purdoni; Boyd Andra. An analysis of listening,skill developinent -using fhe Midwest Program on Airborne TelevisionInstruction. 1968. -148 p. [ED 038 411]. (Ann Arbor,University Microfilms, Inc.). PUziuoli, David A. A study of teaching Universityextension classes by -gorgantown, -West Virgin* University,' /970.-73 p. [ED-042.9611:- Radio and televisiOn in the service of echicationand development in Asia. :(RePorti-anct Paperson mass .cOmmuiiication, 49) Paris, UNESCO, 1967. 58 p. Rand. Corporation.:TeleVision;.a bibliography. of -selected Rend pub- -(SB-1031).:Sinta Monica; California,Rand Corp., 1971, 9 p.. ,.,.....mwomeArevtvaKttOgiforr.r

71 Randall, E. S. Research results in three large televised FLES _pro-7 grams. Paper read at the International Conference on Modern For- eig.n Language Teaching, West Berlin, 1964. 4 p. [ED 024 294]. Reddick Thomas L. The use of television to teach the poorOpera- tion dap-Stop. Adult leadership, v. 18, April 1970 : 323. Reed, Robert M. The Hawaii Educational Television Network : a status report. Honolulu Hawaii University, College of Education, 1968. 5 1). [ED 026880]: Reid, J. Christopher, and Donald W. MacLennan. Research in instructional television and film Washington; 17.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1967. 216 p. Report of the Minnesota inter-institutional television feasibility study. Minnesota University, Inter-Institutional Television, 1967. 200 p. [ED 023 312]. Rich, Owen S., et al. The utilization of large-screen TV to overcome shortages of classroom space and teaching personnel. Provo; Brig- ham Young University, 1966. 87p. [ED 010 175]. Richards. Ivor. Armstrong. Desigrn for escape; world education through modern media 'New York, Harcourt, Brace and World, 1968. 142 p. RiChardson, Elinor. Inquiry in instructional teltwision : a pilot project. Audiovisual instruction v. 12, November 1967: 91-4.-;.16. Ridgeway, James: Fourth-neiwork. New republie, v. 155, September 17, 1966: 13-14. , Rock, Robert T., fr., et aZ. Training by televisiona study in learnincr and retention. Bronx, Fordham University. 25 p. [ED 0294991j. ClearinghQuse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Rodman, Saul. One week of educational television, niunber six. March 9-15 1970. Bloon.ington,_ Indiana, National Instructional Televi- sion Center, 1971. 41 "p. and appendices. The role of educational television in._ Appalachia:"Appalachia, v. 2, September 1968 : Rosen, Earl, and Elizabeth Whelpdale, eds. Educational. television -,.acioss- Canada; the development and state Of ETV; 1968. 5th edition. Toronto Metropolitan Educational Television Association of Toronto, 1969: 95 p. . . Rosen, Ijarold A. Satellite 4-Stem for educational teIeiision: In United 'Nations Conference on_the 'Exploration and Peaceful Uses of Outer .Space, Vienna, 1968. SpaCe explOrationS and applications. New. York, United-NationS, 1969 : 115-420. Rosenthal,- Alan: The Sesame Street generation arrives. Today's health. v: 48; Decembei 1970.142 . Ryan, P. 13,aw and the ovarcooked; cable television Aria the schools. -Media and methods, v 6, October 1969:48-F. Sandlerl, !Jerrold. Educational'ialio : the" "hidden Medium" emerges., Aidiovisual iiistitotion; v:42,'--NOVeniber 1967 : "964-967. Sanford. Fillmore H. T4.ilevision in, hL,Ther education; psycholoag;e, a specinlrepbrt 'from :the Wationta: Center for.. Saloo?." ,and Co, ecre '9.BloOinington; f§68. 15 /3:1ED 023 3151 Satellites to "sertr&Worldrt"OMMIUtltf-n* needs. IJXESCO -&,1)4-'9463:6-;; -c v. 16; FebruarY 1.1470 : 53-=5,9 . .. . 65S61-71-6 77 e". 72 Schramm, Wilbur. Communication satellitesfor education, culture. (Reportsand paperson mass communication,science and York, UNESC0,1968.29p. [ED 018 133]. 53). New The effects of and papers television on childrenand adolescents.(Reports on mass communication,43). (2nd impr.). 54p. Paris, UNESCO,1969. Instructional televisionaround the world.Journal of experimental educationv. 37, Fall 1968: 89-94. InstructionL Association of Educationaltelevisionpromise andopportunity. National New educational Broadcasters, 1967.24p. [ED 019 848]. media in action;case studies for planners Amsterdam, UNESCO, 1967.175 p. L Satellites foreducation with educational : lessons from a decadeof experience television. ./rt UnitedNations Conference Exploration and PeacefulUses of Outer Space, on the exploration andapplications. New Vienna, 1968. Space 121-126. York, UnitedNations, 1969: Social and educationalimplications of School and society,v. 94. October 29,1966communication satellites. Schramm, Wilbur, awl : 346-348. Lyle Nelson.Communication satellitesfor education and developmentthecase of India. Vol. Two. University, CaliforniaInstitute for Stanford 274 p. [Er, 032 766]. Communication Research,1968. Schramm. Wilbur, JackLyle, and Edwin B. lives al our children.Stanford, Parker. Television inthe Press, 1961.324p. California, StanfordUniversity Schramm, Wilbur, et aZ.Educational televisionin El Salvador. on hungez, v. 4, November 1970: 8-12. War Schwartz, Elizabeth. The TV studioas a teaching medium.Audio- --demi instruction,v. 14, November 1969: 60-62. Schwartz, Louis, and RobertA. Woods. FCC,CATV, ETV. and Speech

Summary,. , of closed circuit television. activities in. medical-education- LondOn University,'Associationfor the Study. otfaedicalEducation ,;incl. the Tnstitutepf Education, InterunlyersitylksearchAlnit, 1967;,-. z 18 P.' [ED 031918]: . Swallow,:. Norman.- . ,Factual,television. New Tork.,..Iiastings iTouse;- COminaniCation Arts Boaksi'19.06: 22.8p- TY.. 2nd the-Arts. SatUrdik . The- TV generation._ revieW-y4:5.2,- .44-11 26, 1960: 19+. Changingti.mes;v22, Jill-y:1968: 4foiirth network"-comes- into its own. U.S.news and world report, OctOber 12,1970,: 45. TV"s svPitPlEid-gn sc.46.-OL , Iciewthweek; June 1., 49,70:-68-71.. - Task Force on FinancingPublic PrOadcasting,4eport. [Washington] ..77ze Task Force, 1967:40 p... - Teaelyirik the Yiability-of Viideo: Time, October . Tebbel, John.- Children's 20, 1967: 50.. TN; European style.Saturday review,v. 50,- - February 11, 1967: 70.+. ,' Television: a bibliographsy ^ of serecied Randpublications. Santa Xonica, -Californir,;:qandCorp., lan.. 9p. TeleviSion andeducation, a -biNiography.New York, Television , -formation Office;.1960. 9 p...[ED 014672]. In- The "televiskor fiasco";. interview Nith- FredW.--Friendly:::TVau-: ?-thority.-1j.S.-news and-_ wbrld report, -June Television fora higher 12, 1967:: technicaleducation' Of theemployed a firstre- port on. a pilot project inPoland:- -(Reports -comMunicationi 55) Paris, --13NES60,1969.--and::::_papers inmass Television in instruction 49 p. [ED 032 503]. := what is 'ipoSsibre:-.. Washington;National .AsSoeiation-ofEdueatiOnal Broadcasters,'1970,-24 [ED 042 349]: Thiertr; =Pierre: Audioz-iisuareducation in -I,Yori Coast soCiety, v:98,_Nove-niber1970:'4:24426. S=t,Ooy and - Theinpson,- Glenn W..Children7s AcCeptanfi," 4, ancl: the relation Of television. ad.vertising teleyiewing to scho.i..,./.chieveinerifThe jOurnal of eiluCational. rise:arc-13,v. 58,=Dedetaber :171z174: Thompson, John F.,e.t. al. Evaluation _of --E'yersitr .exiension--ydutii educational teleilsioii. uni: Of Agricultural and-'Life-S-Cienereic -1976;15: IEPPA-A.O.P1="- ThOrP, BruceE FCCmoves towaid dëcionon rules vital to aTy industry National JO:Uri-324;v 3", Janflary Tierney; Joan D . The miracleon $.00.2a#0Street2,..,"?hi DeltaKaPpan, v. 52,1aniark19771-:.-296:268.- , : :- Toyn, Thomas David.-A study2,Of thfeasibility -7of a -strnetional telgiiSioniroduction" faèilityfor fitlier -c,en-t,r0.117-ed-education in- in- stitutionsin Vtah. Provo,BrighaM Yotng University, -Departinent of Commumcations,-1969.114. [ED 033 Trout, R3ith 'this district-4ra-)3,-.S.Pgi.me.Street,:,-it'§-4iangmg;-the school :lirocirani in firotablY'' too:-er'' hOol 197X-19+ ThxbL David.:'-imaii---04-n'ETV EducatiOnal te-ChnOl. 2_2). .0g3r7."7-- _7 f,'"` ,s - ' Tsp.pIsao..,:Tht;effect. ,of r1W.schoOl-,,broadcaSt -on childrenin:isolated --villages: TdPaii','STIIK-Ita' ResearCIJnstitute, 1961. 21 p. [ED 014 216]. - Tyler, .I.Keith. Television 'for world b./Ida:standing; Washington, Na- - tional Eduaiti6nAssociation,-1970. 80 p. - Ulrich, Roger E. A behavioral vie* of Sesame Street. EduCational broadcasting review; v. 4; October.1970: 17-22. 'United Nations Educational, Scientific. and Cultural Organization. `Cominunication in the sPace age; theuse of satellites by the mass media. Paris, UNESCO, 1968. 200 p_ , -United' Planning Organiza:tion.- A national denionStration project, utilizing 'televised materials for the formal education of culturallY disadvantaged preschool children. Washington, The Organization, 1966:45. U.S. Congre8s. House.: C on-mit-teeon Interior and Insular Aff airs. Policies, programs; and activitids of the Department: of, the Interior, part VI. Hearing. 91st Congress, 1.gt-"ie:S-§-. Waaington, U.S. Govt. -Print. Off.1969. 68 p. Hearings held May 19, A.13ril 28, 1969, (Dis- cusses the use of edudational television in Samoa). U.S. Congrets..House. Cominittee on, Interstate and- Foreign Com- merce. Educational television and radio amendments of 1969. Hear- ings before the Subcoramittde on Communications and Power. 91st Co aress,Ist sess. Wagiington U.S. *Govt. Print. Off., 1969. Hear-

, ings eld jiine. and. 19, 1969. 315 p. = . , Exten _assistan e for public broadcasting and CoipOration :for Public Broadcasting.; report toac- - company-- HR. _7737.- 9,1st congtess,, lst sess. Washington, U.S. 'rGaDV-t- p:(1.-teport 917-466).. Thiblic Television A:ct.:of 1967. Hearings held ,on H.R....6736, -S. 1160,and ,H.R.4146, 9.0th Congreia- 1st sess. Wash- iiagton; U.S. Govt. Print. 1967. Hiarings-held5July 11, .12, 13, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20; and 21, 1967. 804 p. CATV,1969.' HearingS before the Subconmittee On. Commtiiications, and Power. 91st Congress, 1st ses. 'WashingtoiTT.K'GOirt. 'Print', Off., 1971. Hearings held May197-23, 1960. Sinate. Cthrinditea,on Comme-rce.:Contixthed financing for the :06iporition for Public; Broadcasting. Hearings befare, the COm- mumcations Subcommittee; 91st -Cchigrds§, 2nd sess. Washington,

Gtevt; Print. Off.71970. Hearings held April 1 and:2 1970. ,89p. .ogid§s'idPort OnSpace, coMmunications. Hear- intis before thd .SUbcoinfnittee on Communioations- -89th Congress, .2nd sess: Off:,1966. Hearings held -Ant:* 10.; 17, 18 and 231966: .24515_ ' The Public TelOision ,ACt -of 19.67.Hearings COMinunications -on...S. 1160. 90th Con- (tress, ist.segs, Washi-rgton,, :Goit: -Print: Off.; 190.'Hearings -tdlai.Aiaril-11:- 12 ,21-3; :14;r5;2.6. '2f and 1961. 696 .;p: U.S. Federal Covartmications Coniáion. EduoitionalltdlevisiOn. 'W on' Th-e-ColiimiSkai, 1966. 15. p. :(INF 162-B T. U.S; NAtion,cceCommiBsion.07, th,e-CaUsee-Icind Preventioii .(11:Yiolence. -06famikion gatisineni: televiiionentertthinnelit.pror .-.)f&ce of Ethwation. The needs of education for television channel allocations. Washington,. U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1962. 181 p. and maps. 76 The use of closed circuittelevision in technical education.;"report -of the European Seminar (Seraing,Belgium, Apri11965). Strasbourg,. Council of Europe, 1966.94.p. [ED 020 656]. The use of mass media in theeduCation of adults: conference. Lusaka,. Zambia., 1965. 131p. [ED-024 881]. , Van Houte, R. Siitellite TV. Toda.y'sedUcation, v. 59/November 1970 :- Verrill, Charles O., jr. CATV'semerging. role : cablecasteror common carrier2 Law and contemporary problemSv 34 Summer1969 : 586-609. Tiamonte, Daniel, jr. Anintroductory study of thestatus and the- trends of radio and televisionactivity.in accredited two-year institutions in the 'United States,1969. 468 p:'[ED 034 524] (A.nnArbor,. Uniiersity M.icrofilms, Inc.). :Video boy. nine, January26, 1968: 54-55. WGBH Educational. Foundation.The ITV, Humanities Project;a history of five experimentalprograms fOr instructiOnal television.. Boston, The Foundation, [1968].144 p. Wade,- Serena E. The effectof, different:television utilization_proce- dures on student_ learning. Finalreport. San- Jose, Santa Clara County Office Of EduCation; 1968:42 p; [ED 081 958]; Wagner, Richard V., et al. A study'of systematic resistancei tOutiliza- tion of ITV in public schoolsystems. Vol. I. Washington, Aineri- can -University, 1969. 214p. [ED 030 011]. A 'study of systemie resiStancesitoutilization* of .LT Vin public school, systems: Vol. IL.',Casestudie4 WaShington, American:L-7th- versitv. 1969. 233p. [ED 030 012].- . Walsh, lienis. J". 'Sesame Street'and the ""76's: queslions fora proto- Lype: Villa.ge voice, v. 15-, March32, 1970 27+: Wedell, E. G.., and H. D. Perraton.Teaching at a distance;an ap7 praisal of the co-ordinatedteaching of '0" level: phjrsicS lisilig television, correspondence andspecial aids.- London,_ National"institute of Adult Education,1968. -67 13: [ED 021 199]. Virginia. M. Tele-TESOLin Puerto Rico for the primary grades. Paper given -at, theThird Annual .TESOLCon.yention,

"cago,Illinois,169. 12p:[ED 029 278]: _ WeiMore; Warren C. AirborneTV studied. by...emerging nations. Aviation week and Space technology,v. 88, January 8, 1968: 37+. White, Clifford Eugene. Acase study,: American literature as taught on televisiOn in-Detroit -Public'SChOols from 1957to 1963-1964. 415,, p. IED- 033 '9621. --(AnnArbor,--trniverd*Microfilms,..,T33.4.),. White- Karvey cOnstractioit; ancreialnatioil-.6f Meaia for 'teaching highschool anddlinior-Ttfeollege science via television _for use in self -instruCtion. -.FinaErepo,t., Berkeley,,California-Vni- verSity; 1967: 47-p. [ED 019-873]: _ White, John F. ETV":no longer the gray professor. I,:.FCamagazine,

v. 31 Winter19667-1967 :227262 , . , - Public .; ,teleViSion -EduCationil iper- spedtives;'4,/, October1968,:1722. . Who'S- afraid.Of b-act TV?. TiMe,V. :.96, NoVeinber 23;1970 : 60+. Who's afraid of CATV? :New YorklaWfOrmn, Spring1970: 1877231. Wigren, Harold E. ETV via satellites ? NEA journal,v. 55, October

1966 : - Using instructional TV. Washington National Education Association, Department of Elementary-kindergarten-Nursery Education. 6 p. [ED 031 944]. Wigren, Harold E.,et al.A survey of instructional closed-circuit television 1967. Waihingtoiii, National:EducationAssociation, 1967.- 203 p. [ED 016 394]. Williams, Nina,et al.ITV-Iiroward Coiinty, Florida.' Los -...4'.ngeles Acolyte Publications, Inc., 1969.6 p: [ED 027760]. Wisconsin educational televithonsystem. Madison, Wisconsin -Co- ordinating Connell" for Higher Education,1967. 2-1 ,p. [ED ,.027 730]. Witherspoon JOhn.P. New communications'technology and its relationship toinstruction. Paper' preparedfor the Feasibility Study of Inter-Institutional Television,University of Minnesota, 1966..

26 p. [ED "022 379]. _ Wittich, Walter..What ETV research has taught.-Nation's schools, v., 76, September-October 1965:45-65. Wittich, Walter,etal. Audio-visual educationa televisedcourse,of instruction: Revised edition. Madison, Wisconsin-University, 1961. [ED 016 382]. Witty, Paul A. The electronic piedpiperenemy or ally of reading.. Education, v. 87, September 1966: 42-47. Studies of mass media, 1949-1965. Science education,v. 50, -March1966:119-126. Wood, Donald N. The three facesof television. Educational perspectives, v. 7, October 1968 3-9.- 1 WoodWard,JOlm' C. Attitude and.achievement -comparisons for direct and television classes in biologicalscience. Coral Gables, Miami Unifersity, 1964. 8,P. (ED 641 9361.. ; Worsnop,- Richard L. Cable, teleVisiOn;the coming median'. [Wash-

ington]. Editorial -reSearchreports, -v. 2, no., 10, 1970 : 669-686. _ Financing of educational TV..[Washington]. Editorial re-

search reports. V. 1,no. 9, 1967- : 163-479. *- Wylie, Donald G. Needed: a .new,image for ITV. Audiovisual instruc- ' tion, v. 16. May 1971: Young, Ruth. Television in the livesof our parents. Journal of broadcasting, v. 14; Winter 1969-70: 37-46. -Zaitz Anthon_v W. The historz'of educational television-1932-1958.- M;dison,Wisconsin _University, _1960. 373p. [ED 016 919]. Zigerell, JaMes-J: _Chicago's TVcollege. AAUP bulletin, V. 53, Spring 1967: 49-54. ' - _ Televised instruction: where do-wego- from-here ? Educational -technolooy, v. 9 September 1969: 72-16.

- _POIIII7711S,AIsTEt TROGitliatED -INSTRUCTION ,The, Aa Hcie-Comnii:tteeon COMionfei.S. m S'econairY Schools- Van- -confer, 73ritiskCOlinnbia University,'1968..05 p:,.[ED 038 0,111. -A fePort- of the 1969 introductorYand advinced ,L-1,stitutes-_ in programed instruction and instructional_Systeins fdr teacherS of -the 83 78

deaf: Las- *Crudes; NetV MexioS* State Uniirersity; SOlithwestRe-

gional Center for the Deaf, 1969..49p. [ED, 034 344]: _ A stirdy in the 'tisOif pro-gran:tined matheniatics miterial atninth grade Dickinson-Public Schools, N. Dakota, InstructionalMedia Center, 1967. 50 p. [ED 036 424]. Abbott, Michael L. The smalleOmputeiand-an admiSsions infOrmatiOn 'Systera. AEDS journal,v. 4, Deceniber 1970 : 37-45. Adams, E. N. Computer based instruction andmanagement in foreign languake teachinz, a systeMS concept. YorktownHeights, International Business Machines Cory., _1969. 22p. [EI) 034 978]. ang- -Jai:deg -Bailey: Computers:are for Iddsnot for geniuses. School managethent,v. 15, Apii11971 : 26-28. Allen, William H. Visual,. and- audio presentationin machine pro- .7-gramed'instruction: FinalrePort-Lbs.Ankeles,University of.South-

' California, 1967. 229 pt [ED 616 400]. . AlPert, D., and D. L.Bitzer. AdvaneeS in coMputer based education. Science v. 167, March20,1970 :1582-15901 AlspaUgh, -Jan W. UtilizatiOn cOMputing and data processing in education. Clearing house,v., 43; Apri11969: 455-457- American Aisociation of .School Administrators.EDP and the school administrator. Washington, The Association, 1967.76 Anderson, G.:Ernest, jr, EDPmoves into the 70's after a decade of gains. Nation'S schoolS,v. 85, April 1970: 118+. Anolerson Gordon, V., et al. The deirelopment-of a student accounting Final'report. Austitt, UniversitYof Texas, 1966. 88. p. [ED 011 048], _ Andeietin,`Iienneth E.et "al. The Imeridan twO-year college in transi- tibn. Lawrence,. Sansas Uniyersiti, 'SchoOlOf Echication; 1969. 31 p. 'TED 028 758]. _ . - - Annett, Jan, .and 'John Duke.ProCeedings of a seminar, on.computer based learning: systems.. Universityof Leeds. London NatiOnal CoUncil for. Education Technology, 1970.1_97p. [ED- 040 586]. Archambault, Franeis -jr.-A coMputeriied approach to- scoring verbal responses to the Torrance:Tests ofCreativellainking. Boston University, 1970: 11 p. [ED 038 6731. . -- Armstrong, William Harrell. An` experimental investigationof the,instructional effectiveness of pUblUed programedinstruction mate- srials vs. individualized' instruCtion inarea vocational-technical schools. 1967. 141 p. [ED 040 277], (Ann Arbor,University 3fiero7 v.,. W. CoMputers on'the caMpas:.aSurveY Otcon?puter-`activities - in the liberal artS:college;Joiirnal Of highereducation,36, Decem-- ber 1965.: 500-506: 4Association for EdneatiOnalData SYSteniS,A criticallook at educational data processing. Selected ProceedingS.'Workshop#1. Wash- ington, The .Association,).967. 73.p. An litrOdiletion tO ediieationar data' ProCeSsing.Selected pro- ceed-hal,. Workship,..#3 -Washington, T1uAssociataorv- 1967: 91 p. ASsOciation of 4inenca4,Gedgraphel* ComiaiSsionon. College -Geocr- raphy.- Comtinter 'asisted.nistructionin _geography. -Washuv. ton, -The ASsociation;-1909±63.:p. ll and the learning Pioc- ess. American psychologist, v. 23, 1968 :225-239. The role of the computer in teaching initial reading Childhood- ' 'education, V: 44, March 1968: 464+. At:Irincin, Richard C., and Duncan N. Hansen. Computer-assisted initruction in initial reading: the Stanford. Project. Reading -research, quarterly, -v. 2,1966 : 5-25. Atkinson, Richard C., and-Paul torton, fr.- Computer-based instruction in spelling: in inVestigation of optiMal strategies. for present- ing instructional material. Final report.- Stanford -University,:in=, 'stitate for Mathematical Studies in Social Science; 1969-,28 p. '[ED 032 781]. ,.. ., .. . - Atkinson, Richard C., and .4: A. PaulsOn..An approach to the psy- cholog7 of linstraction. Stanford ,University, .Institute for Mathe- matia1 Studies in SoCial Science, 1970. 38 p. [ED 045 549]. Atkinson,-.Richard C., and Patrick Suppes;,A.n automated primar5r-- grade reading:and arithmetic curricUlum ;for( culturally ,deprived children. *Final_ report. Stanford University, 1968.-:211 p. [ED 023

. P.rogram in-computer-assisted instruction. Finn] report.Stan= ford Uniyersity, 1968. 95 ii.-[ED 026:873]. . . Project for an automated -.primary-grade reading and.-an-th- metie curriculum for cultarally7deprived--children. Progress-report number 5, July 1 to DeceMber .31, 1966. Stanford Univeisity,1967.- 20 p..[ED 014 506]. ... r- 7: , Atkinson., Richard C.; -cind'it.A:r*BsOn.-Computer-assisteci..itsiruc- tion. Science, v-.-162,-October 44;-1968 Alkinson, Ricliard C.,- and M Wilion, as. Computer Assisted instruction:: a book of readings. New York, Academic, Press, 1969. ,362,p. : -,r. Audio utiiization conventions and techniques-for computer assisted in- AL action. Fort Monmouth, US-Army :Signal-Center andSchool; 1970. 48 p. [ED 638 027]. A . Austwick,;$. Teacilin 0- machines and programminv-New York, Mac4 Toillan1964:205 p.,_. . Baker, Frank B. Computer-based" instructional,Management-systems : a first loOk,..Re-siieT -ofedUcational research,-v.- 41, -February;1971: - ---7 , .--- Balson;MI--The_eftectilienefis -,ofrii.rograMmed Jearning in 'promoting transfer in a trainin-o- sitUation. F'rogrammed- learning ..Ind edaca- ,_.tionaltechnology,.v.4-..faly49691159-163, likings, -EL...Kendrick,- et. al: Cutheular implicationsof ,automated data procesSing -for 'edUcational inStittitions. Final-report.Boulder;Cob- rdotniersiiy,i968. 397:pi [-ED 030 711]: , . Wohn;-,Oir2S444 1?Pi W3ijl-i4he ;60132Putr-- New scienhs, v. 447 Barnes'; Marjorie R. "An: ei.perinientiti:stadYka_f_the-mse ofprogrammed iiboratorY, g#Per. Pre= ,instXudzion- ineeting.4-4he.Xitional -Asiociation,for ReL search iii Sèience Teiclini;Ifnineapolis,"1470. 17,pi[ED 041 726]. arnes,-.O.,,D.._kcomfiuterossist,ed.in.struction.:ann.otated:bibliography.7 -.:M.16011?ingts3/.1;h1- Derfaz'XiPPai-; Bariutia, Riehard, et 4liniOvative-koieeticiteign-languitie",teaching. Final report. Irvine; CalifOriiiaUniversity, 1969. 30 p. [ED 032 808]. Bardch, Rhoda. Computer-assistectSystemsin'guidance and education: report of an invitationalconferenee on the ---tice-and education implications for the.prac- of. Counselors. FinalrepOrt. 'Cambridge,'Harvard sUniversitY, GraduateSchool of EduCation,1969. 70 p. [ED 040 598]. Bassler, Otto C.Comparison of two school mathematics. _teaching techniqUes ;inelementary Final report. Nashville,.George Peabody Col- lege for Teachers,1968.'53 p. [ED_ 023 595]. Beeker, James W.It can't replace the -v. 48, January 1967: 237-239: teacheryei. PhiDelta Kappan, Run computerrun : a critique. Paper presencedfor the Confer- ence on Information Technologyand Secondary Education; Har- varct Philadelphia.Research for Better [ED-031 081]. Schools, Inc., '1968. 45p. 'Toward automatedlearning. A professional sented at annual meeting paper. Paper Pre-- of .American EducationalResearch Asso- -dation. Philadelphia,Research for Better [ED 036 154]. Schools, Inc., 1968. 12p. Behavior principlesstructural model bfa Follow Tnrough program; Dayton. Ohio: model programs. Childhood the White House education. Prepared for Conference on'aildren. Palo'Alto, American In- stitutes for Research,1970.16P. [ED 045 783]. Belasco,7 -here is programmed language instructionmost effective ? Paper presented at theKentucky ForeignLanguage Conference, Lexington-,- 1969. 16p. '[ED 030852]. Bell. Norman, andRobert D. Moon. Teacher . siited instruction. controlled coinputerss- East Lansing, MichiganState University, 1969-- 27 p.: [ED 044 028].- Bell, Ralph R. Use ofcomputers in junior collegeinstructional systems, 1968. 27-p. [ED 019055]. Bender Eric The otherLind of teachin January1965 : 48-55- a Harper's micrazine, -Bender, Martin L. Avoluntary prekindergartenlanguacre 'development and readingprogram for the entire four-year-olepopulation of a city (an investigationof niachine-tauirht reading).Final report: -Mount Vernon (N.Y.)Public Schbols;19-68. 77P. TED 020 8551: Benjamin C. Willis.Educational Services, Inc. Dataprocessing in-the areat cities. Chicago,Research Cbuncil of the GreatCities, 1967. Bergquist, Robert. Computerschedulin g. educationalreform. Using S-1-=-the" -Stanford schoolschediding system: 'Stanfoi;dUni- versity, School PlanningLab. "[ED018 960]. " Berkeley, E. C. Romance ofgood teaching "and th'e- time sharedcorn-- Lputer: Computers and antomatiOn;v. 14; Septembeiri965. Berkell, Arthur. Computerizedclassroom. New y lishing CorP4 1968; LED 023 2751'i Berman, Mark L. Some considerationsinthe edildition of indigenons frreilips inthe'Sonth-Weit; SantaMOnicacISystempeVelopment Corp., 387-1. iitAii*eiPerinientarteSaf &list gra:deread= Tingtt,stpewriter progsa.:_ni:Ta'perPiiientectitthe NatiOnalBea onferenc;e;Atid_rttal-1961S:1013.....rgp037 , _ 4-* 81 Bibliography of materials ipublished about theEdison Responsive Environment Learning- System.; the "talking tyRewriter. New York, Responsive Environment Corp., 1968. 8' p.[ED 028 648] Bijou, Sidney W., et al. Programmed instruction as anapproach to the, teaching of reading, writing and arithmetic toretarded children. 1968. 19 p. [ED 019 191]. Bitzer,- D. Design aspects ofcomputer/basededucation. Journal of engineering education, v'. 59, February-1969: 482-481. Bitzer, D., and D. Skaperdas. The design of aneconomically..viable large-scale computer based education system.Urbana, Illinois Uni- versity, Computer-Based Education Laboratory,1969. 39 p. [ED 042 625]. -- Blitzer, D., et a. The Plato system and scienceeducation. Paper:presented at the Conference on Computers inUndergraduate Science Education, Chicag;o, 1970. Urbana, IllinoisUniversity, Computer- BaSed Education Laboratory. 27 p. [ED 042621]: Bitzer, Maryann .D., and Martha C. Boudreaux.Using a computer to teach nursino-, Hillsdale, N.J., NursingPublications, 1969. 19 p. [ED 044 905]. Black, Joseph. Computers for education; report of aworking party -into the potential applications and development of computerbased. learning systems. London National Council for EducationalTech- nology, 1969.43 p. [ED046 590]. Blaschke,. Charles L. Computers in education:interesting, but how relevant? Educational teclmology, v. 9,:May 1969:24-28. Blum, Ronald, ed. Computer-base& physics: ananthology. College Park, Commission on College Physics,Maryland University 1969. 205 p. [ED-034,395]. Bockman, John F. Evaluation of a -project:independent foreign languacee study by selected eighth graders at TownsendJunior Eligh Sch.00filsing programmed materials, Tucson Public Schools, 1969. 53 -p. [ED 033 632]. BOhd, Nicholas A., fr.; and Joseph). W.Rigney.,Specification of training objectives for computer-aided instruction.Los Angeks, Uni- versity of Southern California, Department ofPsycholoay 1970. 39 p. [ED 043 2211. Bork, A. M. Computers and.the non-science major.American journal of physics, v. 34, October 1966 926-930: Bork, A. M., et al. Introductory computer-basedmechanics; a one week sample course. College Park, ComMission onCollege Physics, Mary- land University, 1968. 8'T p. [ED-029 516]. Borton, Terry. -What's left when, school'sforgotten? Saturday re- iiew, v 53;Apri118;1970: 69 -hi' Bowen, Ezra. The computei as a tutor:Life magazine, January 2'T, _1967": 68 7.1-. - . . Braddock,.Clayton. Computer fits --teachinto.; to-individual student Southern, education report, v. 3, JanuaryrFebraary1968::- 25-29. Breton, LUcien,Progratomed FrencIff.an.experiment.Taper presented at the:23rd..UniversitylofKent-ilekfFoeigir-Lanig-aage-Conference 197-01-. Lexington,- Kentucky UniVerbity, 4-p.[ED .046_ 82 Brief history of COmpnter-aisisted- initructionat the Inititute for Mathematical Studies in the Social Science.Stanford University, The Institute; 1968: 7 p.IED 034 420]. Briggs, L. J., ciad D. A.ngell.-COmparisons ofprogronied instruction with conventional -methods-Review- Ofeducational research; v. 34, June 1964: 355-360. - Brightman, Richard W. The Computer andthe junior collige curriculum. Washington, : American --Asiociation-'of Junior -College§, 1970. 42p: "ED 045.07g1 Project-. CATX0P. Final repOrt. Costa Mesa, CoastCorn- ñiunity College District,-1970. 341-p.. [ED 046 373]. Brooks,loyd O. Researchon response mode and feedback characteristics in autoinated instrUction. Final repoit. PiloAlto American Institutes. for 'Research, 1969. 11.p. [ED 044 033]. (National Tech- nical Information Service). Brown, George IL.; et DeVelopment and evaluation ofa self-instructional Sppzugh course:Alexandria, HunaanResources Research'

!Organization,-1970. 81 P. [ED 044 996]. _ Brudner, Harvey J. Computer-managedinstruction. Science, 'v. 162, November 29 1968: 970-976: Rryan;_elenn. L. Computers and-education..CompUters and automi-

tidn, ir.18, March 169ii _ Buck, Geor.cre C., and Lisa Powell. APplication-lindproblems of pro- ed.anStruction.. atthe college level. -Tokyo, Keio. University,. enter for the Science ofLearning;1967.- 6 pj 024016]. BundY;Robert-F.:Ccmputer-aSsisted instructionwhereare We Phi Deltaiappan. v. 49, April 1968: 344-348. Bung, Klaus. Programmed instruction for-develoPing--'tiountries. -Paper read At,:the .-Seniinar "Programnied-an'strudionfor De: -veloping COuntiiest" Vienna; 1969. 32P: [ED042 147]. - Burr, Heleir G.. iticl Jean C:-Erizifi.--Thedevelopment and evaluation of an automated instructionalprogram in speeCh Correction. Final report. eliarlottesV-Ble, University. of Virginia,1967. 55 p. [ED 018 ' D.--The automation of school infOrmation systems. Mon- ozraph I. Washington, Department of Audiovisual Instruction, Nitional Educational_Association,' 19'64...134 p. . Computer-mediated -instruction-4 :survey ofnew *develop- anents. Com.-puters'and authmation,v. 42-March 1965.: 18-21. rodtkin.g cthetdocile teChnologynniaemoriain of CAI. Wash- ington, Academy for EthicationaP Development,-Inc.-. One-of the esupport piPeisfor4..To:ImProire Learning;la repOrt to the, President_ and the Congress of the -United StatesbY the COmmiSsion on In- Tstructional {-ED,039103].- The role of the computer in fiture instructionalsystemS. Wash- .-53*- ton, rDePaifment-tof Aidi ialInuction,NatiönaI. Schwa- tiOn-ASsociation4963?"10.0:,.i. "E;;r,,r`. .Don,D4 and: atWAUen, ed.K The. coMputer ii Ameri, -,'...,can.-educktiOn.:.-Newirorkcjanf:-Wilipylancl,Sons;r1n64-1967': 300p- Bittlei,-.TA...I.C.4 et tai:-.PeifOrmanc.e/design- 'reiluirentiehth anct _detailed technical description for a computer-directed training subsYstem for integration into the Air Force phase II base levelsystem. Santa. tnetttseseeramftwee...... - .....parwmossaageelifr

Monica S3rstem DevelopmentCorp., 1968. 116 -p. [ED 041 014]. (National 'Technical Information Service). Butler, Cornelius F. CAI in New YorkCity; report on the first year's o erations. Ethicationaltechnology, -v. 9, October 1969: 81-87. C OS: Computer-aseisted in6truction inSpanish at Dartmouth College. Hanover DartmoiithColl1ege 1968. 38 p.[ED 025 972]. _Caffrey, John, andGliar1es J. Mosmann, Computers on-campus; a report to the President o n. their useand management. WiLs'hington, American Council on Education, 1967. 207 p. Cahow, C. IL. Computer technologyfor campus administration. American school and.university, v. 39, .October 1966: 36+.. 'Caldwell, Oliver J., and Loren R. Graham.Moscowin May 1963 ; education and- cybernetics. Wo-s.1-1-ington, ;US.Govt. Print. Off., 1964. 49-p. - Calvm, Allen a Programmed instruction;bold new venture. Bloom- ington, Indisma University Press, 1969. 250 p. Campbell, Vincent N. Self-direction andprogramed instruction for ve different typesof l objectives. Final technical report. American Institute for :Research in BehavioralSciences, 1963. 25 p. [ED. 014 875]. Camprse, James A., and Max L. Wagoner. TheABC's-of ADP.: Park Ridge, Illinois, Data Processing AiranagementAssociation, 1967. 25 p. Carbonell, Jaime R. 3fixed-initiativeman-computer instructional dialogues. Final rewrt. Cambridge, Bolt,Beranek and Newman, Inc., 1970. 217 p. [ED 040 585]. . Carnes, Phyllis E. Ak experiraentaLaudv inthe--use of programed materials for seventh-gradeopen=ended laboratory experiences. Athens, University of Georgia, 1966'. 227" p."[ED 010 -08f]. Carter, Launor- R Educationaltechnologycomputer-related and people-related.._ Santa Monica, System Development-Corp.,1969. 25-p. [ED 038,993]. - Carton, Aaron Suss. Extending thepsychOlogical theory and educational possibilities of programmed languageinstruction. Pre-publication paper, presented at the.XentuckfForeign Tiv,guage Con- ference, Lexington,. Kentuclg; 1969.-16.p.-[ED 030 .097]. Case, H. W., and. A.. Roe:Base properties of aar automatedtaaching system. Finiti 'report. Los Angeles,California Uthversity, 1964. .22p. [ED012 363]. Center for Programed Trstruction, Inc. The neeof programed in- : straction in:US. schools; -.report of a survey-,Of the use of pro- ed instructional materiab the public, schools of the United tatesrduringlheryear.1961-1962. Washington, U.S. -Govt.Print. Oft.,1963. 83p. Charp; Sylvia, aniRoger -E.!Wye..COmputer-assiStedinstruction in a large school system:. Joiiinal of educational data..processing, v. 6, Winter 1968-196.:. ,P.12ilidelphisitries cOmPuterrissisiett instOction: - 2 , -Chastiaini.-Xenitet1-3a JehaviorIstic t and _cognitive'apPrisches in cp.i:O= gramme& instritction. Papercpregentedrlat-the:23td--EiiversiV, of 89 84 Kentucky Foreign Language Conference, 'Seminaron Programined Learning, 1970. 13 p. [ED 042 379]. Chiim, William G., et al. School mathematics studygroup 'report no. 1, the programed learning project. ,Stanford University,School Mathematics Study Group, 1966. 96p. [ED 022 688]. ' Clark, Michael C. Can CAI help? The crisis ofcontent in educational psychology courses. Paper _presentedat the annual meeting of American Educational Research Association,Minneapolis; 1970. 7 p. [ED 040 948]. Clark, William H. Using programmed foreignlanguao-e courses in secondary school with specially trained teachers. Fmarreport.1968. 58-p. [ED 025 1873. Clarke, Stevens H., and Julius Surkis. A:pplication ofelectronic computer techniques to racial integrationin school systems. New York, Columbia University, 1967. 51p. [ED 018 526]. Classroom computers serve students. Nation's schools,v. 83. March 1969: 88-92. Cogen, Victor. The computer's role in education anduse with the exceptional child. Mental retardation,v. 7, Autrust 1969: 38-41. Cohen, Harold L. Educational therapy. Paper presentedat the Con- ference con Research in Psychotherapy, 1966.24 p. [ED,-022 803 J. Coleman, Thomas, and George Langberg. Anautomated and programed laboratory for instructionin die areas of speech And communication. Final report. Ossining Public Schools.Albany. New York State Education Department, 1968.,27 p. [ED 040 53"RJ. Collagan, Robert B. The construction and evaluationof a programed course m mathematics necessar3r for success in collegiate Physical science. Washington Catholic University,1968. 699_ p. [ED 043 526]. (Ann Arbor, Vni-Versity lificralms,Inc.) The construction (using multi-Media techniques)of certain modules of a programmedcourse in astronomy-space science§ for NASA personnel of the Goddard SpaceFlight Center, Greenbelt, Maryland. Baltimore, Morgan State College,1970. 8 p. [ED 042 -Commi%ion on College Physics, Ann Arbor,Michigan. The computer in physics instruction. Report of-the Conferenceon Uses of the -Computer in Undergraduate Physics Instruction,University- of California," Irvine, November 4-6, 1966. 97-p: [ED 010 764]. The computer and education. Educationaltechnbrogy, 'v:10, -March - 1970: 5-46.- :_ I -Computer assisted instructiore for- the-mentallyretarded. Providence -College, 1965: 52p. [ED 0213531i - : Computerassisted mstruotion guide. Newburyport,Massachusetts', En- telek, 1=4968. 15 p. and data bank. Computer-assistedinstruction-inigeogfaphy. Coinmission9n College Geography. Technicalpaper no. 1 _WaShington, Association', of American Geographers, 1969. 163p. [ED'033 586J. -ComputerEassistedi mstructidir (informationexchaie.: Final -report. Newburyport, MassachusettsrEntelekInc4970;43 p..EED 038,862]. .Computer-assisted-instraction: state'. oftlie athtL'(Spec7.4.leporty:-fica- ttionIssehools,*:132, Octob1968149-1-._- .r.r 90 85 Computer-assisted instruction workshopat the Naval War College.- Newbu.ryport, Maseachusetts, Entelek.,Inc., 1966, 23 p. [ED 044 909]. Computer assisted mathematicsinstruction, pilot project. Hartford, Connecticut State Departmentof Education, 1966. 35p. [ED 018 364J. The computer in education. NASSPbulletin, v. 54, February 1970: entire issue. - Computer uses in instructionalprograms. Bibliographies in education, no. 4. Ottawa, CanadianTeacher's Federation, 1969. 19 [ED 034 728]. p. Computers in education: their use and cost. Education automation monograph, no. 2. Detroit, AmericanData Processing, Inc., 1970. 99 p. [ED 042 610]. Concord, Albert E. Educationalapplications of time-sharingat the United States Naval Academy. A 3749. EDS journal, .v. 3, December 1969: Cooley, WBliam W. Computer-assistedinstruction in statistics. Tech- nical report. Paper presented.at Conference on Statistical Compu- tafion, University of-Wisconsalin,1969. Pittsburgh University, Learn- ing Research and DeveloPmentCenter, 1969.,24p. [ED 035 294]. Data processing and computing.In Encyclopedia of educational research. Fourth edition.Macmillan Co., 1969: 283-291. Cooley, William W., and RobertGlaser. The computer andindividual- ,ized instruction. Science,v. 166, October 31, 1969: 574-582. Cornelius, Edwin T., fr. Audio-lingualEnglish; a self-instructional language laboratoryprogram. New York, Macmillan Co:, 1968. T [ED 022 167]. V. Coss, Joe G., et. al. Effectivenessof automated visualprogramed instruction.with paraplegic and otherseverely handicapped students. Downey Unified School District,California, 1966. 49 839]: p. [ED 010 Cotterman, William W. Education inthe age of the computer.ATMS monitor, v. 4, December 1970 :61-67. . Coulson, John E. Automation,. electroniccomputers, and education. Phi Delta Kappair,v. 48,March 1966: 340-344. CompUter-assiited instrucdon auditspotential( for individualizing instruction. Washington, Academyfor Educational-Develop- ment, Inc. One of the supportpapers for "To Improve Lemming;a report to tlie-President and the Congress of theUnited States by the Commission olx InkructionafTechnology."1970,30 p. [ED 039 705]. Co3nputer-based iii.4ruction... Santa Monica,.Systemt Develop- ment 'Corp., 1968. 19 p. [ED 043 195].(Clearinghouse for _Federal Scientific and Teehnieallmformation).-', Progranimed' Iearning.and computer-basedinstruction. New York, John Wiley and Son4 1962;7291p: Coulson, John E.,..and 1-"LOZSgberinaRe6alisof initiatexperiment **61lical.SY:ite4Pevel9PmCnt,C9rP-7 -1-969-,w6.P.T-135ED..1 '2141:7S7 ' Fr.;:anc/ Laivien44/L-Stolurow.:-The 'useof :-computeriin Techniatl repart ifung3ef,eightCamb,ridge, Haryard ..Universiti,1968.47,Ap.. [ED . - . 86 .Crist, Robert L. Groupuse and other aspects of prograninied instruction. Final -report. Normal,Tilinois Stite UniversitY,1968.66 p. [ED 025 944]. . - Programmed instruction at-a means of establiShing,"erroileSs", learning, with kindergartenlevel children:- Final' report. Norinal, "Illinois State University,1969. 69 p. [ED 039 955]. Role of peer influence-andaspects-of group use of programMed. materials. AV communicationreview,sv. 15, Winter 1967: 423;434. Crawder, Thomas F. Teachersantomatecignide (TAG). AEDSi nal, V. 1, March 1968 Jour- : 121-131. -- Cybernetics and education: a colloquium. Cambridge, NeW England Education Data Systems, 1968. 72p. [ED 027 734]." .Cybernetics in education. WaShington.,--'Joint Publication- Research Service 1963. [ED 018 993].(Clearinghouse-RA- 'Federal- Scientific -and-TAnicalInforthation)." : DOVACK Monticello, FlOrida. Model proaranis; -childhOod education., (0E-20141). Waihington,.U.S. GovePrint.Og., 1970.11 p. -Danin, Leon. Music edudators shouldget- iiith -the' program:-Music educators journal; v.55, March1969 : 50+. Darnowsa; Ymeent: S. Three types.of programed -learning and the onventional teaching of the _nuclear Chemisti'yPortion .-of the high : sehool chemistry course. Negr York;_New York Universitk, 1968. 381 p. [ED 027 193]. '." DasenbroCk,- David, and Thomas TeateS: CATProgramsand Mabros for formative .Curriculum eittiluation. TialabAASe*-Florida State UniversitY, Dept: of 'Science EduCation; 197(1 76. [ED 646 884]. Dawson.; Kenneth E.,-and, MorrisNorfkiet.The".Computer and the student. NBA_ journal, v..-.57,February 1968: 4748. , De: Cecco; John P. Edicational teehnoloe:'-teidingi'in Jirdgramined instruction. New York-Holt; RinehartandlVinston, 19641.'470.p. De Gabrielle, Clint. CommereiatirdeLSharingfoltheclassrooM AEDS monitor, v. 8, ,July-August 1969: 107, 13._ De Graziay And1)1. L Soith, edg: Pritrarns, teaChers;and MiAiiTtes. New York, bantam Books, 1964809 Robert-F. The .use and 4eVelOpiiienf of1prograrnedMaterials and media in private- liberals'artS. c011eites.Detroit, Oreat takes College Asi-oCiation, 1966.-372 PJED 017 262, Ned:7-C Deirelcrpraeiif (and: Of in- ::: structioi in-inStrumental nitisie: Final report: 'University' _Park, -.Pen/iSylyaini State Vniversi. _P. [ED '038-314]: Deroii, Floyd G. A. field test ofco nte'viSsisted mLi. utionin first grade mathematics Educational leadership: v..E3, Noveniber 1970: 170 +1" Desch, S. H., and L. M. Stiiiiniiiii,TPiqect'--TWPSProgrss "rePort -2: Cambridge Harvard TiniKei-gitY4 00:4051# e--

tion Laboratory, 1970. 32,P:{ED042--,155].-..:.,:._ : Ofbiim-)uteicaikgetgict trainiiifSub'siSteM opekatke F,OrCe;pliase ILbase evel system. Final_Xteport.; Santa. MoniCii.':Sigtie.tinDetieliiii14014 TED- 0742:32Th Tect41117&16.- " tifie 'tin& TieMiircal The development of a computeitiodel foi2 iojectineitaterWide'c011ege enrollments: a preliminary study. Troy,RensselaerResearch Corp., 1968. 87 p. [ED 032 842]. 92 "Mtr.ScrztoXtectsignasoasstomoomen....

'87 DevelOPments in programnied teaching iii, the USSR. Washington, Joint.Publication Research Service, 1963. [ED 018,997]. (Clearing- hon." fOr Federal Scientific and TechnicalInformation) Diamond, Jaines J. A report on Project GROW: Philadelphia'sex- .Periniental program in computer assisted instruction: Philadelphia School District, Office of Research' and Evaluation, 1969. 68 p. [ED 035 272]. Diamond, Robert M. -A programed biolo,v laboratory for the non- science major. Fredonia,,State University of New York, College 'at Fredonia, 1968. 49 p. [ED 023 307]. _Dick, Walter. An oyerview of computer-assisted instruction for, adult -educators. Paper presented tothe National Institute for Adult Basic Education, North Carolina Uniyersity, Raleigh, 1969. Tallahassee, Florida State University, Computer-Assisted Instruction Center, -1969. 2743.. [ED 033 611]. The implenientation Of :CAI at Florida State;University. Tal- lahaasee, Florid.a I, State University, :Con.iputer-Assisted Instruction Center, 1969. 21 P.. [ED 033 -578].. (Charinghouse for Federal Scien- tific and Technical Information.). -Dick, Walter,- and-IlaymOnd_Litta. Coniparatiye effects of ability and presentation Made in comPuter7assisted. instruction and programmed instractibn: Tallahassee,, -Florida State University, Computer-As- : sisted: Instruction Center,- 1969.18 p. [ED 043 189]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and TeChnical Information). Dick, Walter, et .al. Development of a model for adaptive training via Coinputer:assieted instruction -.utilizing regression analysis tech- -niques., Tallahassee,: Florida:-State University, Computer-Assisted

InstriletioliCenter,_1970.; 59. p. [ED 0411485]. , DolyatoySlffi, V.A. and Sotnilroy..Some principles of learning ; and learning With the- aid of rmachines:Wright Patterson AFB, Foreign Teclmology Division: (Edited translation of "Ivinastiya Vysshikh- Uchebnykh Zavedenii.7 Elektromekhanika -(USSR) ). 1967. 15 [ED 035 2851. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and

Technical Information). _ 13Orn, W., and j.2Edwards.. Finding the best .solution via computer. -.>Journal of educational dati-processing v. -6; Spring 1969 :. 90-107. Diciyer, T. A: Teacher-studenf authored cb usmg the NEW=BASIC/ .-CATALYST SYSTEM.. Pittsburgh University; 1970. 21 p. [ED

:EDY-WithOUt EDP equipinent. SchOol management, v. 15, April-1971: Easley, J. A., jr, A,:project to develop, and -evaluate a computerized syStem' for.instrUctional response -analysis; Project SIRA. Final

. repOrt.. --Urbana, UniversitY,_ Computer-Based Education Laboratory, 1968. 49 p. [ED 027 751]. . I EdUcatiOn. U.S.A. Computers news era .-:for education?. Education U.S.-A...special report.: Washington,-:National School Public Rela- tions Associationr,-1968. ; _Edwardfs,; ,Zudithr:B.,',CoMputer Anitruction pi_suming and .13ractice. ----7.',P.orilancl;: -Oregon; 1Torthwe,.* Regional Educational Laboratory, 1969:133 p. [ED -011 455]. 7 ! Ehlers, Walter H. Computer-assisted instruction in social work. Tal- lahassee, Florida State _University,, Computer-Assisted Instrue- G5S61.-71-7 88 tion Center, 1969. 17p. [ED. 033 58,0]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and TechniCat inforthation):. Eisele, Jamei:E: Thee CompUteras a tool for curriculum deirelopment and instructionalmana0einent: -Paper'presented it the -anniial)Con- .vention,of the Anieriean EchiCationarReSearch-AssO'Ciation,'Minne- apolis, '1.970. Athens; GebrgiaThiiVersitY, :College of -EdUCation,

1970. 20p. [ED 040 575]. _ Eisele James E.,et al.Computer assisted planning of curriculumand instruction; how tO use computer-based 'resource -Units to'incliNid- Ualize instructiOn. Englewood Cliffs;N.tL, Educatibnal Technology Publications, 1971. 130. p. ' . Eldred, Donald M.,et.d2.The u§e 'of progra:rdedinstn,tetion withdis- tithed students, June I, 1964 through-MaY;- 1965. Second progress report. 1966. 70 p. [11.0 011 161]. . Electronic teaching -aids: What's here ? what's ahead ?(Special, report). Nation's schools, v. 7,8, October, 1966: 69+. Alired. Computers in teacher education.Paper 'presented at the annual Meeting ofthe American Educational,Research Association, MinneaPolis; 1970. 13p. [ED- 040 946]. Problems of applying compUtertechnology to teacher educadon. Ethicational, technology,v. 10, NoveMber 1970 : 35=39. English as a second language forthe culturally depressed childrenat Rogers School, Leflore CoUnty, Mississippi.Research monograph. Little Rock. South Central RegionalEducation Lab. Corp-, 1969. 20 p. [ED 033 368]. Eshleman, Winston Hull. A comparisonof programed instruction with conventional methods for teaching'two units of eighth grade science. Tuc-son, Arizona ITniirersity, 1967. 194 p.., [ED 023 593 Estarellas, Juan. A psycholinguisticmo.del for second language learning : new prospects for Drograinmedinstruction. Paper presented at 10th International Coigress of Ling-UiStics,Bucharest, 1967. 8 p. [ED 038 892]. Eysenek, H. J.' Th.e teachingmachine and the revolution in education. Encounter, v..26, May 1966: 7-13. . Fanning, Robert, J. New York City's.use of piogrammed instruction, with -emphasis on reading Paperpresented at the convention of the National' -Society for Programed. InStructiOn, ."Philadelphia; 1965. IED 05-1011... _ Progiainmed instruction"- project.--Annual report, ,1964465. Brooklyn, ,New York City Board. ofEducation. 75 p. [ED 0151.651 Annual- retiort, 1965-66: BrOoklYn, Nevi YorkCity Board of Education. [ED 015 652],.. . ;Fails; Rita M. A. reporton: the utilization of:the computerprogram rIQUERY by the ERICCleafmghousebni.Teacher Education. Wash- ington, ERIC 'Clearitighouse,-±n..- Teacher Education, 1970.- 35p. [ED 045 589]. - Feasibility of. doinputer-:assisted 'eleinentarykeyboard music instruction: Finir report. Sys4M-Development Corp.; Wichita Public Schools, .Kans., 197-0472 [ED 038 039].- Fedrick, :Robert;J: Third :generation'Coniliuter curricUlum' and teaChing f methods- at El Candinct-College; Califortha, 1968. 38p. [ED 019 059]. . 89 Feingold,SamuelL. CAI systeiris j-- present,( nd futi&e: Santh Monica; SySteniDeirelopinent COrp.,1-970. 915. [ED042'329j. :(Clear- inghouse for Federal Scientific and,Technical:InfOrMation)... 'ejfar;;James:7117.Aisttidy-.of the uSe,of -certain soCiaPreinforceis computeriissistedingtruction_ 015 Feldhusen, John. A position paper Oh CAX:researcli'andfde:velotiment. . Series II. Stanford; ERIC- Clearinghouse- On Educational- Media aid Technology, 1970:-31p Feidhus6it, 'John; and Michael,Szatoi-4 -reyieN, -of developments in computer assisted: instrtiction. -EdneatiOnal technology, v..9, APril 1969 : 3249: - -Felahnseni4Ohn,: et," ca The right kind of prograMMed instrUctiOn for the.gifte&NSPI )ot-trim:4,v: .8; March1969-: 641; '.. Feldman; Da-cid 1;t:-PrOgrammdelearning and -CoiAputer-aSsisted in- --stiuCtion- in foreign laiVtiageS...Fullerton; Calif-el-ma State College, TItejit:. .af Linguistics, 1970: 83 p: tED 640 .3.791:, Chuan. C. Computer related MathematicS aiid science curriculum materialsa -National Science Foundation CooperatiVe' Colleg,e- i-- School Science- Program, in' coMputing -science edlication. iaouler Valley Scho-01 District -and Jefferson COunty, School District, Colo- rano, 196'r236 p: [ED.022 COMputer-assistederiterion-referenced testing, -working paper 49. Pittsburgh University, Learning Research and- Deirelopment Center, 1969..18 p: [ED 040 061]: ' The development, 'imillementation;- ana evalUation of a computer-assisted branched test for a:program of individually prescribed instruction: Pittsburgh University; School of:Ethication, 1969. 141 P:..[ED 034 406].-7- -.Ferguson; Richard L. A model 'for coniputer=assisted criterion-refer- -enced Measureinent.. Educition; 1, Sepreniber-Oetober 1970 : 25-31. . -Farzeig, Wallace. CoMputer systems for teaeliiiT cOmplex concepts. Cambridge, Bolt, Beranek and Newn-..(in, Inc.-1,1969.-;183 p. [ED '035 275]. (Clearinghouse for-Federal-Scientific and Technical Informa- . tion).! ;- at'-ft2. allangli_idei as a conceptual frameworkfOr teaching mathematies. alreart ontheffiStfi.fteen 'months 'Of the-LOGO Project. Cambridge, Bolt,- Beranek and Neiv- man; bic.;4169: 329"p:1ED:038 1::"7" SIMON: a simple institietional inonitor:Technicar:report. --eambri4e;-, Bolt;!Beranek -andNewinap.., In1970: '32 p [ED 043 239] Fiks, A.I. Foreign. 1ii*ilage.f.prOgfaMMeiUmaterialszY.1969. ERIC -Focui Reportz-on the Teaciring. of Foreigth.Language's, 1969.-10 p. [ED 031 983]. ; .. -Final ; reportrSD-265-t- Project TACT:- Bedford-JMess:;' Aie Foree, Electronic Systems Division, 1968. 41 p. [ED 034; 414].- (Clea.ring- .rscl'h'ouse--"foirFedeiarScientifiemnd TechniCaT Infonnationj..7 Fincher, Cameron. Of students,.prOleWöit,mn&conitputeth;Schoor and soeiety, v. 95;Marelr4;1967:: I44,-148:re; ;: B.-Teich-h.-1g madhines- NeivXork; SterlingPtiblishingeCo:,:1962. 176 p. 747 7519 ,;;;- 5 90 Finn, J.D., and D.G.Perrin. Teaching. machinesand progrpmmed learning; * Survey pf theindustry, 19,62. ,Washington; S. Govt. Print. Off.,1962.- 85p:% Elizabeth erane,,,et al.-Massedyersus_distributedpractice in COMputerized.,-spelling- drills.Washington,. Ameritlan Psychological Association, 1968. 7p. [ED 039-222]. . . *Fitzgibbon, N.H.; arid J.H.Grate: CAI: where dowe go from here? Elementary English,V. 47, Noiember 1970 : 917-921. Fletcher,, John, and R,C.Atlanson.Computer-basectinstruction in .reading: grades K.-TS.Papertpresented at the International.Reading Aisociatioii Conference, Anaheim,1970. 29 p. [ED 040 827]..' Flynn, John MbEffects ofunit size'and contentupon.programmed instruction and prediction oflearner success.,Final report,Ft.Lauder- -dale,-,Nova Vniversity, 1969.185 p.[ED 039 782]. , Foltz, Charles. The -world _ of teachi;.91. machines, _;rogramedlearn- ing and self-instructional .devices.,-,aslaington,,lectroinc Teach- : ing Laboratories; 1961.- [ED 019890].. ;, ; FOrd,, John 13.,ii..,and,DeweirA. Slough. Development_ and:evalua- of compuier assisted instructionfor Navy electronics training. _r1. Alternating current fundamentals.'San-Diego; Naval.Personnel Research Activity, Navy TrainingResearch Lab., 197.0. 38p. [ED :042 9501: (Clearinghouse for FederalScientifie.and Technical In- loiniation) . - ., Forsythe, Allan L., and Mrs. PhilipStansbury. A thgrader meets. -a computer: The-independent school bulletin,v., 30, May 1971 : 51- Fradkin, S. L...Experiment in applicationof methods of programmed instruction. Wright Patterson .A.FB, ForeignTechnology Division (Edited-_-machine translation. of ;".SredneeSpetsialnoe Abrazovanie -.-(ussR):.), 1967. 14--p: [ED .035 286].(Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Fxeeman,__William.F., Computer support ofinstruction-at _the US. Arity Infantry tSchool.-Educationaltechnology, =v. 9, September

(Trainingtechnology supplement). _ Friesen, J. D. Computer based systemsin &guidance and counseling. 'An annotated bibliograthy; Vancouver BritishColumbia- trniver- _ sity, razalty of Education, -1970. 24-p., [ED046 .006]. Fry. Edward..-,How_ effectiire. is, programedinstruction in teaclaing of reading? Paper presented fit-InternationalReading Association .:,ConferencécBaston,;1968. 14 p._[ED,026 219]; Programined..initructionc- and_ automation in beginningreading. Paper presented at the International ReadingAssociation An- nnal Conyeaticin, Seattle,1967. 29-p. .[ED 012 680]. . Teachingmachinei- and. Programmed instructionan introduction. New York, McGraw-1E11 Bo-0k Co., 1963.2 4 I Frye; charles-FETTsink:cofapiiteriloibistruction.Impact, y. 4, Win- -ter 1069:21-26: Filler,,R.BuckminsfeeEdncition antoniation. CarbOndale; Southern Pressi,1962:'88_p_ . Functional analysis and preliniina:ry _specificationsJor a single-.in- -"-. tegrated Centril'iompitter',sYste-irlof secondary-schoois"and junior colleges. Interim report, 1968. 14p. [ED 024 846] . r:p96 Furno; Orlando 'F., et,- al. -A: threeyear ej-_p!3rimental study of theeffectiveness of programmed instruction in mathematics. Finalre-. it:Baltimore- Citi Schools, 1970156 [ED .037: 090]: Gallagher, Tames J .; ed. Computer-baied vOCationtiltuidance systems. Papers presented at Symposium .for Systems under Development

1-for:Vocational Guidance; Palo Alto; 1969:178 [ED:031 '108]. . Gamble;!-Rondal: R. Clinical teaching -with '-Coniputer aids. -The 'Bar- - tiesville SYStem:-..BartleSville Pitble Schools; 'Stillwater,cOklahoma

State University, 1969:20 p: [ED 033.376]. . Garner; W. Lee. ProgTanied 'instruction. New 'York,- Center for* Ap-' -plied -Research in Education, 1966, 118 p.-- . Gay, Lorraine R An inVestigation into the differential 'effectiveness 'for nialei and lemales;. of 'three CAT' treatments on -delayed reten- ..tion- of matheniatiCal coneeptsj Tallahassee; FlOrida :State Univer- sity, ComPfiterASsiStid Iñsfruction -3Center;1969. 49p. TED- 031 -!' Geiger, H. Bruce. Effectiveness inlearningWewton's Second 'Law of Motion in secondary school physics using three MethOdS of: learn- . E.ing:-Philadelphia; Temple.17]:tiversity; 1968.51531i,, 095];- Geis,' George. L. Three! innovative teacirin als3ritems 'common- Sources of effectiveness. TeaChers 'College record:v. 71, February, 1970 : 379- - -389: : 97., .` ,' r . , Geis, George L., and Susan Nielsen.:Answ6i observing in--programmed instruction-==IL- The effect of. incentive on, student performancewith- in and after programthed' instruction: 'Aim Arbor;.11Pchigan-Uni-

. irersity;1967: 22 p. TED 015f6541., -` Geisert,- Paul. =A comparisOn of- the effects of information" mapped learnmIg materials -and traditional inaterials.on -the learning -a; con- -, cePts.via- the-printed-page and coMpUter cathode-rafy tube:- Tallahas2 -see; -Florida : State'rniversitv:.- Computer-Athisted Intruction- Cen- ter. 1970. 85. p. [ED. 046 253]. (National Technical Inform-nation '.;;-.. Gentile, J. Ronald. The, fifst :generatiOn of conijiuterassis.ted in-strue- tiontil'systemS': an4valiftitive re-66W:- AV comrnunicatiiiii review, v.' -15; Spring1967:-23=53.:: ' Gerard. Computers and education:- New YOrk, McGraw- -Hilt 1961- : .f , - Gerard;.: R. W.-Shaping the inind--comPuters EdUca-: .7tiOnal ecienCei=an.mternational -journal, v.,- 2:7February 1968 : 119- 121. Gerard, R1-W-4 and J. G. Miller:Computers and universities. (A work- 'shop, conference-presented b-cr the 'University of CO.ifornia, with thecOoperation of:thetniVersity, of Michigan, NeWport Beach, NoVember 8=12,,-1965). Irvine,. -University 'of ("IalifOrnia, 1967. 501 .[ED 010 5411:- 1 Gilbert, William. The :use Of the bin/miter for testing,- programthing and instruction, 1966. 11 D. [ED 015 0981. Gilman, David. A conaparison-otsevetal feedback methods- for correcting errors by' computer-assisted` instruction., PaPer_presented at American -:..P4ChOlogical: AsSoCiation:_ineetink,'-San'TrancisCO: '1968: 19 p. [ED 024 287]. A comptaison: of the effectiVenesS of feedbaCk iniides- for teach? ing science =concepts -by .means of a! CompUter-assisted adjUnct auto- 92: _., instruction :program.: :University yaa PennsylvaniaiState.r.niver-

,4.tsi&;49-6t-1-7.9,P, CR732624'591 ?11;- '". ? ; itobe-rt. TAgineyr ',pedagogy.: .Pittsburgh-,71:TniversitY-;;Of_ Pitts- burah LearningRes-earch;andDevelopment Center 1R65..29,p {ED! -.Principles and-problems, in the ,--PreParation.ofqiracriainnied learning sequenbes:Pittsburah7University, 1960. 4,7.p: [ED:014 895].- Olaser,. -Robert',_eck:Teacliingl:machines..:abd programed learnimg Washinaton, Naiional Education:Association,' 1965:-.,8t1 p.. . Glaser,;Roberti a7t.c/ Mazy lAuiSe MarinO...,,A.,basic 4:eferende shelf.on 'prograined instruction. Series:I.: Stanford,.:ERIG. elearinghouse .. on-Educational-Media and Technologyy4968.,p.: Waser,:Robert, et al: Program:plan,and,budget request.- Vol: I,scope _ Of:work andprojeeted.actiVities,"Pittsburgh.UniverSity, Learning -Researeh -and Development sCenter,-1969.fED-034-318].- -; Programmed instruction in theintact classroom. Pittsbnigh ';.-rErniTersitY,-.14e4rning-Resehrcl and DevelopthentCenter,- 1963..:49 _114:4E,D 014,8771 - Studieg of the, 11S8. of prOgraittedinstruetion in the eliiisroom. 72. Pittsburgh, ;University.;of Pittsburgk Learning Researchand 'De: .velopment Center; 1966..-194 -p:,.1[ED 010 2081- Gleason, Gerald. Will programmedinstruction serve people? Ethica- -tional: leaderShip; -v.-23,March1966 :471-479. . Goddard; W.Computer:technology-for the.Whole"sehool..--Journal of edtcational data. 'processing,/V:- 6,- Spring 1969z 108-120. Goldbeck, Robert A., et al.Integrating:prograinined instrtietion with conventional classroomteaciling. American .Thstitute for Research in BehaVioral Seiences,-1962. 118 p:. [ED 0171.68]. Goodlad; John John 'F. O'Toole, jr., and LouiseL. Tyler. Com- puters and informationsystems in education. New York, Harcourt, 1966. 152 p. Goodman, Edith Harwith, ed.Automated education handbook. De- troit, Automated EducationCenter, 1965. 1 V.' Goodman, Walter, and ThoinasF.-Gould. Nekv York State-conference on instructional uses of the computer.Final r6port. Yorktown .Heights, N.Y., Center forDemonstration ofCoinputer Aided In-, struction and Other EducationalMedia, 1968. 36 [ED ,035 291]. Gordon, John M.- The effectivenessof, four variations Of pfogramed ..,science materialast,I; 0;, IVlichit,van- State UniversitY, 1967. 40 p. [ED 016 608]. Gothn,.Lassat a -Programed instruction.asa strategy for'det-eloping- curricula for children from:disadvantagedbackgrounds. New York University, School:of Education,1967-29 p. [ED 0151821. Gotkin, Lassar,G.,.andJoseph.MeSweeney. The developmentof a beginning readino. sbillsprogram usina the Edison responsiveen- ,vironments- instrument.Second.,progress report; 1966. 31.-p:. [ED- 013 720]. : Green, Edward J. The learningprocess mad programed instruction. .New York, Holt,I,Rinehart:and-Winston, 1962,, 228,p. Greenwood, Frank-MinimizingEDP headaehes..4 'PDSjournal,..y. 4, December 1970 i.4V-5-1.' - Gregory., .Thomas computer .program..for :calculations coefficient 'Of .ot Scott's :reliability Austin ,Texas ...University- Re- 3.8 93 . .t search and Development1 cdenterjor,TeachenEducation,,1969:10`.p. [ED 045 730]."' , : -.: Griffith, Janet D. Restilts :of ihe'-iurvey of the Rise of Trogramed for:. eign anaguage:sinstruction ,encan-111Luyersiti.,eg.i- .Clearmghouse report. Waskington,-.Center for Applied Linguistits, CleaTiughogs "fOr Self-Instructional Language Materials, 1965. 20- p.-{ED 025,989]. Griffith, Larry A. A time-sharing audio visual device. Report ,on 2,roj- ect THEMIS.- Hanover- Dartmoilth C011e'ire, '1969 67 p -[ED 041 015]: - Grossman, Alvin, and Rbbeit HoWe. Data processing for educators.

, , Chicago, EducationalMethods;Xn6;1965.. , 362 p.4 , Giiggenhenh, Fred, et ca. The evaluation,of programed spelling Final report to the Commissioner of Education for the State of New York. Brooklyn, New York City Board. Of, Education, Bureau of Curricu- hun Research, 1964. 124 p. [ElY 043 618]. . , Gunter, Evelyn. Prooramed learning. Report of conference con- ducted by the State _Departmentof Education as part of the Oregon program. Salem,. Oregon State Department of - Education, 1964. Haga, Enoch, ed. Autbmated educational systems. Elmhurst, Illinois, Business Press, 1967. 343 p. Hagerty Nancy K..Development and implementation Of a. computer- managed instruction-system in graduate training. Technical report., no. 11. Tallahassee, Florida State University, -Computer-Assisted Instruction Center, 1970. 182 p. [ED 042 351). Hall, J. Computers m education. New York. Peroamon Press, 1962. 122 p. , Hall, Keith A., et al. Inservice Mathematics education via computer- asisted instruction for elementary school teachers in Appalachia. Final report. Paper presented at the annual meeting of the Depart- ment of-Audio-Visual Instruction, National Education Association, Detroit, 1970. UniversitY Park; Pennsylvatha State_University, CoMputer-Assisted Instruction Laboratory, 1970. 80 p. [ED 042 Hallivorth, H. J. A computer system for a facUlty Of education. Ot- tawa, Canadian Council for. Research in Education, 1969. 6: p. [ED J.; dt..A compUter.agsisted vocatiOnalcounseling system. 'Paper presented at the Canadian ,Council for-Research in Ed- ucation. Ottawa. Alberta, Calgary University; The CounciI, 1970. Hanablen, John W. Inventory Of-dom_Puteitr.s. .eduCation, , 1966-67: utilization and related 'degree PrOgrath-s:IVagiington, -u.s._ GOvt. 'PrintOff., r Rbbert 0., treiniet 'FT) AL7ali eialiation of proirrammedI, mstrUction. San Riegg. ,city C011ege. 1967. 18 p. [ED 013 619]. . Hammel, D. G. Flexible teachhtg methods for CAI ,,iyiteins. Austin,- Texag ZlectiOni--Researeh Center499. 10:p- [EP 043 190]. (CleaiinghoUse -fOr :Federal; Scientiff6 and. Technipaili Information). - -ammona, ...s.enneth:Coinputer tria)pliies" 'to learning:Science v. 172, May 28, 1971 : 903-908. 94

Hanauer, S. L.Computer-assisted instruction inthe pronunciation of -,Ifoi-eign:.languages.. Tokyo UniversitY,Re-sarcli"Instituteon Logo- pedics and Phoniatrics,1970. 7 p. [ED 044 701]. Handy;11.-*W4 HelenGibbs,dnd jolin C. Bell: The .:'=cation. WaShington, coniputer in edu- Educational:Service B-nreitt7 Inc''71970. 142 p. Hankin,-.Edirard-tIC,et' al: The' development ofpre-vocational educa- ticid literaey:. courses'for use with coraputer-assistedinstruction of diWadvantaged- youths ;and adults. Final report.Tallahassee, -Florida State -University;1967. 179 p: [ED 024 763]. Technical progress report.Tallahassee, Florida State University,1966. 5 p. [ED.015 230]. Hansen, Burdette P.The -coinPuter' in. education. V. -45,-Deceniberi.1970,:195--200. Clearing, house, Hansen; Duncan Isr-.Cnrrent issues in CAI.Tallahassee., Florida State University, COhiPuter-Assisted 033 579]. (Clearinghouse Instruction Center, 1969. 17p. [ED for. Federal .Scientificand.Technical Information):I.(' "- Tallahassee, Florida' StateUniversity, Computer-As- sisted Instruction: Center,1970. 39 p. TED -038 863]. The role of computers ineducation during the 70's.Tallahassee, Florida State 'University,Computer-Assisted Instruction 1970. 20 p. [ED 043 2381: Center, Hansen, Duncan N., andWalter Dick. Memory factorsin computer- controlled raaintenancelraihing.Final report. Noy. 1967-Nov.1968. Tallahassee, Florida' StateUnrversitY, Coinputer-AssistedInstruc- tion Center, 1969. 44:p.,[ED 036 745]. (Clearinghousefor Federal Scientific and TechnicalInforthation). Hansen, Duncan N. andWilliam L. Harvey. Impactof CAI on classroom teachers. Tallahassee, FloridaState University, Computer- Assisted InstructionCenter, 1969. 9p. [ED 034 4011. Hansen'. Duncan IC, et al. A gradeto running- a studY in thecomputer- °assisted instrri6tion--center. Tallahassee: Florida State-University, Computer-ASsiitediEnstilietion Center,'1969- 16 p. [ED 034 3941. :Annual progiess rePort.January 1, 1969 throughDecember 31, 1969. CAI Center, FloridaState University. Tallahassee,Florida State rniVersity,1970.55 [ED 041,416]... - Computer assisted instructioncenter. Semiannualprogress report; July 1, 1967 thronghDecember 31, 1967. Reportno. 6. 7Tallithassee, Florida State 'University,Institute of HumanLearn- ing: 1968:239-i):: [ED032751]. Eias`ting CAI currictiluin'-materialsat the FSU-CAICenter. TallahasseeFlorida State University,Computer-Assisted Instruc- ..iiiii'Oenter4970.:29p. [p D-0,11486]./ ;., . -Ilfinnan--cOmputer i-nterctiOnsitilvoltvedin :analysis Of CAI data.. CAI Systemsmemo no. 6. TallahaSsee, Florida State Uthvrsity Cou-Oyter-Assiited- Instruction'Center, 1970. 24p. [ED 043 227]. -(ClearinghOuse forFederal Scientificand Technieal Information). . , Harnion,- Leon:D.; -rar'd Kennah'C; KnOwlion.'Picture iirocessing by'

comrit&-Scleilce; v-:164,-**14:47 1969:, 19==.9- ilivens, Robert I. The cOmpiiterin educational research andits implications for the counselor. Paperpresented. at the. American Per- . '95 sonhel and Guidance Associatión Convention, Dallas,arch ,23, 1967. 10 p., [ED 011 672]. Hawithis, Sue. Guidelines for inservice training:The'Bartlesville system. Bartlesville Public Schools, and Oklahoma State University (Stillwater), 1969. 1513. [ED 029328]. Hedl, John Joseph, jr. A systematic investigation of three facets of programmed instruction : tutorial assistance of stud , explanation of -incorrect answers, and the spacing of high-h culty framee. Technical reportno. 4. Tallahassee, Florida State University, Institute of Human Learning: [ED 032 785]. Heimer, Ralph T., ed. Computer-assisted instruction and the teaching; of mathematics. Proceedings of a National Conference on Compu- ter-Assisted Instruction. Washington, National Council of Teach- ers of Mathematics, Inc., 1969. 153 p. -[ED 030592]. Hernandez, Ivan, and David Alan Gilman. A comparison of the effectiveness of several feedback modes for correcting errors in computer- assisted instruction. Terre Haute, Indiana State University, School of Education, 1969. 13 p. [ED 042 604]. Hess, Robert D., et: al. The computer as a socializing agent : some soci- oaffective outcomes of CAI. Stanford University, Stanford Center for Research and Development in Teaching, 1970.2141 p. [ED 044 Hickey, Albert E. Computer-assisted instruction : a survey Of-the literature. Third edition. Newburypdrt, Massachusetts, Entelek, Inc., 1968. 99 p. and reference& . Instructional strategies appropriated to computer-assisted instruction. Proceedings of a conference held October 2940, 1968, at Washington,,D.C: Newburyport; Massachusetts, Entelek, Inc., 1968. 28 p. [ED 044 908]. Bruce L. Will the computer Lill education ? Educational fdrum, v. 34, March 1970 ; 307-312. Hill, J. R The preparation otprogyains for the Edison Responsive Environrdent. Prog-rainmed learning and educational technology, v. 7, October 1970 : 288-299. :$1-James, and Ralr Sedrel. The computer and the junior. college. Washington, American Association of Junior Colleges, 1969. 39p. [EI) 034-528]. Hobson, Edward Newton. Empirical development of a computer man- . aged instruction syetem for the Florida State University, model for the preparation of elementary school teachers. Tallahassee; Florida .State University, Computer-Assieted Instruction :Center, 1970.145 p. [ED.011 456]. Holland, Wade B. -Soviet cybernetics review, v. 3,- no. 11. Santa Mon- lea, Rand Corp., 1969. 125 ip. [ED 042 323]. (Clearinghouee for Fed- -eral Seientific and Technical Information). s Holtzman; Wayne H., ed; Computer-assisted instruction, testing,-and -guidance:New York; Harper and. Row, 1970. 402 p. -Holtzmaii Waynell: New dimensione.fOr psychology in education. Piper presented at symposium on "Psychotechnology and it's irn- ,1 pact- on socieW" 1970, 1980," American Psy.e.hological Aisociation, Miami Beach. Austion, Texts University,- 1970. 10 p. [ED 045 707]. f; 101 96 How computers are changing, education. Schoolmanaaement v. 14, October 1970 : 13-17. e) How students are taught to think.. Audiovisual instruction-v. 13, November 1968: 949-951. 7 How to train on the job; a proarammed instruction course for hospital supervisors. New. York, Agerican ManagementAssociation, 1969. 123 p. [ED 037 608]. HoWell. John J., and Max Weiner. Behavioraland attitudinal responses of college students toward .computer-assisted instruction. Paper presented at annual meeting Of American EducationalRe- search Association, MinneapoliS, 1970. City University ofNew York, Division of Teacher Education. 12p. [ED 041 4513. Howell, John M. A feasibility study in efficientinstructional use of digital computers. Los &ngeles City Schools,1961. 81 p. [ED 010 949]. Huaaett, Geoffrey, et. al. Computer-aidedtechnical training using electronic equipments on-line with the CAIsystem. Los Ang,eles, Uni- versity of Southern California, 1968.41 p. [ED 035 2821. (Clearing- house for Federal Scientific and TechnicalInformation). Hughes, J. L., ed. Programmed learning: a critiaal evaluation. London,

Pitman, 1967. 238p. - Hunt, Earl B. Possible applications ofcomputer orientated problem solving methods to mathematics education.Inglewood, Southwest Regional Educational Lab.; 1R68.1.31p. [ED029 785]. Impellitteri; "Joseph T. The cOMputeras an aid to instruction and guidance in the school. Ithaca, State Universityof New York, 1967. 22 p. [ED 020 5293. The development and evaluation. of-a ppot computer-assisted occupational guidance prograiii:Final'report and appendixes A-E. 1968. 555 p. [ED 029 095]. Information systemS in the State of Minnesota1970-1980. Baltimore, Sheppard and -Enoch Pratt Hospital, 1Q70.209 p. [ED 045 166]. Ishida, Haruhisa, and Shigeo Furukawa. SCRIPTER: a programming lanauage for computer-based programmed instruction. Tokyo Universiiii, ResearchInstitute on Logopedics and Phoniatrics, 1970. 5p. [ED 044 706]. - Israel, Benjamin J. Responsive environmentproaram, Brooklyn, N.Y report of the first fullyear of operatiov: the talking typewriter. Brooklyn,. New York CityBoard of Education, 1968. 213p. [ED 02Z742}- ' Sikccess -grows _in Brooklyn. -Audiovisualinstruction, v. 14, Decemier 1969: 41-42. _Israeb Benjamin J.,;_ctnd Zelda Litwin.. Responsiveenvironniental pro- Brooklyn-, N',Y,,Sept .10E--June1969:,the tallang.typewriter. Final report. Brooklym, lew-YOrkCity Board of Education; ResponsiveEnvironment-Program Center, 1969.91 p. [ED 036 087]. (U.S. Department-of Commerce, Institutefar Applied-Technolo.gy). Iverson; J. 31. Time7shared7comikting:"and IEDS pur- nal; V:. 1, Ju.Tte49158 :467-181. . .. . E..Thd,role -of ivniputers in. teaching: Kingston,Ontario, . Queens'Universit3ry1068-p-p.;: ..t, f," 97 Jacobson, Milton D.,andMary Ann MacDougall. Computerized model program structure and learning difficulty. Washington, American Psychological Association, 1969,_ convention proceedings : 675-76.

[ED 040 006]. = Jamison, Di; P. 'Suppes,andC. Butler. Estimated costs of computer assisted instruCtion for Compensatory education in urban areas. EduCational technology, v. 10, September 1970 : 49-57. Jeffs, George A.,andDavid L. Jesser. The effect of programed instruction on the self-acceptance of thigh school students. Nevada, Western States Small Schools Project, 965. 92 p. [ED 011 208]. Jensen, Alton P.,andVladimir SlameCka. The laboratory for information and computer science. Atlanta, Georgia Institute of Technology, School of Information Sciences, 196842 ix [ED 033 042]. Jerman, Max. Computers, instruction and the curriculum. Educa- tional technolou, v. 10, May 1970 : 53-56. Promising developments in computer assisted instruction. Edu- cational technology, v. 9, August 1969: 10-18. Johnson, Kirk A.,et al.Comparison of conventional and programmed instruction in teaching communications procedures. San Deigo, Naval Personnel Research Activity, 1967. [ED 014 660]. (Clearing- house for Federal Scientific and Technical Information, AD-656- 894). Johnson, M. Clemens. Educational uses of the computer : an introduction. Chicago, Rand McNally, 1971. 239 p. Johnson, Roger L. The use of proarammed learning and computer- based instruction techniques to tach eleetrical engineering network analysis. Urbana, Illinois University, 1966. 85 p. [ED 021 459]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Joint Committee on Pi-og,rammed: Instruction and Teaching Machines. Recommendations for reporting the effectiveness of programmed instruction materials.'Wa...ington, Division of Audiovisual Instruc- tion, National Education Association, 1966. 35 p. Jones, Richard A. Innovative developments at Bakersfield College. 196t 42 p. [ED 011 458]. --.- Judd, Wilson A. The development of an on-line laboratory for CAI and, behavioral research (1964-1968). Technical report. Pittsburgh University, Learning Researchrand. Development Center. :969. 149 1)- [ED 042 368]- Kaimann, Richard A.,andRobert W. Marker,eds.Educational data processing; new, airnensions and prospects. lioston, Houghton, 1967. Janne; J',.-}L 04g=the new' demonolgy. Datamation,v. 14, September , 1968 38-40: Kantaseiseivii, Niphon,andDavid R. McClay. Experiments in the use of programed.materialsin teaching an'elenientary-colleae course in the biological scienCes. Teacher education -researchiseries, v. 5, 11°---1-f,ErniveX*tyfrg4rIc/Yelvailia State..17Piversity, 1961, E.E.D.P18,406.1..i-.., - Tcatz,31Can.ccislputer§-iiurnie guidanCo .decisiOni fOr,stndents?-Col- r4ege review, v. 72, Srnnmei 1969.: 1,3717 - .1'..41,!4.7414V5TY

9.8 rliaufman.,.:Maurice. Sullivan program.medreading at Burgess ele- . mentary school,- Sturbridge,Massachusetts...Boston,. Massachusetts State -Departmentof Education, 1968. 56p. [ED 028 9081.: 'Kay, Harry, Bernard Dodd,and Max Sime. Teaching machine's and . pxogramed instruction. Baltimcxe,1:)enguin Books, 1968. 173 p. .Kelly;-,Tohn R. Portuguese and thecomputer : '4-ma bossa nova." Paper Presented at the meeting of the LinguisticSociety of America. Chi- cago; 1969.15 p. [ED 016 296]. Kemeny, John -G., and Thomas E.Kurtz. Dartmouth time-sharing. Science. v. 162.Oetober 11, 1968223-228. Kenney, James 13., and R. RobertRentz. Automation and control of public school instructional records.Itasca, Illinois; F. .E. Peacock -l'Ublishers, 1970. 108p. Planning for an EDP systeLSchool:managenient;v. 14, Oc- tober 1970: 13±.. Kerr. Eugene G.,, and Harold F. ,Rahmlow.Computer-assisted math inecniction in :small schools. Audiovisuftlinstruction v. 14. Febru- ary 1969 24-26. Keske, Eldora E. The effect of social^ reinfOreement"with programmed an n-programmed mstruction .in, In-service. . -indepea dent study ; by newly employed university extension staff. Paper presented at the Adult Education Research Conference,Minneapolis, 1970. 14 p. [ED 036 7521. "Kimball. DY-rel IL School buses routed by-EDP. School management, 4 v. 15. April1971 : 14-16. -Kindred. J. Computer augmented learning. Santa Barbara.Cantor- -, niai-TEMPO, 'General Eleotric Company, 1966.24p; (66 TMP-55). King. F. J:, et, aZ. EffectiveneiS of tivoways of teaching, grammar to students of different ilii:F.ty patterns Final r6pOrt.. Tallahassee, Floridd- State Uni*ersity.-1969. -77 p: rED041 896] : Kingston; -Albeit 'J.; and -James A. Wash. Programedinstruction.

1965. 8 D.-[ED 010 -9821 . Knutson, Jack- M,.74 RObert R. Prochnow:- Computer- assistedin- struetion foriiocational rehabilitation of the Mentally retarded. Aus- tin. Texas University, College of Education, 1970. 54'p. [ED044 kopstein, Felix. CoMputerS and ifistruCtionat HumRRO. Educational technology, v:9. July 1969 :-25-28. . Why _CAI must fail ! Educational technology.v. 10; March .-1970 51_53. . , . -Kopstein, Felix,- anMobereJ.' Seidel. The Computeras adaptive instructional decision maker. Paper. presen.ted. at _.the. International SvnipoSinin-off Man=:Machifie .SYStetai-( L rIOT), ca.P.bridge, Eng:tam-I. .1970.. Alexandria, Va. T;iuman Resour,ces1..e:seairch Or- 'gaiiiiation;'1910: 17P. [ED 041 450]. '.' Kowitz: (VT. Tiger in the curriculum Edueational loruni,v 35, Noveinber1970:55-63:' KriewalL ThbrolaS E.-'AtiplicatioriS. Of info/illation: the-Ory'and acceptance sampling principles to the management_of -matheinatiCs in- Striletion, part 1 MadiSo/V WIsconsin Universay, 'Research ant: Development Center '-fOr "Cogniffie:-Learning, -1969. 191j 43: [ED 038 306]. i-Ta II 104 99 Applications of information theory and acceptance sampling principles to the management of mathematics instruction, part 2. Madison, Wisconsin Umversity, Research and Development Center for Cognitive Learning, 1969. 121 p. [ED 038 307]. . Kriewall, Thomas- E., awl Edward Hirsch. The development and' interpretation of criterion-referenced tests. Paper presented at the annual meeting of the American Educational Research Association, Los Angeles, 1969. Madison, Wisconsin University, Research and Development Center for Cognitive Learning, 1970. 26 p. [ED 042 815]. Kromhout, 0. M., et al. Conference on computers in undergraduate science education: a computer-assisted and managed course in physical sciences. Tallahassee, Florida State University, Computer- Assisted Instruction Center, 1970. 21 p. [ED 046 240]. (National Technical Information Service) Kulik V..T. Group 'studies with the use of iprogrammed texts. Wash- ington, Joint Publication Service, 1961. [ED 018 995]. Kuno, Susumu._Computer aids to language learning. Cambridge, Mass., Language Research Foundation, 1970: 31 p. [ED 043 025 j. Kurtz, Thomas E. Demonstration and experimentation in computer training and use in secondary schools, activities and accomplish- ments of the, first year. Hanover, Dartmouth College; N.H., Riewit Computation Center, 1968. 81 p. [ED 027 225]. Lambert, Nadine M., et al. Anecdotal processing to promote the learning.experience. Stress of school project report. Berkeley, California University, 1970: 41 p. [ED 042 203]. Lands., L. N. The cybernetic approach to educational theory. Wash- ington, Joint Publication Service, 1963.-[ED 018 994]. Programmed instruction in the Soviet Union. Educational technology, v. 10, July 1970 : 39-15. Lange, Phil, C., ed.-Programmed instruction. The sixty-sixth yearbook of the National Society for the Study of Education ; part IL Chi- cago, The Society, 1967.- 334 p. +. Lange, Phil C., and Desmond P. Wedberg. The feasibility of programed learning for developing countries. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, Apri11970 : 65-67: Lanham, Frank W., et at. A pilot project in progrrammed learning to extend the purposes and increase factors of motivation. Ann Arbor, Nfichigan University, School of. Educadon, 1963. 90 p. [ED 016

039].- - _ Learning takes on computer assisted instruction. American school and university. V. 41, April 1969: 30+. Lebedev, P. D. Computers for education. Washington, Joint Publica- tion Research Service, 1963. [ED 018 992]. (Clearinghouse for Fed- eral Scientific snd Tezhnical Information). Lee, Billy Eugene. The design for utilizing programed instruction for pre-school children. Biloxi, Municipal Separate School District. 22 p. [ED 019 870]. Leedham, J., and D. UnWin. Programmed learning: in the schools. London, Longmans, 1965.140 p. Leherissey, -Barbara, L., et al. Effects of memory support on state anxiety-and performance icomputer-aiSisted learmng. CAI Cen- . . 105 109

ter., Tech. Memo. no. 20. Paper presented. at theAmerican Educa- tional Research Association convention;Minneapolis, 1970. Wash- ington, TAe Association; Tallahassee, FloridaState Association, 1970. 20 p. [ED 042 206]: Leith, G. O. M. Second thoughtson programmed learning : developments in the ideas and applications of programming,including computer based learning. London, National Councilfor Educational Technology, 1969. 16 p. [ED 041 463]. Lekan, Helen A:. Index to computer assistedinstruction. Milwaukee, Wisconsin University, Instructional Media Lab.,1970. 295 -p. [ED 040 583]. . Levanto, Joseph. MR. COMPUTERassistantprincipal (building a master schedtle): AEDS jOurnal; V: 1; June 1968: 182-190. Lewis, Philip'. Here's entrent reportbn computerized instruction. Na- tion's schools, v. 79, June 1967: 69+. . . Lieklider, J. C.,R. Libraries of-the future. Cambridge,M.LT. Press, 1965. 219 p. ( [ED.036' 100]... . Lind, Donald J. The identification of those collegestudents for which programmed college basic algebra ismost effective. Final report. Coffeyville [Kans.] Community Junior. College, 1970.35 p. [ED 043 007].... Lloyd; 'Donald An outside lookat programmed learning in fOreign language. Paper presented at the Kentucky. ForeignLangnagt Con- .ference, Lexington, 1967 7p.[ED 030.851]. Lockard, J.. David: Computers inundergraduate,education: mathematics, physics, statistics, an& ChethiStrY. CollegePark,' Maryland University, Science Teaching Center; 1967. 82p. [ED 025 440]. Locke, Robert Wand Dkiid Engler:Run, strawrnan;run ; a. critique of.Runi-Cimplite75, /hin. Edueathinal teelmologtv. 10;March 1970 : 47-50. Longs. Eugen .R.,jr. The effect of progranmied,instruction iii sp-ecial skiliduring the: prekhool period..on later-ability patterns and academic achievement. Chapel Hill, North-CarolinaUniversity, 1966. 125 [ED 010 643-1 7 Lorigo; Alexander. A. The -implementatioir ofcomputer assisted instruction in U.S. Army basic electronics training..7FolloW-upof a feasibility study: Fort Monniouth, U.S. ArmySignal Center iand School, 1969. IS p: [ED'038.-021]. . Longo;Alexander: .A.; and G.DOiilas Mayo. ComparisOnof conventional and programed instructionin teachina avionics fundamentals. San Dieao,- Naval Personnel Research -Activity;1965. 38- p:IED 014 679f Loughary, John W. The e6mputer-assisted -counselor'.NEA jotirnal, ; :V. 56, February 1967: 22-724:' Man-machine systems' in 'education. NeW York,Harper: and Row. 1966.-242:p. . Love, WilliainT. Individual iverstis-pairedlearning of an abstract algebra presented by computer assisted instruction. ''Tallahasiee,Flor- ida" -State University; ComputerAigisted InstructionCenter, .1969. 215 p. [ED 034 403]. Loveless, Edna Maye. Developing critical thinking. skillsin students in eighth grade English classes. 'College Park, Maryland:University, 1969. 201 p. [ED 046 961]. (Ann Arbor University Microfilms,Inc.). 106 101 Lumsdaine, A. A., and Robert Glaser, ed8. Teaching pizichines and programmed learning. Washington, National Education Associa- tion, 1960-65. 2 v. Ly-man, Elisabeth R. A descriptive list of Plato programs 1960-1970. Second edition. Urbana, Illinois University, CoMputer-based Edu- cation Laboratory, 1970. 51 p. [ED 042 623]. Lysaught, Jerome P. Research on the 'use of programmed. instruction aniong adult learners in professional health field& Paper presented at the National Seminar on _Adult Education Research, Chicago, 1968. 15 p. [ED 017 879]. Lysaught, Jerome P., and Clarenee M. William& A guide topro- gramed instruCtionNew York, JOhn Wiley and Sons, 1963. ,180 p. Ray E. Development and evaluatiOn ofan experimental course in applied mathematics for group4 personneL San Diego, Naval Personnel Research .A aivity, California, Navy Training Research Lab., 1969. 30 p. [ED 040.048]. Majer, Kenneth. Differential relationshipS between personality and performance under dissimilar modes of instruction.- AV, COMmuni- cation review v. 18, Summer 1970 : 169-179. Mallinson, George C. Prpgrammed learning materials for the ,bliiid: Kalamazoo, Western Michigan University, 1967. 85p. [ED 014 193]. . Maloney, J. P., jr. Electronic data processing in eduCation. Journal of educational _data -Processing, v. 6, Fall 1969: 225-229. Malpass, Leslie F., et al. Further deielopinent, comparison and evaluation of programed instruction for retarded children. Final.report. Tampa, University of South Florida, 1967. 75 p. [ED 025 052]. Proaramed readina instruction for culturally deprived.-slow. learner& Tampa, MacDonald Training _Centel., Foundation, 1966.. 45 p. [ED 011 065]. Mandle, _William Dee. A comparative study of programmed and traditional techniques for teaching,inusic read.i-ng.-the upper, elementary schools, utilizing a keybOard .aPProach. Final report. Cleveland, Western Reserve University, 1961. 295 p: [ED-.014 212].: Margolin,-Joseph B.;; and ,Marion,R: Misch. Computers in the class- . room : aninterdisciplinary view of trends and alternatives.. New York, Spartan Books, 1970. 382 p. Education in the 70's: a study of the-problems.and issues, asso- - dated with the effects of -computer technology . in education. The Educational Policy Project. The Program of Policy Studies in ,Sci- ence and Technology. Washington, George Washington University, 1967. 326 p. (Report to the Office of Education).. Markle,Susan Meyer. Proaraming and prograniedinstruction. Wash=_ ington. Academy. lor Educational Development, Inc:. One of the support papers-for -1-o`Improve Learning; a. report to the Presi- dent and the Cowes& Of the United States- by-the Commission on Instructional Teefmology.". 1970:: 11..p.- [ED -039- 711] .: Marsh,: C.-Panl, ,ctind Theodore M. Hyman: -Frog:ramified -learning.in extension training,. a:compariSon.of -"the *effectiveness. of ,pro- ; selfAnstinctiOn: Raleigh,'North Ca;rolina Agricultural Experiment Station, 1964. 23 p. [ED 017 654]. 102 Marsh, Luther A., and John Pierce-Jones.Programmed instruction as an adjunct to a course in adolescent psychology, 1968. 15p. [ED 018-989]. Martorana, S. V. The Air Force-OAR contributionto programed instruction: Washington, U.S. Air Force,Office of Aerospace Re- search, 1964. [ED 016 416]. (Clearinghousefor Federal Scientific and Technical Information AD-607 073). Mathetics, a; system of programmed instruction.Elmore, Alabama, Rehabilitation Research Foundation,1966. 61 p. [ED 024 601]. Mathieu, R. D., and D. F. Rogers. A:preliminary report on theusage of time-sharing remote computer terminalsin engineerinci education. Annapolis, Naval Academy, 1967.221 p. [ED 043 193r. ( Clear- inghouse for Federal Scientificand Technical Information). May, Kenneth 0:.,,Programed learningand mathematical education. San Francisco Committee On EducationalMedia, Mathematical Association of .America, 1965. 24p. - May, Kenneth O. Programing and mathematicsteaching. Mathematics teacher, v. 54. May 1966: 111 153. May, Richard E. Theuse of the computer in schools. The independent school bulletin. v. 30, 1Way 1971 :47-49. McCormick, J. The case for thecomputer. College placement, v. 29, April-May 1969 : 44-50. McGonnell, Pefer C., and A..1fred E. Morrison.Some results of two basic skills training programs ina rural setting. Montauge, Prince Edward Island, New Stait, Inc., 1970. 43p. [ED 043 839]. McGregor, G. and Robert R. Reynolds. Inservice training incomputer assistea instruction for vocational teachers. Finalreport. Providence College, 1966. 52p. [ED 021988]'. McHale, Thomas J., et al. Mat ematics for themajority ; a system of instruction for teaching technical mathematics.Milwaukee Area Technical College, 1969. 274p. [ED 039 332]. McIntyre, Charles J., et al An application ofthe principles of programed instruction to a televisedcourse in college economics. -Ur- bana, Illinois University, 1966. 36.p. [LD 010 538]. McLain, John D., and Frank W. "Kovacs. Programedinstruction for stiperior students in small high schools. Washington, U.S.Office of Education, 1967. 59 p. and appendices. (Contract No.0E-4-16- 026). , McLendon, Alvin Lee. Programed laboratory instructionfor non- science curricula students m college physics. Auburn University. 191 p. [ED 027 191]. McNeil, John D. Adapting a beginning readingprogram for Spanish- speaking children. 1968. 7 p. [ED 016 602]. Meier, Robert G. Development ofa compliter program for use in the analysis of future land, building; and staff requirements in institutions-of higher learning. Final report...1967: 15p. [ED 019 746]. Meyer,- james A. Programmed learning: educations turkiy ?. Ameri- can schoolr boaidiournal v: 156 October 1968 :- 26-27. Meyer, John-K. The-relative efficiency of pretest:mg andtwo types of programed inStruction for- solving maneuvering board problems. ',San Diegb, Naval Personnel Research Activaty, 1969. 21p. [ED 043 225]. 1 08 ,3 103 Minor, William Thane. Simulation .and.Computer -Directorate ; history of activities- 1967-1969. WasEington, Industrial College ofthe Armed Forces, 1969. 44p. [ED 033 293]. (Clearinghouse for Fed- Seientific and Technical Information). Mitzel, Harold E. A computer-assiited instructioncourse on labora- .tory detection of malarial 'parasites in. human blood. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, Computer Assisted Instruc- tion, Lab., 1968. 14 p. [ED 041 211]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Computers and adaptive education. American education,v. 6, December.1970 : 2326. The development and_ evaluation of a. teleproeessed computer- assisted instruction course in the recognition of malarial parasites. Final report; May 1, I967June 30,1968. University Park, Pennsyl- vania State University, Computer-Assisted Instruction Lab., 1968. 76 p. [ED 042 325]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). The development and presentation of four collegecourses bv - computerteleprocessing Final report. University Park, Pennsyl-

vania State University, 1967. 396 p. [ED 016 377]. - How to evaluate computer assisted instruction. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, 1970.- 6 p. [ED 047 005]. Mitzel, Harold E.,andGeorge L. Brandon. Experimentation with computer-assisted instruction in technical education. Semi-annual progress report. University. Park, Pennsylvania State University, 1966. 125 D. [ED 010 498]. Raiald E.,et al.Experimentation with computer:aSsisted in- s L action in technical` education. Semi-annual progress report. Re- port no. R-6. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, Computer,AsSisted Instruction Lab., 1967. 68 p. [ED 028 245]. Report no. R-9. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, CoMputer Assisted Instruction Lab., 1967 sa p. [ED 029 082]. Model programs: childhood education. A computer-assisted language experience which allows children to create their own reading lessons. Wishington, American Institutes -for Research, 1970. 24p. [ED 041-9321. Molnar, Andrew R. U.S. Office of Education support of _computer activities. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1969. 210 p. Molnar, Andrew R, and Beverly Sherman. U.S. Office of Education support of cbmputer activities. Educiational technology, v. 9, April 1969 : 5-9. Moore, J. William,etal.-Motivational variables in programmed learning. The role-of needachievement, fear of failure and student esti- mate of achievement as a function of program dificulty. Lewisburg, Bucknell University, 1965. 79 p. [ED 014 909]. Moore,,Omar'Khayyam. The clarifying environments program. Edu- .cational. technology, v. 11, Febraary 1971 : 73-77. Morgan, Robert M. review of educational apphcataons of the corn- puter, including those,in. instruction; adininistration and guidance: Series11.-Stinford;,ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Media and Technology, 1969. 12 p.' 104

Morrill, Charles S.,et al. Programmedinstruction.=a selected bibliography. Bedford, MitreCorp., 1962. [ED 016418]. (Clearinghouse for, Federal Scientificand Technical Information Morris, Roger. The AD-289 817). 27+. stuGents from Plato.Rotarian, v. 3, October1967: Mueller, Theodore. Analysisof the results obtainedwith "Basic Frencha ProgrammedCourse," academic parison witha traditional audio-lingual year 1968-69, and com- 855]. course. 1969. 13 p: [ED 030 4'underprivileged."Programmed languageinstructionhelp for thelinguistically Buffalo, NationalFederation of Modern Lan- guage Teachers Association,1968. 6 p..[ED 026 902]. Murphy, Judith. Schoolscheduling by cOmputerthestory of GASP. New Y ork, EducationalFacilities Laboratory,1964. 46.p. Mynhier, Betsz. Theimpact of federal in Appalachm. Paper pl--grams on learnm3g to read presented at the LiternationalReading Asso- ciation Conference,Kansas. City, Mo., 1969.26 p: [ED 032 202]. Nachtigal, Paul. Acomputerized approachto the individualizing, of instructional experiences.Boulder Valley Public 014 226]. Schools. 22 p. [ED Nasca, Donald. Effectof varied presentations within programed of laboratory exercises materials on specificAitellectual factors of science problem solving behavior.Brockport, State University York, 1965. 73p. [ED 010 292]. of New National Council ofTeachers of Mathematics. mathematics instruction. Computer fadilities for The new computerized Washington, Tlie Council,1967. 47 p. 15+. age. Saturday revieW,v. 49, July 23; 1966: The n6w nursery schoolresearch project of an open respon§iVe ; eVablating. the effectiveness of early ch environment in achievingselected objectvesi ildhood education. Finalreport -Greeley, University of Northern Colorado,1969. 152 pIED 042 518]. Niblock, John S. Computeruse in the public schools:a survey.AEDS journal, v. 4,'SePtember1970 : 1-46. Nimnicht, Olen. Low-cost tipeivriter aPproach helpspreschoolers type words and stories. NationS 'schools, v. 80, December1967: 34-47. Norton, Robert E. Usingprogramed instruction inoccupationdl education. Albany, New YorkState EduCation [ED 018 660]. Departinent, 1967. 56 p. ONR conference on CAI languagei held at Cambridge,Massachusetts, 2--3 March, 1966.Newburypiirt,-Entelek, InC., 910]. 1966. 22 p. [ED 044 Oberle, Mark 'A. Campuscomputers : Federalbudget cuts hit univer- --sity,centers. Sciende,v 165-, September 26,1960:1337-4339. O'Brien, dordon E, et al; The_effects of prograramedculture training upon the performance 'ofVolunteer medial teamsin Central America. Urbana, Illinois,UniversitY, Dept. of Psychology;1969. 52 p. [ED 039 807]-(Clearinghouse'' for -Federal -r--Technidal Infckination). Scientific and . , O'Connor, Lauten&:0.-,--aizifEdWard Tirello Usi4g EDP effec- ..tivelycinyour scliool. Englewood Cliffs,-.New-JemeY Inc., 1969. 78p. 105 Oettinger, Anthony G. Run, computer, run; the mythology of educational innovation. Cambridge, Massachusetts, Harvard University Press, 1969. 302 p. Ofiesh, Gabriel D. Programmed instruction : a guide for management. New York, American Management Association, 1965. 416 p. ()flesh, Gabriel D., and Wesley C. Meierhenry. Trends in programmed instniction papers from the first annual convention of the National Societi for Programmed Instruction. Waihington, Department rof Audiovisual InstructiOn, National Edudation Asso- ciation, 1964. 295 p. [ED 028 635]. Ohlman, Herbert. Educational computer trends in the CEMREL region, analysis and recommendations. St. Ann; Nlissouri, Central Midwestern-Regional Educational Lab.,, 1969. 22 p; [ED 031 937 J. Ohlrnan, Herbert; 0. Proceeding§ Of. a Symposiuin ori the uses of com- uters in eduCatiOn; Febrhary 13, 1968. St. Ann, NEssourii Central idwesterri Reaional Edficatiorial Lab.,1969. 123 p. Okunrotifa, P. 0..A.dhievement and retention as variables in compar- ing programmed, and conventional instructions in geography. Edu-, cational leadership, v. 28, Februiry 1971 : 561 -1-. Oldehoeft, Arthur E.- toinputer-assisted instruction-in teaching nu- merical methods. Filial report. (A cciitiputer system toleach compu- tational mathematics). Lafayette, Purdue University, Dept. of Computer Science, 1970. 282 p. ED 039 778]: Oliver, William P. Learner and program-controlled Sequences of computer-assisted inStrUction. Toronto, Ontario InStitute for Studies in Education, 1971. 19 p. [ED 046 246]. Oliver, W. P. and S. Churchill. 'Goal: Canadian `CAI network... computer-assisted instruction at the Ontario Institute for Studies 'in Education. AEDS monitor; v. 9, FebruarY 1971 : Olt* Robert-M. A' Self-instructional program fOi developing productive thinking sldlls in fifth- and. sisth-grade children. Journal of creatiVe behavior, v.. 3, Winter 1969 : 1625.* . Olton, Robert M.,2it al The develdPnient of prbdUctive thinkina skills in -fifth-grade; Madison, Wisconsin-University, ResearCh aL:d De- velopment Center for CognitiVe Learning 1967. 47 p [ED 021 312 J. Ornstein, Jacob. Once more: programmed instruction in the language field the state of the art. Paper presented at the 23rd University of Kentucky Foreign Language Conference, Seminar on Programmed Learning, 1970. 10 P. [ED 012 380]. Progtamed instructionin the language field. The modern lan- glzage journal, v. 52, November 1968 : 401110. . Orr, W. Conversational computer& New York,_John Wiley and Sons, 1968. 227 p. Orton, Kenneth- D. The effects Of certain resPonse characteristics in prograthed instruction on errors 'iate -of learning, and retention. Lincoln, Nebraska University;1967. 89 P. [ED-013 537]. Page, Rinis B. The imininenae of. .grading essays by computer: Phi Delta-Kappan,.v. 48, Janaia# 1966 : 238-243. Paae, Ellis B., and ]Dieter H PaUlu-S.. The 'analysis of 'esSayS -by cora- fate*: Final. report: Stip- Connecticut 'UniverSity, 1968. 280, p. ED 028 633]. 106 Park-us, Lawrence. Computerassisted instruction in elementary/secondary education: the state of the art. Washington, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One ofthe support papers for "To Improve Learning: a report to the President and the Congress of the Umted States by the.Commission on Instructional Technology." 1970. 37 p. [ED 039 713]: Patterson, Marion J. An observationof computer assisted instruction ,on underachieving, culturally deprived students.Journal of secondary education, v. 44, April 1969: 187-188. Paxton, Harry T. The comir;way to keep up in medicine. Medical economics, v. 47, July 20, 1970: 156+. Peluso, Anthony P. Ananswer for a clinie. American education,v. 41, May1968 :28-29, Pierce, G.E. Data processing forguidance and counseling handbook Detroit, Michigan, Automated EducationCenter, 1967. Pincus, Margaret E., ed. Someessays on computers in education. Cam- bridge, New. England EducationData System& 1967. 118 026 859]. p. [ED Plattor, Emma E. and EllsworthS. Woestehoff. The application of computer technology to educationdiagnosis. Paper presented at International Reading AssociationConference, Boston, 1968. 16 [ED 028 025]. p. Pocztar, Jerry. Programmedinstruction. Prospects in education,v. 1, no. 3, 1970 : 21-29. Poinsett, Alex. Computertutors for ghetto pupils. Ebony,v. 23, De- cember 1967 : 91+. Post,..Dudley L., ed. Theuse of comPuters in secondar3r school mathe- matic& Newburyport, Entelek,Inc., -1970. 252 p. [ED 046 236]. Poteet, G. Howard. Thecomputer and the teacher of English. NeWark, New Jersey Association of Teachersof English; 1968. 4p. [ED 036 503]. . President's Science Advisory Committee.Computers in higher education. Watihington, U.S. Govt. Print.Off., 1967. 79 p. Prince J.D. A practitioner'sreport; results of twoyears of computer assisiedinstruction in drill-and-practicemathematics. For the period June 15, 1967 to May 30, 1969.Progress report no. 3. Stanford University, Institute for MathematicalStudies in Social Science, 1969. 38-p. [ED 032 769]. , Programed instructionin adult education. Current information sources, 15. Syracuse University, ERIC Clearinghouseon Adult Education, 1968. 26p. [ED 011 432]. Programed instruction in large schoolsystems. Educational Research Serviceeircular no. T, September 1966.10 p. - Programmed instAiction: a Iprief of its development and current status. Training Systems. and. TechnologySeries : No. 3. Washington, U.S. Civil Service CoMmission, 1970. 57p. [ED 042 358]. Programmed instruction and the hospital,a report on the use of programmed instruction in healthcare institutions. Chicago, Hospital Research and Educational Trust4967-:[ED 017 800]. Programined inathictionguide- Entelek-Northeastern University. Boston, Entelek, Inc., 1967: (Thiblisheiltwice each year). Programmed instruction in business andindustry. Current information sources, no. 28. Syracuse, SyracuseUniversity, ERIC Clear- inghouse on Adult Education, 1970.47p. [ED 035 789]. r.- 112 1G7 Programmed.' instruction today. Educational teclmolooy, v. 10July 1970 : 29-17. Programmed mathematics, Dora Frigh School. Sante Fe,Western States Small Schools Project, 1965. 7 p. [ED 026 184]. Prohof'yev, A.V. Programmed learning;programmed V.-A books, teaching machines. Moscow (USSR), Ministry ofDefense, Military Publishing House, 1966. 138 p. [ED 034 429].(Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information) . Project Read. Palo Alto, Behavioral ResearchLaboratories, Ladera Professional Center, 1970. 18 p. [ED 038 853]. Pulliam, Robert The mechanical recognition ofspeech : prospects for use in the teaching of languages.Washington, Center for Applied Linguistics, ERIC Clearinghouse for Linguistics, 1970. 21 p.[ED 043 866]. Randall, Ronald, and Charles BlaSchke. Educationaltechnology : economics, management and public policy. Educationalteclmology, v. 8. June 30, 1968 : 5-13. Rath, Gustave J. Non-CAI instruction using computersand non-instructional uses of CAT computers. Educationaltechnology,--v: 8, February 15, 1968 : 11-13. Raymond., Roger A. Teachina algebra to ninth and tenthg/.ade pupils with the use ofprogrameematerials and teiching machines. Sioux Falls Public Schools, 1963. 91 p. [ED 023 312]. - Sioux Falls Public Schools, 1961..72 p. [ED 023311]; Readings in computer baSed guidance. The Bartlesville[Okla.] system. Washington, American Educational ResearchAssociation, et al.. 1970.15 p. [ED 042 -223]. Redfield, David D.. et al. CAI word rate : studentability*as predictors of achievement. Technical report no. 2, ISCS. Tallahassee,Florida State University, Departnient of Scienee Education,1970. 30 p. FED 012 3571. : . Reichert, Conrad A. The effect of learner and taskcharicteristics on learning in scrambled item sequences in -Prograinedinstruction. Berrien Springs ,Amdrews University. 1971. 16 p. [ED 046 2A3l. _ Reinert, Harry. Guided lea rning for foreign languages.NASSP bulletin. v. 53, March 1969 : 90-96. Renb, Martin, et al. Utilization of computer facilitieshi the mathematics and business curriculmn in a large suburbanhigh- school. Cleveland; Case Institute of Technology, 1966. 26 p. [ED 010110]. Report of the Computer Study. Committee submitted to theBoard of Regents, State of Kansas. Topeka, Kansas State Board of Regents. 1969.'78 p. [ED 038 096]. . . Report on registration proeedures at ninety-six colleges anduniversi- ties. Cincinnati University,: Department of Instructional Studies, 1969. 7 D. [ED 037 166]. Revnolds.,Laura A. Programed-instruction and teaching machinesin the field of medical education : an annotated bibliography. McLean, Research Analysis ,CorD 1966: rED 021 454]. (Clearinghousevfor Federal-Scientific and -fechnical Information). . ,Reynolds,.Robert. Inservice training in-computer assistedinstruction for Vocational teachers. Final report; Prov,idence'College4967. 26 p. [ED 023 918]. 112 108 Reynolds, Robert, et al. Reporton computer ap-isted instruction, Provi- dence College,Providence Rhode Island,October 1, 1965-June 30, 1966. 1966. 42 p. [ED 012381]. Richardson. Ellis, andJoseph McSweeney. Ananalysis of the E.R.E. "talking typewriter"as a device for teaching beginningreading skills. Educationalteclmology, v. 10. February Richmond, W. K. Teachers 1970 : and machines. London.Collins, 1965. 272p. Ridgeway, James.Computer-tutor. New republic,"v. 19-22. 154, June 4, 1966 : Rigney, Joseph W.,et al. TASKTEACH: a method for computer- assisted learning ofserial-action tasks. Technicalreport no. 62. Los Angeles, Universityof Southern California,Dept. of Psychol- ogy, 1969. 39 p. [ED 033 572].(Clearinghouse for Federal tific and TechnicalInformation). Scien- Ripple, Richard E., and Robert F. O'Reilly.The relationship ofanxiety, creativity andintelligence to gramed instruction. success in learning frompro- 011 072]. Ithaca. Cornell University,1966. 139 p. [ED Ripple, Richard E.,et al. Learner characteristicsand instructional modethe relationshipof anxiety, compulsivity,creativity and exhibitionism tosuccess in learning from programedand conventional instruction.-Final report. Ithaca, 280 p. [ED 016 380]. Cornell University, 1967. Roberts, A. Hood.Selected bibliocrra_phy Washington, Center- for Appliel in proarammed instruction. 878]. Linguistics,1966. 24p. [ED 010 Roberts, Arthur D., andPerry Alan Zirkell.Computer applications to in.struction. Journalof secondary education, 99;-105. V. 16, March 1971 : Roberts, Edward B.,.and Henry B. Weil.Implementing new educational technology forthe military. Naval April 1971: 22-28. War Collefse review,v. 23, Robinson Willis, and WillisAustin. A computerizedtest-correcting service Ifor teachers.Paper presented toa meeting of the California Educational ResearchAssociation, Los Angeles, 753]. 1969. 9 p. [ED 027 Rocklyn, Eugene H. The application ofprogrramed instructionto foreign language andliteracy training.Washington, George Washing- ton University, 1967. 15p. [ED 011 373]. Rodgers, William A.,andlawrence W. Gariglio.Toward a computer based initruction.system. Washin6oton U.S. 79 p. Govt Print. Off., 1969. Saginaw TownshipCommunity Schools,Michigan. 84 p. [ED 016 405]. - ROgers, J. L. Currentproblems in CAI. Datamation, 1968 : 28-33. v. 14, September Roid; Pale H. Covariates of learning incomputer-assisted instruction. Montreal, McGillUniversity, 1971: 8p. [ED 046. 244]. Roos, *Daniel: 'Vie ofConipatilale TiMe-SharingSyStein (CTSS) in a teaching environment. CambridgeMassachusetts Institute of Technology;:1961. 32p". [ED 022`381i. (Clearinghousefor Federal Scientifie-and"Technical Inkirmation). 1.14. 109 Root, Robert T., et al. Maintaining interpreter proficiencyin a computerized facility. Eiperinient Iprogramming and feedback metIA. State College, Pa., HRB-Singer,Inc., 1969. 37 p. [ED 039 808].(ClearinghouseforFederalScientificand Technical Information). Rosenbaum, J., and. Fred D. Bennik. CAI at System Development -Corporation. Educational technology;v, 9. February 1969 : 11-13. ROsenbauni, J., 4 al. Computer-based-instruction instatistical inference - final report. Teclmical memorandum. Santa Monica, System Development. Corp., 1967. 201 p...[ED 029 511]. Rosenbaum, :P. The computeras a learning environment for foreign languarre instruction. Foreign language annual 2TMay 1969 :

457-1a. . Rosenberg, R. C., et al. Investigations in -computer-aided instruction and computer-aided controls.-Final report. Cambridge,Massachu- .setts 1-12istitute4f Technology, Department of Mechanical Engineer- ing, 1967. 26 p. [ED 022 383]. (Clearinghouse for' FederalScientific and Technical Information); , ' RosenqUist, Barbara, and Mark Miller.The- effects of programed instruction on attitude and achievement. Champaign, Illinois Univer- sity, 1965. 53z. [ED 010 787]. Ross, Harvey L. An evaluation of the effectiveness of theAllen teaching machine at the-Federal Correctional Institution, Lompoc, Cali- fornia,. Final report. Los Angeles, Human InteractionResearch In- ..stitute, 1970. 70p. [ED 043 830]. Ross, Tony -A., .et al_ Development ofa FORTRAN computer program io design school bus routes. Final report. University,. Missis- sippi University Computer Center, 1969. -66 p: [ED 031 aoo]. Rosser, Donald S. What you shouldknow about-new computer based college selection services. Nation's schools,v. 84, November 1969 : 4749. - - Rothb.art, A., and E. Steinberg. Someobservations of children's reactions to computer-assisted instruction. Arithmetic'teacher, v: 18, January 1971 : 19-21.. Roucek, J. S., -ed. Programmed teaching:a syniposium on automation in education. New York, Philosophical Library,1965. 194 p. Rourke Francis E., and Glenn E. Brooks: Computersand university administration.Administrative science quarterly,IT: 2 March'1967: - 575400. Roy, Rob. Computeraided-instruction fora °course in Boalean algebra and logic design. Final,report.- (Revised). Troy,Rennsselaer Poly- teohn,ic Institute, 1968. -21-p., [ED-031 410]. . Rozran.,,G-ilbeit- B. A study of phe effectivenessof a military-type computer-lased instructional systeni- when used- in civilian high School courSes in electronics and automechaniCi. Final report: -Icing of Prussia,Systems Operatic-A Support, Inc., 1968. 87p. [ED -023 :78n72ic:r- A., et aL Arinaging ct,he instructional prograMming --effort. Ann:, Arbor, Wfic..14ran University, 33,ureau of .Ind*strial-Re- lations, 1967. LED 014 018]. .., - Ruplin, Ferdinand-A.,,and John R. Russell. A Lype of computer-as- siSted instruction. Philadelphia, Ainerican Association of Teachers of German, 1968.5 p, [ED. Tr- , 110 Scan land, Francis ,Worth. An investigationof the relative effectirie- ness of two methods_ ofinstruction, including instruction,as techniques- foi- Changing- computer-assisted Negro adults. the parental attitudesof Tallah.assee, FloridaState University,Computer- Assisted InstructionCenter, 1970. 90p. [ED 043 224]. Schiavone James, DavidBowen'and Mary L. Farrell. sisted instructionin readig. Education,' Compiiteras- 301-302. v. 91, April-May '1971: Schmidt, Harvey E.The use Of the tool for introductory computer as a unique teacIrints- calculus. Finalreport. Ferguson, Missouri, St. Louis JuniorCollege District, 1970.37 P. [ED 042 655]. Schramm,'Wilbur. Fourcase- studies of programed York, The Fund for instruction. New the Advancementof Education, 1964.-119 p. Programed instruction;today and tomorrow.New-York, The Fund for the Advancementof Education, 1962: 74 The research p. on programmed instruction.-Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off.,1964. 114 p. Schurdak, John J.An approach to the structional use of computers' in the in- process and evaluation. InternationalBusiness Machines Corporation,1965.40 p. [ED 013 539]. Schwartz, H. A., andA. S. Long. Instructionby computer."Datama- tion v. 12, September1966 : 73+. . Scott, Dana S.Developing new materialsfor high school geometry. Final report. _StanfordUniversity,196g. 158 p. [ED 021 Sears, Pauline S.,and David H. Feldman. 760]. dren's classroom behavior Changes in yoUng chil- tion an e7ploratory after a year of computer-assistedirstruc- study. Research memoranchnn.Stanfoz.c1 Uni- versity, StanfordCenter for Research andDevelopment in Teach- ing, 1968. 96p. rED022 366]. Seibert, Warren F.,andChristopher J.: Reid. Acorrelational analysis of the effects of learnerand lhiear programmingcharacteristics on learning programmed instruction.Final -report. Irafayette, Pur- due 17mversitv, AudiovisualCenter, 1968. 46p.rED"023 309]. Rnbert. Computers ineducation : the Copernican revolutionin education -systems."Complitersand automation.,y; 18, March 1969: 24-1-; z, 'Is CAI cost/effeCtive ? Tfieright qnestion -at the wrong time. Educational technology, v. 9, May 1969 : . Seidel, Robert J., and FelixF. Kopstein..Resource allocationsto effect operationally usefurCALAlekandria; Human Resources Re- search Organization, 1970.21 p: [ED 041 466]. . Seidel, Robert J., et al. ProictIMPACT ; deScription of learnm:g and prescription for instruction.Wa'shington,George Washington Uni- versity, 1969. 17p.TED 034 944]. (Clearinghouse'for-Federal Sci- entific and Teel-mical Information): Selig, Judith A., et al. A computer-basedsystem integrating instruc- f4nn and information retrieval:a description of some methodolngi- cal cOnSideration's: Carabricti,-.Harvard University, Computing Center,'1968. 25t-. [ED 038.830]. (ClearinghOuse_forFederal Sci- entific and Tee-frnical Information)., SemmeL AL L. A.:COMputer-assistedteacher trainirig sysfein. Ann, Ar- bor, Michigan University' Center -forResearch on:Language and Language Behavior, 1968.63p, [V); 028 I24]: , . J- 116 111 Shapovalenko, S. G. Programed teaching of chemistry. Washington, Joint Publication Research Service, 1964. [ED 018 991]. (Clearing- house for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Sharpes, Donald K. Computers in education. Clearing house, v. 43, No- vember 1968 : 135-138. Sheldon, John W. Computer-assisted instruction in eimineering dy- namics. CAI-systems memo no. 18. Tallahassee, Florida State University, Computer-Assisted Instruction Center, 1970. 21 p. [ED 043 228]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Sherman, Mark A., and George R. Klare. Attitudes of adult basic education students -toward computer-aided instruction. Cambridge, Harvari University, Computing Center, 1070. 17 p. [ED 041 203]. Shore, Robert Eucrene. ProgramMed approach vs. conventional approach using haly consistent sound-symbol system of reading in three primary grades. Paper presented at the International Read- ing Association- Conference, A.ustin, 1970. 9 p. [ED 043 467]. Short, Jerry G, and .T. Lynne McCombs. A study of the feasibility of using programmed instructional techniques, in U.S. Navy correspondence courses. Final report. Pittsburgh, American Institute for R,esearch in Behavioral Sciences, 1966. 151 p. [ED 038 850]. Clear- inghouse for. Federal Scientific and Technical Information). zr Shuford, Emir H., fr.. and H. Edward Massengill. The relative effectiveness of five instrUctional strategies.-Lexinoton, Shuford-Massen- gill Corp., 1967: 17p. [ED 035 288]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Sci- entific and Technical Information). The worth of individualizing instruction. Lexington, Shuford- Massengill Corp., 1966. 31 p., [ED 035 289]. (Clearinghouse for Fed- eral Scientific and Technical Information). Silberman, _Harry, F. Using computers in education---=some problems and solutions. Santa Momca, California, System Development Corp., 1966..12 p. [ED 012 092]. Silverh, Leonard C. Cybernetics ana 9th/cation K-12. Audiovisual instruction, v, 13, March 1968 : Sldnner. B. F.*The teclmology:of teaching. New York, Appleton-Cen- tury-Crofts, 1968. 271 p. _ Slamecka, Vladimir. A general information system for learning. At- .5;1, lanta- Georcia Institute of 'Technology, School of Information Sci-, ences, 1968. -12 p. [ED 033 045]. Teaching machines. Science, v. 153. September 1966 : 1289- 1290. Smallwood, Richard D. A decision structure for teaching machines. Cambridge, Massachusetts, M.I.T. Press, 1962. 122 p. . Optimum .policy regions for computer-directed teaching systems. 1968. 33 p. [ED 027- 754]. Smith, Donald, et al. The pronunciationearing test using a hybrid Magnetic tape system. Tokyo University, Research Institute on Logopedics and Phoniatrics 1670. 3 p. rED 044 7'05]. Smith, Karl V., and Margaret Foltz Smith. Cybernetic principles of learning and, educational design. New York, Milt, Rinehart. and Winston, 1966. 526 p. Smith, Robert G... fr. Teacbing machines and programmed instruction. Some factors io consider in implementation. .Research memoran- . . 119

thim. Fort Bliss Army Air Defense;Human ReseaErdh Unit, 1961; 82 p. [ED 034 399]. (Clearinghouse forFederal Scientific and Tech- nical Information). Smith, Robert L., and Charles Seagraves,IIL'A study.of the role and scope of computers in the Texas System of Higher 'Education.Alas: tin, Coordinating Board, TexasCollege and University System, 1968. 27 p. [ED 027 821]. Smith, W. I., and J. W. Moore, eds.Programmed learning: theory and research. Princeton. Van Nostrand,1962. 240 p. Spaulding, Seth,comp. Programmed instruction ; an international directory.Pittsburgh, International Education Clearinghouse,Uni- versity of Pittsburgh, 1967. 189p. Programmed instruction and teachingmachines in schools of -developing countries and technologyin educotion-past, i)resent and future. 19 p. [ED 017 183]. Spielberger. Charles D. The effects ofanxiety on computer-assisted learning. Paper presentedat a conference on "The Affective Domain in Learning," Salishan, Oregon.Tallahassee. Florida State Uni- versity, Computer-AssistedInstruction Center, 1970. 51p. [ED 045 720]. Spielberger, Charles D. et al. Anxiety,drive theory, and computer- assistea learning. Tallahassee, FloridaState University, Computer- Assisted Instruction Center, 1970. 67p. [ED 046 241]. Squires, Burton E., fr., Small collegescan use computers in big way. Chicago, College and University Business,1968. [ED 022 348]. Stanford program in computer-assistedinstmction for the period Jormary 1, 1968 to March 31, 1968.Progress report Stanford Uni- versity, Institute for MathematicalStudies and Social Science, 196S. 84.p. [ED 021 441]. Stanford program in computer-assistedinstruction for the period April 1, 1968 to June 30, 1968.Progress report. Stanford Uni- versity. Institute for MathematicalStudies in Social Science, 1968. 69 p. [ED 034 393]. Stanford program in computer-assistedinstruction for the period Oc- tober 1, 1968 to December 31, 1968. Progre-ssreport. Stanford Uni- versity. Institute for Mathematical Studiesin Social Science, 1968. 65 p. [ED 031 088]. Stanford profTram in computer-assistedinstruction for the period January 1, 1969 to Mai-ch 31, 1969.Progress report. Stanford Uni- versity, institute for Mathematical Studiesin Social Science., 1969. 48 p. [ED 034 421]. Stanford program in computer-assisted instructionfor the period April 1, 1969 to .1-me 30, 1969. Progressreport Stanford U iiversity, Institute -for Mathematical Studies in__Slcial SCience, 52 p. [ED 033 022]. . . Stanford prograin in compiiter--9Ssiked-ins-ructionfor the period July 1, 1969 to September 30..1969. PrOgressreport Stanford Uni- versity. Institute for Mathematical Stndiesin. Social Science, 1969._ 47 p. rED 038 0231. , Stankord. Martin F., 0-32timOl use ofa comvuterYe, . based-instructiona system in an existing urban school district Finalreport .(Optim:11 Stddent Scheduling-for COmputer AS:sistedInstruction). Philadel-- phia, Pennsylir- ania Univeisity, 1969;247P."[ED 042 363]. 118 -s 113 Stannard, C. The computer in general physics instruction. American journal of physics, v. 38, December 1970 : 1416-1431. Stansfield, David. The computer and education. Educational technology, v. 8. May 30, 1968 : 3-8. Starkweather, John A. Adaptive machine aids to learning. Washing- ton, Academy for Educational Development, Inc. One of the support papers for "To Improve Learning- a report to the President and die Cono-ress of the United States by the- Commissionon Instruc- tional technology." 1970. 24 p. [ED 039 715]. Computer science instruction in elementary grades, an exploration of computer-based learning methods. Final report. San- Fran- cisco, California UniVersity 1968. 199 p. [ED 021 445]. Steg, Doreen, et al. Effects. of individual programmed instruction on initial reading skills and language behavior in early childhood. Paper presented at International Reading Association conference, Boston. 1968. 9 p. [ED 028 026]. Stelzer, J. Computer assisted instruction and vocational education. Educational tedmology, v. 11, March 1971 : 43-47. Stoker, Howard W. Automated data processing in testing. Boston, Houghton Mifflin; Co., 1968. 69 p. Stolurow, Lawrence M. Computer aided instrue' Ion theory and practice. Paper presented at NATO Conference on. Major Trends in Programmed Research, Nice, France, 1968. Cambridge, Harvard University, Massachusetts Computation Lab., 1969. 37 p. [ED 034 409]. Computer-based instruction : psychological aspects and systems conception of instruction. Cambridge, Harvard University, Gradu- ate School of Education, 1967. 30 p. [ED 024 267]. Defects, and needs; SOCRATES,a computer-based instructional system in theory and research. Journal of ekperimental education; v. 37, Fall 1968 : 102-117. . _ Pxo:gramed instruction and the teaching of mathematics: Ur- bana; Illinois University, Bureau- of Education Research, 1963; 20 p. [ED 017 167]. Project. SOCRATES :a flexible i:eseal-bh facility to be used in studies of pre-programed-self-instruction. (PSI) and self-progiamed individualized.: education (SPIE). Final report. Urbana; Illinois University, 1966. [ED 031 457]. (Clearinghouse for Federal Scien- tific and -Technical Infoilnation). Socrates, a computenbased instructional system in theory and research. Technical report. Urbana, Illnois University, 1966. [ED 021 458]. (Clearitighouse fôr Federal 'Scientific and Technical Information). Some factors in the- deSign of-systems for coMputer-assisted instruction. Cambridge; IlarVard Uniiersity, 1968:45 p. [ED 033 Telatirtg: by, niaohine. Was-fiinaon, TJS Goirt: Print. Off., 1961. 173 p. , Whatislcomputer assisted ihStruction. ? EdUcationalteChnology, v 8, A:tiguA Stolurow, Lawrence M., awl Max Becalm:ail. :C6mplitatiVe studies -of principles for programming mathematics in automated instruction. 1119 114 Final report. Urbana, 7,4C. Illinois University, Bureauof Educational Research, 1964:49p. [ED 013 377]. . Stolurow, Lawrence M., andTheodore I. Peterson. HarvardUniver- sity computer-assistedinstruction (CAI) laboratory. port no. 6. Cambridge, Harvard Technical re- 035 311]. University, 1968, 112p. [ED Stolurow, Lawrence M., et al.Computer assisted instruction inthe health professions. CambridgeHarvard University, Computation Lab., 1970. 258p. [ED 038 017].' Stovall, Gayden F. Long Aistancelearning. Audiovisual instruction,- v. 14,February 1969 : 20,23. Strand, William H. Experiencewith teaching machines andpro- 0-rammed learning. StanfordUniversity, Pemnsula Study Council; LeicesterUniversity (England), 1964:58p. [ED 018 957]. Student, teacher, an0 machine.Sehool and society,v. 98, January 1970 : 4-6. . The student-teacher-computer'team : focus on the computer.Toronto, Ontario Institute forStudies in Education, 1967.35 g. [ED 026 866]. - Suppes, Patrick. Thecomputer and excellence. SatUrday_review, v. 50, January. 11, 1967:46+ Computer-assisted instructionin the schools: potentialities, problems, prospects.Psycholoey series. TeChnicalreport. Stanford -liEniversity; 1965. 18p. [ED 021 482]. Plug-in instruction.Saturday review,v. 49. July 23, 1966 : . The teacher andcoMputer-aesisted inStruction. NEAjournal, v. 56, February 1967: 1547. The uses of computersin: education. ScientificAmercan, v. 215, September 1966: 207-220. E' Suppes, Patrick, ardConstance Ihrke.: Aceeleratedprogram in elementary school/L., athenaaticsthe fourthyear. Stanford University, Califorma Institute 'forMathematical ..tudies in Social 1969. 42 p. [F1) ON 426]. Science, Suppes Patrit.e... andMax- Jernian: Computei-assiStedinstruction. NAS1SP bulletin,v. 54,-Febrilary 1970.:.27-40. CoinpUter assisted instfuction:it Stanford. Educational technology, v. g, January1969 :.22-221. Suppes,_ Patrick, andMona Morningstar.. Computer-assisted'instriic- tion. Science, v. 166, October17, 1969 :S43-350. , Evaluation -of thisecomputer-assisted instructionprograms. Stm ford Univeisity, Institutefor.MathematiCal Studies in Social Science, 1969. 62p. [ED 031 408]. Suppes, Patrick, ,andBarbara Searle. The -comPuter teachesarithme- 'tic. Schoolreview, v. 79,February 1971: 213-225. StIppes, Patrick, Max-Jerman, and Dow Brian.Computer-assisted instruction : Stanford's.1965-66 ,arithnietic. program.'New York, Academic Press, 1968. 385p. : Suppes, Ilatrick., et ak Problem-solvingon a computer-based teletype. Stanford University, Institutefor Matheniatical Studies in Social -,-Seence4969. 26[ED 029.795].

jr,41 k,41 115 Survey of the instructional use of the computer in Connecticut's public and private high schools. Hartford, Connecticut State Depart- mentof Education, 1968. 7 p. [ED 028 640]. Suydam, Marilyn N. Development of a computer-assisted instruction course for the training of Spanish-s_peaking teachers in elementary school mathematics. Final report. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, 1970. 41 p. [ED 046 228]. Swets, John A., and Wallace Fuerzig. Computer-aided instruction. Science v. 150, October 29, 1965 : 572-576. Swets, John A., et al. Information processing models and computer aids for human performance. Cam1Dridge, Bolt, Beranek and New- man, Inc., 1970. 267 p. [ED 044 912]. (National Technical Infor- - mation Service). Taber, Julian 1., Robert Glaser, and Halmuth H. Schaefer. Learn- ing and programmed instruction. Reading, Massachusetts, Addi- son-Wesley, 1965. 182 p. Taft, Martin I., and Arnold Reisman. Towards better curricula throuzh computer selected sequencing of subject matter. 1966 ? 2'7 p. [ED 012 106]. Teachers evaluate programmed instruction a survey of attitudes and problems. Ottawa, Canadian Teachers' Federation, 1966.. 64 p. [ED

021 735]. _ Tea lying macliines and programmed learning in the Soviet .bloca survey of the published literature, 1962-1963. Washington, Depart- ment of Commerce, Joint Publication Research Service, 1964. [ED 014 903]. 1. Teates, Thomas et ea. CAI utilization fOr formative curriculum evaluation. Tall;hassee, Florida State University, Department of Science EducatiOn, 1970. 70 [EP 038 025]. Teichroevr, DanieL Major decisions regarding computers in colleges and universities. AEDS journal, =v. 1; September 1967: 25-45. Thiagaragan, S.. Programmed instruction in India: Educational tech- .nology, v. S, April 151968 : 11-13. Thomas, C. A., et al. Programmed learning in perspective; a gruide to programme writing. Barking, Essex, Great Britain, Adelphi Press, 1963. 182 p. . Tidwell, Kenneth W; The evolving data processing cu/ture. AEDS journal, v. 2, September 1968 : 12-18. Til, William:Tan. Supervising computerized instruction. Educational leadership, v. 26, October 1968 : 41 -E. Tobias, Sigmand.-The effect of creativity, response mode, and Subject matter familiarity on achievement from programmed instruction. New York, City University of New York, 1968. 153p. [ED 027 756]. Tobias, Sigmund, thul Theodore Abramson. The relationship of anxiety, response mode, and content difficulty to achievement in programed instruction. FiPal report. 'City University of New Yolk, 1970. 40p. [ED 040 605]. Tondow, Murray. Computer diagnostics. Paper presented at the Amer- ican Educational Research Association Convention, 3Enneapolia, 1970. Washingt'on; American Educational Research Association; Palo Alto, UnifiedSchool District, 1970. 9 p. [EU 042 226]. ,42.1r* " :116 Computer utilization by schools: an example. 1968. 28 p. [ED 027 749]. Computers in the schools : Palo Alto. Datathation,v. 14, June 1968 : 57-59. ;. Travers, J. Mathematics education and the computer revolution. School science and mathematics,v. 71, January 1971 : 24-34. Treffinger, Donald J., and gichard E. Ripple. Developing creative problem solving abilities and relathd attitudes thr!Dugh programed instruction. Journal of creative behavior,v. a; Spring 1'969 : 105-110. The effects of programed. instruction in productive thinkingon verbal creativity and pi!obleni solvingamong elementary school pupils. Final report. Ithaca. Cornell University, 1968. 238p. [ED 030 156]. Programmed instruction in creative problem solving. Educa- tional leadership,-v. 2y8, March 1971: 667-675. Trezise, R. L. Report on a national conferenceon computer applications to learning. Educational- technology,v. 10, December 1970 : 60-62. Trippon, Marianne. PLATO at work. Phi Delta Kappan,v. 49, April 19A8 : 439-441. ewriters talk-Ldisadvantaged children listen. Nation's schools,v. 80, October 1967: 64-65. U.S. Office of. Edu,cation. News and reports; Title VIInew educational media: Sixth special edition. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1963. 17 p. (0E-34002-9): I There's a computer in your future. Washington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1968..[14 p.]. Reprinted from American education,v. 3, November- 1967. . U.S. Senate. Committee on Labor andPublicWellare. Notes and working papers concerning the administration of programs authorized under Title X of Public Law 85-864, the National Defense Educa- tion Act, as ainended, and Public Law 534 of the 84th Congress. the Cooperative Research Act of 1954, as an:tended. Washingion, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1967. 100 p. (Committee print). Unwin, Derek. Programrned instruction in the United Kingdom. Edu- cational technology, v. 10, July 1970 : 46-17. Unwin, Derek, ana F. Atkinson. The computer in education : a select bibliography. London, Library- Assooiation, 1968. 71 p_ Unwin., Derek, and John Leedhapa. Asilecfs of educational technology. Proceedings of the Programmed Learning Conference held at Loughborough, 15-18 ApriI 1966. London Methuen and Co, Ltd., 1967- 539 p. .*. The- use Of computers for instruction. NEA research bulletin, v. 49, March 1971 : Use of computers in education. Volume 1. Alexan.dria. Defense Docu- mentation Center for- Scientific and Technkal Information, 1969. 398 p. [ED 036 710]. (Clearinghouse for Federal ScientifiC ,and Tecluaical Information). , The use-ofTrogranied instruction in U.S. schools report of a sUrvey of the use of-Prograired instructional materials in-the public schools of the United-State> ...duringthey*I.:961.--62.-- New York, Columbia UniversitY, Instiiute for Educational Technoloay, 1963. 83 p. [ED 037 055]. 22 117 Theuse of programmed instruction in industrial training,a statement by the Central Training Coimcil, -memorandumno. 3. Loncion, British Ministry of Labour, 1966. [ED 015 427]. Uttal, Wifliath R., et al. Generative CAI in analyticalgeometry. Ann Arbor, Michigan University, Mental Health ResearchInstitute, 1971. 63 p. [ED 046 230]. Valdrnan, Albert. Programed instruction and foreign languagelearn- ingproblems and prospects. [Florida], 1966. 7p. [ED 011 743]. Valverde, Horace H., and Ralph E. Roberts. A responderfor use in programmed- lectures. Wright-Patterson AFB, Air ForceHuman Resources Laboratory, 1970. 22 p. [ED 044 031]. (NationalTech- nical Information Service). Van Campen Joseph A. Towards the automatic9.,-eneration of programmed foreign language instructional materials.Stanford Uni- versity, Institute for Mathematical Studies in SocialScience, 1971. 66 p. [ED. 046 222]. Wachtel, L. W. Programmed instruction with microfiche: introduction to the slide rule. Bethesda, Naval DentalSchool, 1970. 12 p. [ED 044- 915]. -( National Technical InformationService). Warner Dolores. Experimental phonetic reaffirm-program for excep- tionalpupils.. Los Angeles, California University,1967. 86 p. [ED 015 848]. Wastler, B. Jean ed. Project REFLECT: computer-assisted instruction project. Annual report June 1968to June 1969.. Rockville, Md., Montgomery County Public Schools, 1969. 124p. [ED 037 058]. Watkins, Lloyd. Computerson campus: three reports on what they're doing, what they could do. College anduniversity business, v. 48, May 1970: 71-76.- Way,- Florine L. The "language experience"approach in teaching readingcomputerized. Computers and automation,v. 19, Septem- ber 1970 : Weiner, Max; et al. An evaluationof the 1968-69 New. York Citycom- puter assisted instruction project in elementary arithmetic.P.-tper presented at annual meeting of the AmericanEducational Research Association, Minneapolis, 1970. City Universityof New York, Divi- sion of Teacher Education, 1970. 20p. [ED 040 576]. Weiss, James David. The relative effectsupon high school students of inductijie and programined instruCtion.in the close readino- of poetry. New York ,Umversity, 1968. 225p. [ED 041 885]. (Inn ilrbo-r,-University Aficrofilms, Wendt, Paul R, and Leslie Woelflin. Sirnulatiohof- computer-assisted ifistrUction (formerly developing conceptiin physics and geogr nhy at the senior high school level by siihnlatiOn.of conaputer-assisted insttuctiOn):. Final- report. :'St' Aiin, Mo.,Central Midwestern Re- -:gicmal EducatiOnalLaV.; 1968. 23p. [ED 032 758]. What can computers do foryou ? School Management, v. 10, September -1966 : 133=144: Whitloak, James W.- Auto-mated data -processingin' education. New Yorg-Macmillan Co., 1964:144p: Wightman,.Lawrence. What computerS-can do nOw. Papers presented attheNeW Eno-land:Educatioal ReSearchOrganization conference, - A - 118 Boston, 1970. Amherst, Massachusetts University, School of Educa- tion, 1970. 13 p. [ED 042 205]. Williams, Charles F., Alden S. Gilmore,andLeslie F. Malpass. Pro- gramnied instruction for culturally deprived slow-learning children. Journal of special education, v. 2, Summer-Fall 1968: 421-428. Williams, Everard M. Innovation in undergraduate teaching. Science, v 155, February 21, 1967 : 971-979. Wills, Martee. Dovack's machines help children read. American education v. 7, June 1971 : 3-8. Wilson H. A.,andR. C. Athinson. Computer-based instruction in initialreadinga progress report on th.e Stanford project. Stan- ford University, 1967. 110 p. [ED 015 847]. Woods, Elinor M. Recent applications of computer technologyto school testing programs. Review of educational research,v. 40, October 1970 : 525-539. Wriggle, Larry,andHerbert Hite. The amount and nature of teacher help necessary for optimum achievementthrough use of programed learmng devices. Olympia, Washington State Superin- tendent of Public Instruction, 1962. 37p. [ED 014 217]. Yankow, Henry, Ken R. McConnaughay,andTom Brigham. Read- er's guide to educational data processing articles, Nation's schools, v. 83;June 1969 : 89+. Yankow, Henry, James Steimle,andEdwin Ellis. Where to look for key educational data processing articles published in 1967. Na- tion's schools, v. 81, June 1968 : 77+. Yankow, Henry, Noel Swinford,andKen R. McConnaughay. Read- er's guide to EDP articles. Nation's schools,v. 85, June 1970 : 85+. Yarbrough, L. Everett. The Florida plan fora statewide education management information system. AEDS. journal,v. 3, September 196: 1-9. Yens, David P.,et al.The development and evaluation ofa computer- based pure tone audiometer trainer. Final report. University Park, Pennsylvania State University, Computer-Assisted Instruction Laboratory, 1969. 167 p.. [ED 043 236]. YOung, James P.;andLawrence M. Stolurow. A CAI study of learu- ing time and evolution. CaMbridge, Harvard University. Computation Laboratory, 1969. 25p. [ED 042 3211. (Clearing- house for Federal Scientific and Technical Information). Young, Jay A. Computers in chemical education;yes, no, or yes... if ? Journal of chemical education,v. 47, NovemLau- 1970 : -758-759. Young, Paul Alexander. An experimentin the use of programmed materials in teaching high school biology. ,.4.-thers, GeorgiaUni- versity, 1967. 321 p. [ED 028 929/ Zirm, Karl L. A basic reference. f on interactive use of computers for instruction. Series L Stanford. ERICClearinghouse on :Edu- cational Media and Technology, 1968. 20p. Computer technology for teaciibig and researchon instruction_ Review of educational research,v. 37, December 1967: 618-634. Instructional uses of interactive computersystems. Datama- tion, v. 14, September 1968: 22-27. Zinn, Karl L., and Susan McClintock- Aguide to the literature on interactive use of computers for instruction.Second editi,ya. Series Inlinir"""70^.e.ett,Trm,n!,r...w.

119 I. Stanford University, ERIC Clearinghouse on Educational Media and Technology, 1970.33 p. [ED 036 202].

E. VIDEO TAPE RECORDERS AND ELECTRONIC VIDEO RECORDING Aaron C., and R. Kahlenbcrg. Cartridges are coming ! Media and mediods.v. 72. September 1970 : 50+. Attea, W. J. VTR : in-service tool for improving instruction. Educa- tionrd leadership, v. 28, November 1970 : 147-150. Berwald, J. P. Videotape recorder as a teaching aid. French review, v. 43, May 1970 : 923-927. Brady, Elizabeth H., et al. The use of videotaPes in parent conferences. Young children, v. 23, May 1968 : 276-280. Brophy, John W. VTR integral to ckssroom instruction. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, April 1971 : 36+. Bumpass, Donald E. Video tape recorders : a help or a headache ? Clearing house, v. 44, May 1970 : 562-564. Cammack:, F. M., and E. A. Richter. Lang;uaae teaching with video tapes. Tokyo, British Council, Suzuki. Building, 1967.7 p. [ED 024 0171. Colton, F. V. Using videotapes in the socializationprocess. Audio- visual instruction. v. 16, February 1971 : 43 14. Cortes, Beverly, and Claire Ketcik. A comparative study of audio and video taping techniques as teaching tools for self discovery in the basic speech course (voice and diction). West Virginia Univer- sity. 1969.160 p. [ED 044 4051. (Ann Arbor, University Microfilms, Inc.). Crowley, Pat, and Shelley Surpin. The high school video worlhop. Big rock candy. mountain. April 1971 : 20:21. DeMott, Benjamm.-EVR : teacher in a cartridge. Change,v. 3, Janu- a ry-February 1971 : 40-43. Dillon, R. D., and R. L. Peterson. Tnfluence of videotaping techniques on student-teacher behavior in the classroom. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16. March 1971 : 63-65. Dotterweich. W. W. Enhancing: the effectiveness of remote ,teaching; electrowriters and VTR. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, February. 1971 : 39-42. Doyle, Charles P. The VT.R : an insight into education and teaching tools. Audiovisual instruction v. 14. October 1969: 76. Elliott, R. B., and D. H. Markham. Portable video'recorders in higher education. Audiovisual instruction, v. 15, December 1570: 46-48. Ever& Francis. TV cassettes: new communication phenomenon for 7tt the 70's. UNESCO features, no.,586. Nrver.ther 1979: 6-7. Expanding learning via videotape& American school and university, V. 39. April 1967 : 35-36. Giiku, R. Video cassettes : problem or solution ? Clearing house,v. 45, January 1971 : 319-320. Gordon, 'Richard J. The video tape recorder and the social-studies. Social studies v. 60, December 1969 : 325-326.. Hanna, 'Paul B. *Don't kid" yourself about videorecordcosts. School management; v: 15, July 1971 : 30-31. How videota-es revitalize teaching and learning. American school and university, v. 41, Apr-11119.6i: 41-42. 435-S6i-71-9 120

Jenkins, Esther C. Theefficacy of videotapesand direct observation for teaching observationalskills. Honolulu, University 1966. 130 p. of Hawaii, Kern, Edward. A good revolutiongoes on sale. Life, v. 69, October 1970 : 46-53. 16, Lewis. Philip. Cassettesgain versatility,compactness, flexibility. Na- tion's schools,v. 87, February 1971 : 100 +. VTRs combat EVRs withnew formats, portability. Nation's schools, v. 85, June 1970: 70 +. McIntire, W. Electronicvideo vecording. American v. 115. October 1970 : 43-50. annals of the deaf, Mother. Don. Electronic videorecordine. Scholastic teacher, uary 17, 1969 : 10 +. v. 94. Jan- Morrison. Virginia B.,andJohn. Childs. Strategiesfor the application of videotape in teachereducation. Audiovisual March 1969: instruction, v. 14. Neidt, Charles O. Use ofvideotaped instructionaltelevision for teachina.study skills ina university setting. Fort Collins. aversity,1966. 98 p. [ED 012 373]. Colorado State Nelson, Harold E.,et al.Instructionaluses of videotape : a svmposium. New York. SpeechCommunication Association, 043 627]. 1968. :22 p. [ED Parker, H. Video-taperecorder in education.Classical journal. February 1971: 234-235. v. 66, Parkhurst, Perrin E. Acomparative analysis ofthree new TV storage systems; electronic videorecording, selectavision,cassette videotape recordino. Audiovisualinstruction, v. 15, November1970 : 43-50. PensingerGlen. Videotape: mass medium forindividualized irstruc- tion. Scholastic teacher,v. 91. October 26. 1967: 22-23. Video tape recorders . :the, versatile middlemen.American school board journal,v. 155. April 1968 : 12-13. Perlberg, Arye, and DavidC. O'Bryant. The ing and micro-teaching use of video-tape record- techniques to improveinstruction on the higher education level.Urbana, Illinois University,Department of General Eni4neering,1968. 39 p. [ED 023 314]. Roush, Robert F.Research using the education. Educational leaderstip,videotape recorder :nteacher Skala, Martin. Video-cassette v. 28, May 1971 : 849-853. industry. ChristianScience monitor, December 28, 1970: 10;December 29, 1970: 10 ; December 30. 1970 7; Decen-iber 31. 1970: 6. : Smith, W. Somevery trenchant remafkson selling, buying and using VTR. Media and methods,v. 7. March 1971 : 19 +. Stroh, Thomas F. The uses of video tape in trainingand development. AMA research study,93. New York, Association. 1969. 59p. American Management Sund. R. D..andB. W. Tillery. Use ofthe portable television recorder in scienceeducation. S ience tape b 1969 : 417-420. education, v. 53, Decem- Tettenier, Clair R..andMichael P. Stowers.Field study: 746 users evaluate VTR's.Educational productreport, v. 3, December January 1970: 6-15. 19697 12 6

: 121 Wolfe, D. E. Using the videotape recorder (VTR) in the teacher training program. Hispania. v. 54, March 1971: 106-108. Worsnop, Richard L. Video revolution:cassettes and recorders. [Washington], Editorial research reports, v. 2, no. 12, 1971: 229 246.

F. INFOR3LA.TION RETRIEVAL AND DIAL ACCESS SYSTEMS Abbey, D. S. Information retrieval televisionan interim study. Audiovisual instruction, v. 16, February 1971: Abeson, Alan. The application of information retrieval techniques to the legal literature pertaining to the educdtion of handicapped children. Law and computer technology, December 1970: 274-280. Adair, Charles H., and Rodney F. Allen. Student attitude toward information retrieval. Tallahassee, Florida State University, Com- puter-Assisted Instruction Center, 1970. 6p. [ED 045 714]. Billowes. C. A. Information retrieval by television. Don Mills, On- tario, Southam Business Publications, 1968. [ED 030 320]. Blackwell, F. W., et al. Educational informationsystem design ; a conceptual framework. Sa?qa Monica, Rand Corp., 1970.18 g. [ED 045 096]. (Nt:4ienal Teclmical Infortnation Service). Borman, Lorraine. The use of information files and informationre- trieval systems within the univJrsity environment. Evanston, North- western University, Vogelback Computing Center, 1970. 20p. [ED 045 094]. (Natioral Technical Information Service). College core; Ithaca's instructionalresources center includes a dialaccess-information-retrieval-system for students. Collegemanage- ment. v. 4, November 1969 : 23-26. Crossman, D. M. Current state of the remoteaccess audio video information system. Audiovisual instruction,v. 15, September 1970: 20-23. Essman, Philip. Dial access information retrievalsystems in Southern California. Visual education, May 1970: Estarellas, Juan. Audio-visual information retrievalsystem and technological instructionexperiences with thenew educational revolution. Paper prepared for the 2nd AMA InternationalConference and Exhibit on Educational Technology, Atigust1966. 18 p. [ED 013 544]. Foley, Walter J. Follow-up of operation Head Start participantsin the State of Iowa. Final report. Iowa City, IowaUniversity, 1967. 23 p. [ED 015 771].- Gibson, D. M. Dial access systems; Beverly Hills, California. Today's

educatiOn, v. 59, November 1970: 35. - How to take the wraps offyour AV program. School management. v. 12. February 1968 : 64+. Jernigan, William W. One who DAIReda dialaccess system. Wilsoi1 library thilletin, v. 44, February 1970: 653-657. John, R. Information storage and retrieval: computers take the search out of research. Music educators journal,v. 57, January 1971: 127 129 Kimball, J. E.(lid T. Tohn College AC1T data information storage and retrieval. Journal (yr educational data procsin 4, iN70 229-238. 10. Kraft, P. If. P.,fir ti -S. Padro. Decisions, data needs andI1 I al11)0Wer p1;11111ilig opertai011S. Educational technology,v. 11, March 1971: 13-15. Lally, Dale V.,ji-Dial access at Marquette University.NA til-A) join- in! i, V. OCtober 1970 : 50-63. Margolin J. B., awl 'AI. E. Malvane. Future of remote access educatiomd syStkiniti Educationid technoloo-y,I-. 10, .1anuary 1970 : 7-60. :i: ukte\ H E,, a-nd S. .1. Dwyer.Random-accessible, itudiovisual information terminal. Audiuvisualinstruction, v. 10, February 1971:

'Nfiller, J. Information retrieValsysteins_; in guidance. Personnelt guid in ce journal,v. -IA NOVeniber 1070 : 212-218. AIottot, 1)%rilit 1 I anaging ( la migrantSt wient education in forma- _tion system. AEDS -monitor,v. 9, April 1971 : 4-6. Nixon,_ L._ D. Remoteticcess instructiomillearning system(RAILS). Audiovisual instruction,v. 15, December 1970 : Not th E .St a fford. "Dial-access-as an instructional medium. Wash- ington, Academy for . ioiod Dev ph-Ft-Anent. inc. One of thesup- pot_t papers for "To ImproveLearning; _a 1-eport to. the President and the Congtess of Ow UnitedStates by the COMMisSiCWOn Instruc- tional Technology." 1970.23 p. LED 039 7121. °flesh. Gabriel D. State of theart of dial access information retrieval. Interim reporton library research. Washington, CatholicUrihrer- sity of Anmrica, 1067. 56p. [ED 017 3071. Porter, Billy L. Dialaccess information retrieval : where dowe go from here ? Educational television,v. 2, June 1970 : 24-26. Rubinotr, Morris, et a7. Experimentalevaluation of informationre- trieval tin-ouelt a teletypewriter."Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Uni- versity, 1967. 27 p. ED 028 our, Robert A. Wlutt's happenhig withinformation retrievalsys- -,ems? Audiovisual instruction,V. 16, February 1971 : 29-30. nger, Tra T Atidio-visnal dialaccess informittion retrieval and the user. Audiovisual media, v. 4, Spring 1970: 17-23. The dial_ select stoi-y--WestHartford, Connecticut. Audio- visual instruction, v. 12, May1967:446-449. SwanSon, Rowena 1V. Trends ininformafion handling in the United States. Arlington, Air Force Officeof Scientific Research, Director- ate of Information Science, 1970.43 p. [ED 045 1701. (National Technical Information Service). TanzmanJack. West Hartford: tooling up for tomorrow today. School manki'ement, v. 12, September 1968: 12-13. Zazzaro, Joanne. They've almost inventedinstant learning. American school board journal,v. 156, September1968 :10-13.

G. GAMES AND SMUTATION bt, Clarlc Serious games. New York, VikingPress, 1970. 176 p Adair, Charles H., et cii.Two simqated inquiry environments: a social simulation ra1ne and 1a CAI-based information retrieval system. 128 Tallahassee, Florida State jniversity, Cm__ er-Assisted Instruc- tion Centei MO. TS p. [ED 045 712]. Attig, Jolm L. The use of gailu ,a 4amir4-ea c1 tecl1nlquL . Soci al studies V. 58, January 1967:-- Beals, P.E. Games and 1I1Tflh1dt1onS rade teacher, V. 88, March 1971 : Boardman, Gerald B A t omnpnterIsed feedback model for simulation exercises itwoh7in, _S( Iu,w idnuiiiistiitoi-._Fin0 report._ Madi-

son, WiseonsM University, . -!partment of Educational Adminis- tration. 1969. 292 p. [ED 039 Boblick, J.M. Use of computer simulations in the teaching of high school physics. Science educafion, V. 54, January 1971 : 77-81. Boocock, Sarane S. Changing the structure of secondary education with simulated environments. Educational technology, v. 8, Feb- rum y 1:7), 1968 : Sinmlation games today. Educatio technology, v. 8, April 30, 1968 : 7-10. Simulation games todayJR. Educ ation al technology, v. 9, February 1969 : 14-15. Boocock, Sarane S._ and Jit 7-olenn in Games with simulated environments in learning. Souology of education, V. 39, Summer 1966 : 215-236. Boocock, Sarane S.,_ rucI E.( ) Schild. _Simulation games in learning. BeVerly Hills, Cal mnia, S iupublications. Inc., 1968, Carlson, Elliot. Gam s in the c assrooln. Saturdtiy review, v. 50_pril 15. 1967 : 62-64. Learning thrall approach to probiem solving. Washirip-ton, Public Press, 1969.183 p. Christine, Chiirles, mid Dorothy Christine. Four shnulation games that teach. Grade teacher. V. 85. Oetober1967: 109-120. Cop.swell, John F. Constrnction and use of the school simulation vehi- cle. Santa -Monica., California, System Developinent Corp., 1964. 21 p. [ED 010 581]. NeW SollitionS to implementirtg instructional media through analysis and simulation of school organization. Santa. Monica, Cali- fornia, System Development Corp., 1964 U p. [ED 010 5801. s veil. John F., et al. Analysis of instructional systems. Report of project, new solutions to implementing instructional media throrkgh analysis_ and simulation of school Organization. Final report. Santa SIonica, California, SvP1 DeVelopinent Corp., 1966. 272- p. LED 010 577]. Coleman. .railleS S. Academic games and ieai fling NASSP bulletin, v. 52. February 1968 : 62-72. Lemming through punes. NEA joiumal, v. 56, January 1967: Playing politics in the classtoom. Independ -t school bulletin. v. 28, October 1968: 29-30. Coleman, James S., Sarane S. Boocock, and E. 0. Schild, eds. Simula- tion games -and learning behavior. Plias I. and H. American Be- haVioral Scientist, v. 10, October and November 1966: entire issues. Egerton. John. Academic. games: play as vou learn. Southern education report, V. 1, 'Marck-April 1' 4

Friodman. I.,. A. Introducingnew wati . for ethaattiou :And behavior engincoring.Edu itinu al, theory, Winter 1971 : 59=69. !dIIt(pupils play. Nation's schools.v. so, octohey 1.)(: c)24 . Garvey. Dale Al. Simulation. role-playingand SOCI0d111111a ill theSOCIa 'studies. Emporia. Kinisas. EmporiaState research studies, Kansas Stato Teachers College.V. 16. no. 2, 1967. :14 p. aron, ,Tohn D. Labor vs. management:it simulatim (into. Social 0(h:cat ion,. 3) . October 1966 : 421 -422. War and peace :a simulation game. Social education, November 1966 521-522. v. Greenlaw, Paul S., Iiiehard 1 1 i wdon, Lowell -W. IJei t oil Busi- ness simulation in industrial and universityeducation. EngloWOOCI N.J., Prentice-Hall. 1962. 356p. Guetzkow, Harold Stoem ed.Simu1 tdi01). Social science : readings. Enplowood (lifts. N.J.. 1310ntico-Ifall. 1962. 199 p. Gustallon, Kent ISinthlatiOn of interliersonal relati Audiovismil instruction, v. 16, .1anuary 1971 11.einkol. O. Eva Illatioll of simulationas it whing fournal of exporbuental oductition,v._38, Spring 1070: 32-36. Henderson. Bob (L. ma/ W.(l-9or!ro. G:tines. Assossment ofelect orl simulations and(ra Vries for tho socittl studiesocial education. May 1971 : 508-513. Hogan. Arthur ,1. Simulation: an aim°, d bibliogr,.p. Social education, v. :12, Min.ch 1968: 242--244. tforn. Robert .E., add DavidW. Zuckepnan. edN. The direi toi T f educational !mines and simulations.Cambridge. Atass.. Resources. Inc.,1970. follEie., Petti171101111 simulations: now aids to teach and lotn about cities. Educational technology.v. 10, October 1970: 46-48. Tngraham, Leonard 1)7.Totichei, computers. andgames: innovations in the social studios, Socialoducationo% 31. January 1967:51. Ktichtituroff, Grace. Studentinvolvement in social studiesthrough sinmla t ion. Clearinff. house,V. 45, Atay 1971 : 541-544. Kaplan, Alice ,T.. and-MartinS. Gordon. A critique of'War or peace: a simulation game. Social oducati011,V. 31, May 1967: :183. Karweit, Nancy, and SanmelA. Livingston. GroupVersus iMbvidual performance and le;irningin a computer study. Ilaltimm.e, Johns game: an explotatory 891. Hopkins University, 1)69.26 rL [ED 032 Kraft, I Pedagogicalfutility in fun tindpames? january.1.967: 71-72. NEI journal Leo, Tlichard 1-1.Cabinets in crisis;an experiment in viewer-respon- SiVe televised simulation forchissi.00ms. .Audioyisual .14, April 1969: 49-52. instruction, The most dangerousgame : an experiment in viewer-responsive television. Audiovisualinstruction, v. 13, May1968: 475-476. Loudon, Herbert T. Thefutility of testing:simulations ast "tesr case. Ediwatiornd leadership,v. 28,, October 1970: 93-95. Marten, Milton, (..,t SiMuhiti4.ni-focuson decision makit points, v_ 46,no. 1, 1070 : entieo View- iMay, Lola June. Educational games in in it'i Audiovisual instrueti-n, v. 14, February 1969: 27-29., 170 McKay, William. Computer-directed i Itrt1Ci ional mes._udiovisual instruction, v. 14, 1 969 :37-40. McNair. Douglas D., trial Alfred P. -West. Develop--1( Ntiiid testing of a high school business game. Final report. 1 970. 7 [ED 040 606 1. Moncrief, 1)rue, '1 he Sumerianu 111W: teachiniy ecomumcs with a computer. 1'11%1)9T:tined instruction, v. 4, February 1965 Baser, John 11. Sinmlittion and societyin exploraftm of scientific p.aming. Boston, Allyn and Baccm, .1969. 1S01). Ri7dgeway, j Games in fahuland: teachingdevice- Ne v republic 155, August 27, 1966: 17-1 S. Riley, Chester A. new tool for decisimi-making. ( 'iiiai :4, February 1 9 69 : 29-30. Rop.ers, Virginia M. Simulation in preparing social studies Social edueation, v. 34, March 1 970: 33 7-340. Shapiro, Arthur. Are you game to play grievances. Nation's sch V. 83, ,Tune 19 69: 5o -F. Shirts, R. Garry. Simulations, ,(rtunes, and rehtted activities for ele- mentarv classrooms. Social education, v. ;15, March 1 971300-304. Sluthik, Slatting ed. Gaine theory and related approaches to social havior. New York, John Wiley and Sons, 19641. Simulation giunes for educition. Educational productrep rt Februay 1971: 7. Simulation games for the social studies classroom. New dinIsions; booklets on the social studies and world affairs, Ne York, Foreign Polie.y Association, 196S. 56p. Simulation in education and train hip% Educ:itiontil technol October 1 960: 43-70.

Simulation :the game explosion. Social educati ,v. . ruary 1969: 1_76+. Simu-school : ne iune " fo ro p P1 I111i1flN ttieiui shools. v. 87, January .1971 : 15. Stark-. George K. A."Imes theory in ((Ii1it 1u71 chool.nd society. v.% January 20, 1968 : 43-14. Stoll, C. Games students play; with list of selectedgames. Media and methods. v. T. October 1970 : 37-41. Stoll, Clarice S., and Sarane S. Booeock. Simulationgames for soc lal studies. Audiovisual histalietion,y. 13. October 1908 : 840-842. Stoll. Clarice S.. and Michael :Inbar., ed8 OC Vt] shnulations. can behavioral scientist, v. 12, July-Au.v.ust 1 9 69: entirv issue. Tansey. P. J., aad Derek Unwm. Simulation and gaining in education. London, Methuen Educational Ltd., 1969. 152p. 'reaching Research. Instructional uses of siinulation: aselectedbibli- ography. Monmouth, 01.egon, Tend-ling Researelt..a division of the Orepon State -System of Higher Education, 1967. Thompson- Fred A. Gaming vitt computer simulation teChniques for junior college economics education. Final report. California, River- side City College, 1968. 73 p. [ED 021 5491. Twelker, Paul A. A basic reference shelfon simulatidh and iiauiuiig . Series IStanford, ERIC ClearinghouseOn Edtwafional Media and Technology, 1970.16 p. Instructional simulation systems; an annotated bibliourapliv. Corvallis, Oregon, Continuing Education Publications, 1969.28 6 p. 126

Wern Roland, Joan Werner. bibliographyof sinmlations: so- citAl systems andt.'ducntion, La .Toll:A, Ctdiforni,t,Western Be- luivioral Sciences Institute,1969. 118 p. Wilson. Charles Z. Use ofcomputer simuhd ion techniques inqinezi- tional 1)1 aithin0-. -Urban education.v. 5. lpri 1 1970 : 3-19. ng, Riduird L., el al, The production andevaluation of threecom- puter-based economicsgames for the sixt-L urade.. Finalreport. Westchester County Board ofCooperat ive Education Se1 vices,1907. p. FED 014 227].

Asp LARN I NO Chenucal transfer Of learning'?(Int rview witl Dr. G. 1. dav's education.I-. 8. FebrIla PY 1969 : 45-47. Ernst, Leonard. New minds for old:can chemicals sti mulate learning capacity? Nation's schools,i. 85, February 1970: m; 57. Field, Roger Kenneth. Thefinal solution for stupidity.Esqu March 1909 : 04+. ve ma1-1 "syc hoc 1 ie1st ry :pci oii -1 1 it y by prescri Playboy,V.15. November 1968 :110 . DaN-id. The chemistry of ltv ii tug S ii iii dav January 20. 1908 48 + Don't use Lhe kitchen-sinkan rl gl'h 1.0 en I IC lmlucnt TOdiy S ethic:thou, v. 59. October 1970: :11 . Psvehonem.obiochemedlication. rhiDelta 1Cappat A), Ma rch 1969 : 370-215. Ladd, Edward T. Pills ferchissroom peace? Saturday1 C 1 iew. \- November 21, 1970: 664 . Laufer, Maurice W. Medications,learning. ;Ind. behavior. Phi Delta Kappan,v ovember 1970 : 169-170. Panel sanctions amphetaminesfor hyperkinetic children.Science 171, March 26. 1971: 1223. Report of the Conferenceon the Use of Stimulant, Drugs in the Treat- ment of Behaviorally Distuisbed YoungSchoolchildt-en. Insertion by Don. Cornelius E. Gallagher(N.J.) in the Cong,ressional Record. v. 117, March 10, 1971 : E1735-31. (Daily edition). Stein, Donald G., and John .T. Brink.Memoi-y drugs plobe the chemistry of learning. Scientific research,v. 3, September 2, 1968: 45+. U.S. Congress. House. Committeeon Government Operations. Fed- eral involvement in theuse of behavior modification drugson 0-ra mar sdiool childrn of the ighLr to privacy inquiry.1- a Subcommittee. 91st Congress, 9nd Ir')cfore sess. Washington U S.Govt. Print. Oft., 1970. Hearing heldSeptember 29. 1970. 17.) Vinnedge, Harlan. Politicians whowould practice mediumdrugs for children. New republic.v. 1641, March 1 3, 1911 : 1 3-15. IIL ORGANIZING FORINSTRUCTION

A. CoNsorm T EDUCATION AND TECII NOLOGY Beaird, James 11. The Idaho Consortiumacase study. Insert.on by Iron. Orval Hansen( Idaho) in the Congressionr,l Record,v.16, December 30,1970: E10842-45. (Daily edition). Belton, John Raynor. Wisconsin'snew aistrict educational serv ce agencies. Jounialon State school systems development,v. 1. May 1969: 203-222. Brown, George W., James G. Miller,wa Thomas A. Keenan. EDUNET; report of -,hesummer study on information networks conductedbytheInteruni versityCom? nunicat ionsCouncil (EDUCOM). New York, John Wileyand Sons, 1967.400 p. Browne, Duff, awl Mary HowardSmith. The_ investigation, develop- menf, and dissemination of proceduresaria techniques helpful to interinstitutional use of television andrelated media. Final report. Atlanta, Southern Regional EducationBoard, 11;67.83 p. [ED 021 443]. Bunnell. Kevin P.; d Eldon L. Johnson. Interinstitutionalcoopera- tion. IA Higher efilication:some newer developments, edited by Samuel Baskin. New York, McGraw-Hill,1965 : 246-271. Cadbury, William E. Jr., Cooperative relationsinvolving the liberal arts colleges. Schoo'l and society,v. 94, April 16-30,1966: 213-21' Clay, Grady. College consortia. Insertionby Hon. William O. Cow- crer (Kentucky) in the Congressional Record,v. 115, January 15, 1969 E266-69.(Daily edition). Colleges unite in troubled times. Businessweek, April 3,1971; 90. Coss, Timothy C. Consortiums. Americaneducation, v. 4, June 1968: 27-29. Ely, Donald P. Consortium in educationalmedia and technology. Edu- cational technology, v. 9, January 1969: 33. .The invisible college. Audiovismilinstruction, v. 12, Decem- ber 1967 : 1038-1039. Feezle2 William R. Educational servicecenters. Education digest, 35, October 1969 : 52-54. Howard, La wrence C., ed. Interinstitutionalcooperation in higher education. Proceedings of the Conferenceon Interinstitutional Co- o era tion in Higher Education, Wingspread, Racine,Wisconsin, arch 3-4,1967. Milwaukee, Institute of HUmanRelations, Univer- sity of Wisconsin, [1968]. 555p. Johnson, Eldon L. Consortia in -higher education.Educational record, v. 48, Fall 1967 341-347. Kroepsch, Robert 11. Regional cooperation in highereducation. Com- pact, v. 4, Apri11970 : 35-38. . McCarton, Edward F. EDUCOM and the applicationsof technology. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, December1968: 1071-1973. (p7) 65- 133 128 Meaney, John W. Networks forknowledge. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, December 1968 : 1064 1066. Miller, James G. EDUCOM: Mteruniversity com_ unications oun- cil. Science, v. 154, October 28, 1966:483-488. Moore, Raymond S. Consortiums inAmerican IlighEl education: 1965- 66. Report of an exploratory study. Wash ington, U.S. Govt. Print. Off., 1968 : 47 p Petrie, Thomas A. Cooperativesacentralization a Itemo tive. nino: and ch anging,V. 1, January 1971 : Pfeiffer,j. Network facilities offer academicexpertise ; Kinsas City regional council for higher education.1.\_udiovisual Mstruction,v. 16, February 1971 : 15-16. Rhodes. Charls. School technologyacross State lines. Compact. v April 1970 : 31-33. _aleflio, Mary Dolores. Patterns ofinterinstitutional cooperationii American Catholic higher education.National Catholic Educationa Association bulletin, v. 62, May 1966: 1-31. Salwak, Stanley F. New patterns ofinstitutional cooperation;COM- pacts and consortia. Journal of higheredncation, v. 39 De her 1968 : 490-496. Soutlwrii Regional Education Board. Expandiigopportunities; case studies of interinstitutional cooperation,1969. Atlanta. The Board, [I970]. 44 p Todd, C. C., fr. Ethleati011al cooperatives.Clearing house. V. 45, Febru- ary 1971 : 383-384. Witman, Shepherd L. Inter-insti(lttionalcooperation and inte_ tional education. Occasional mport,no. S. New York, Education and World Affairs, 1969. 72p. B. TEAM TEACHING Atwood, R. K. Team tLaching: new iijoTels it, e needed. Science teacher. v. 37. January 1970 : 59-60. Beggs, David W., ed. Team teachingboldnew venture. Indianapolis. Unified College Press, 1904. 220p. Borg, W. R. Te:Lcher effectiveness in team teaching.Journal of experimental education, v. 35. Spring 1967: 65-70. Chamberlin, Leslie J. Team teachino; organizationand administration. Columbus, Ohio, Charles Et.' Publishing Co., 1969. p. Davis, J. Michael. Team teaching: a model for educational -!hange. Appalachia, v. 3, June-July 1970: 39-41. Davis, H. S. Team teaching; a selected annotated bibliography.Cleve- land, Educational Research Council of Greater Cleveland,1967. 54 p. Enzman, Arthur M. Developing new teaching teams. Childhoodedu- cation v. 47, December 1970 : 131-1341 Fea, H. R. Team teaching : psychological implications. Clearinghouse, v. 43, November 1968 : 177-179. Fraenkel, J. R. Comparison of aclnevement between studentstaught by a teaching team and students tauffht traditional classes, ona standardized-examination in United ,States .history.ournal of educational reseaich, v. 61, September 196 34 129 Fraenkel, Jack R.. and Richard E. Gross. Team teaching :let's 10 k lwfore we leap ! Social education, v. 30, May- 1966 : 335-337. .Ff-edenburgh, Franz A. Innovating instruction through team teaching. Junior college journal, v. 37, October 1966 : 12-17. Funaro, G. J., E. L. Phillipt,, and J. A. Meyer. Team teaching. Clear- ing house, v. 43, March 196? : 401-410. Georgiades, W., J. R. Fraenkel, and R. E. Gross. Team teaching : opmions differ. NE A journal, v. 56, Apri I 1967 : 11 17. Glenn, E. E. Plan ahead for team teaching. American school board journal, v. 154, June 1967 : 33-35. !_loldstein, W. Problems in team teaching. Clearing honse, v. 42, Octo- ber 1967 : 83-86. Team planning- heart transplant in teaching. Clearing house, v. 43, January 1969 : Hanslovsky, Glenda, Sne Moyer, and Helen Wagner. Why team teaching? Columbus, Ohio, Charles E. Merrill Publishing Co., 1969. 128 p. Jenkhis, K. D. Teaming and teaehing. Aearing house, V. 4. October 1967: 80-82. Korb. M. V. Positive and negative factors in team te iihinMathe- matics teacher, v 61. January 1968 : 50-53. Maurer, D. C. Pair learnMg techniques in high school. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 49, June 1968 : 609-610. McLane. M. Team teachMg and objective evaluation. Clearing house, V. 44, November 1969 : 374-178. Meyer, J. A. Group grope : problems of team teaching. Clearing house, v. 42, February 1968 : 362-364. Salvaging team teaching. Clearing house v. 44, December 1969: 203-205. Powell, Jack, and Ernst Lau. How we cut our teeth on team teaching. NaCon's schools, v. 79, February 1967 : 69-71. Shaprm, Judson T.! a;id Henry F. Olds, jr., eds. Team teaching. New York, Harper and Row, 1964.430 p. Shawver, D. E. Team teaching : how successful is it ? Clearing house, v. 43, September 1968 : 21-26. ler, C. Edward. Team teaching; its operational definition, its his- toneal development nationally, and a description of programs in the senior high schools of Oreuon. Eugene, Oregon Oregon School Study Council, University of Oregon, 1967. 77

C. INDIVIDUALIZED INSTRUCTION Abington Conlerence on New Directions in individualized Instruc- tion, Willow Grove, Pa., 1967.. Proceedings. Abington, Pa., Abing- ton Conference [19681 88 p. Arena, John E.,A'.n instrument for individualizing instruction. Educa- tional leadership, v. el, May 1970 : 78787. Baker, Gail L'. and Isadore Goldberg. The individualized learning system; what it is and how to use it....Educational leadership, v. 27, May 1970 : 775-780. Beck, Isabel E, and John 0. Bolvin. A model for non-gradedness : the reading program for individually prescribed instruction. Pitts- 130 burgh University, LearningResearch and Development Center, 1969. 8 p. [ED 033 832]. Behrendt, David. Away with tradition.American education,v. 6, Januarv-February 1970: 18-22. Bishop, Lloyd K. Individualizingeducational systems. New York, Harper and Row, 1971. 276p. Blake, Howard E., and Aml W.McPherson. Individualized instruc- tionwhere are we ?; a guide for teachers. Educational technology, v. 9, December 1969 : 63-65. Blount, Nathan S., et al. The effectof a study of grammaron the writing of eighth-grade students.Report from the individually guided instruction in English language, composition,and literature project. Madison, Wisconsin University,Research and Development Center for Cognitive Learning, 1968.51 p. [ED 036 515]. Bolvin, John a Individually prescribedinstructionreading program. Paper presented at College Reading AssociationConference, Knoxville, 1968. 16p. [ED 026 202]. Bolvin, John 0., and Robert Glaser.Developmental aspects of individually prescribed instruction.Audiovisual instruction,v. 13, Oc- tober 1968 : 828-831. Braeht, Glenn H. Experimental factorsrelated to aptitude-treatment interactions. Review of educationalresearch, v. 40. December 1970: 626-645. Braddock, Clayton. Computer fitsteaching to individual student. Southern education report,v. 3, February 1968 25-29. Bratten, Jack E. The organizationof interrelated individualprogress and ability levelcourses in mathematics at Garber High School [Essexville, Michigan]aa introduction. Santa Monica, Califortha System Development Corp., 1966.18 p. [ED 010 574]. The organization of interrelatedindividual progress and ability level courses in mathematicsat Garber High School [Essex- ville, Michigan]descriptiveanalysis. Santa Monica, System De- velopment Corp., 1966. 20p. [ED 010 575]. The organization of interrelated individualprogress and abil- level courses in mathematicsat Garber High School [Essexville, fS{it analysis and simulation, SantaMonica, System Development Corp., 1966. 30p. [ED 010 576]. Committee on Experimental Programto Improve Educational Achievements in Special Service Schools.Individualized instruction. In Final report submittedto the Superintendent of Schools. New York New York City PublicSchc,ols, 1968 Appendix E. Crawford, I>. G., and R. G. Ragsdale. Inthvidualizedquasi instructional systems for the 70's.Interchange, v. 1, no. 4, 1970: 70-81. Drumheller2 Sidney J. Usinggroup work in developing functional concepts in an individualized instructionsetting. Journal ofsec- ondary educationv. 45, May 1970 : 230-237. Dunn, James A. Tlie development ofprocedures for the individualization of educationalprograms. Paper presented at the annualcon- vention of the Americim PsychologicalAssociation, Miami Beach, 1970.17 p. [ED 048 700 1. 131 Dunn, James A. The PLAN approach to curriculum definition. Edu- cation, v. 90, February-March 1970 : 221-226. Eisenhardt, C. T. Individualization of instruction. Elementary Eng- lish. v. 48, March 1971 : 341.-345. Eshensen, Thorwaid. Workin!--r with individualized instruction : the Duluth experience. Pt-do -_lto, Fearon Publishers, 1968. 1.22 p. [ED 033 090.1. Fairman, Alarvin. Individualizing instruction through IP1 Educa- tional feadei.ship, N'. 28, NOVember 1970 : 133-136. Fehde, Carl C. A look at IPI. Educational leadet.ship, S, February 1971: 480-483. Fisher, Jack R. An investigation of three approaches to the teaching of mathematics in the elementary school. Pittsburgh University, School of Education, 1967. 236 p. [ED 036 1971. (Ann Arbor, Uni- versity Microfilms. Inc.) FlanaganJohn C. Functional education for the seventies, Phi IVta kappan, v. 49. September 1967 : 27-33. Individnalizing education. Education, v, 90, FebrUary-March 1970: 191-206. Project Plan. Clearing house, v. 43, September 1968: 63-64. Project Plan : basic assumptions, implementation, and sionifi- cance. Journal of secondary education, v. 46, April 1971 :173'1178. -oject Plan : the basic role of guidance in individualizing education. Washington, American Institutes for Research; American Personnel and Guidance Association, 1970. 13 p. [ED 039 676]. Frozier, Alexander, ed. A curriculum for children. Washington, Asso- ciotion for Supervisionncl Curriculum Development, National Education Association,_ 1960. 143 p. [ED 040 494]. Gehret, Kenneth G. Richland's teachers prescribe instruction the way doctors prescribe pills. American school board journal, v. 157, An- gust 1969 : 24-27. Aser, Robert. The program for individually prescribed instruction. Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh University, Learning Research and Devel- opment Center, 1966. 17 p. [ED 010 519]. Howes, Virgil M. Individualizing instruction in science and matl_- matics. New York, Macmillan Co.-, 1970. 213 p. [ED 043 488]. Hunt, Lyman C.- jr. Updatino: the individual approach to reading : IPI or IRP? litper presentA at the conference of the International Reading Association., Anaheim, 1970. 11 p. [ED 044 244]. Individualized school in_structionis it the 'new way" in education? Government executive, v. 1,:july 1969: 52-54. _thdividually prescribed instruction , Education U.S.A. special report. Washington, Education U.S.A., 71968. 32 p. Jackson, John W. The individualized school journal of secondary education, v. 41, May 1966 : 195-200. Jones, Riehard V. Learning- activity packages: an approach to individualized instruction. Journal ot secondary education, -r. 48, April 1968 :- 178.. Kapfer, Philip a, and Gardner Swenson. Individualizing instruction for self-paced learning. Clearing house, V. 42, March 1968: 405.- La Plante, William A. Real reforins still needed 'on individualization. Nation's schools, v. 87, February 1971 : 64. Learning packages : symposium. J oIirii1 (ifecanc1ar3r edneatiot 16! May 1971: entire issue. Leavitt, William. Imlividuals front andcenter. American education v. 5, February 1909: 5-6. Lindvall, C. and John Iiolvm. Thc2 prova. tor indiviually prescribed instruction. 'no Oakleaf project.Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh -University, Learning Research and DevelopmentCenter, 1966. 10 p. I ED 010 522]. The role of the tt u lici n individually prescribedinstrt. =ti'- Educational _technology, v. 10, Fehrmtry 1970:3T-41. ami Riclvird C. (i_ox. The role of ilii ii ion in pro- rrrams for individualized instruction, Pittsburgh University,Learn - _Mg Research and Development. (1:enter,1960. 31 p.lED OVi 3011._ McKeegzin, Thigh F. What_ individualizinginstruction means to the curriculum director. Audiovisual instruction,v. 13, :A:larch 1068 : Q3Q-237. Mitzel, Harold E. 'The impendinginsti iu I ion olut i oii Phi De'a. Kappan. v. 1, April 197o ,t34-439. Morgan, flobert M. ES '70--a steni itiipp roach educatim clian. Educational technoloc. ptember 1969: 49-51. New approach to individmtlizing instiiict.ion.Princeton, ,ducationa 1 Testing Service, 1065.1421), ODomia, Patrick A, and CharlesW. Lavaroni. Elements of individualized instruction. Education digest,V 36, September 1970 : 17-19. Oettinger, Anthony G. The myths ofeducational technology. Satur- day review, v. 51, May 18, 1068: 76+, Ogston, Thomas J. Individualizedinstruction: changing the role of the teacher. Audiovisual instruction,v. 13, March 1068 : 243-248. asmussen. L. y. Meaing the critics' demands for qualityeducation thronah individualized instruction. AirForeci 9d space digest, v. 52, January 1969 : 73-76. Research for B.etter Schools,- Inc. A.progress report : individually prescribed instruction. Philadelphia.Research forBetter Schools, Inc., 1969. 56 p. Ritter, Myron:W. Individualized study inCoatesville. NASSP bull tin, v. 54, November 1970: 7048. Sarber, Evan R. Individualization of instructionfor teacher corps- men. Philadelphia, Temple University, 1968. 19p. [ED 026 341]. Scanlon,: Robert -G. The expansion of.an. innovation.. Audiovisual in7 struction, v. 13, November 1968:, 946-948. Individually prescribed instruction:a. system of .individnal- imd instruction. Educational technology,v. 10. December 1070: Scanlon Robert G., and Mary V. Brown.Inservice education for indivfdualizedinstruction. Educational: technology,v 10, Febru- ary 1070 : 6244, Shane, Harold G. A curriculum continuum:possible trends, in the . 70's.. Phi Delta Kappan,- v.. 51, March .1970:. 389-392. Sinks, Thomas., A. Individual_progress ; a study of seventh graders.

Clearing house, v..44, April 1970 457-460. , 8 133 Span Wino- Robert L The sonthside experiment in personalized edu CatiOn Diii irini, Duke University, 190. 16 p. [ED 042 505]. Tramel, Mary C. Use Norwalk's itlea and most of your teenacrers will learn at their own pace. Amek An school boardjournar,v. 158. March 1971 : 4647. Wade, Serena, E. A Imsie reference shelf on individualized instruction. Stanfoid, ERIC Clearing house on Educational Media and Technology, 19GS. 20 p. Wiener, illiam K., Andrew C. Biondolillo, and rold ,T. Rankin. Reorganizing the schools for IPI. NASSP bullet.n, v. 55, March 1971:59-67. WeisfYci her, Robert A., and Harold F. Rahmlow. Individually managed learthng. Audiovisual instruction, v. 13, October 1968: 835- 839. Wille, Lois. Room for miracles. American education, v. 5, August- September 1969 : 7-10. Williamson, Wayne E. A new learning center thrives in New York. Clearing house, v. 45, September 1970: 26-28. Wine, William, and Jack R. 17isher Iiidi vlumllv dreseribed instruc- 'ion mathematics program. Audiovisual sources, 1969. 360 p. [ED o36 156]. Wolfe, Arthur B., and Jamos E. Smith. At Nova, education comes in small packages. Nation's schools, v. 81, June 1968: 48+. Yeager, John L. Measures of learnhig rates for elementary school students in mathematics and -reading under a program of Mdividu- ally prescribed instruction. Pittsburgh, University of Pittsburgh. 92 p. [ED 010 209].

D. INDEPENDENT STUDY Alexander, William M. and \Tyner. k. Hines. Independent stud secondary schools. New York, Holt. Rinehart and 'Winston, 1967. 200 p. Beltz, George, and Dixie A. Kohn. Independent study in five Mis- souri high schools. Clearing house, v. 44, February 1970: 334-337 Berg, David W. An option plan; learning is student-centered. Clear- ing house v. 45, October 1970 : 107-111 Bockman, John F. A system of instruments for the manaftement of independent study. Tucson Public Schools, 1970. 64 p. [ED 044 964]. Brown, B. Frank. Education by appointment ; nPw approaches to independent study. West Nyack, N.Y., Parker Publishing Co., 1968. iThp.

Dwyer. Donald P. 'To all seniors: you're on your own.' NASSP hulle- tin, v. 54, November 1970 : 58-69. Empey, Donald H. What is independent study all about? Journal of seeondary education, v. 43, March 1968 : 104-108. Glatthorn, Allan Ai, and Joseph E.. Ferderbar. Independent study for all students. ',Ali Delta Kapnan, v. 48: March 1966 : 379-382. Gleason, Gerald T. The theory and nature Of indePendentlearnina Scranton, Pennsylvania, International Textbook Co.. 1967.101 p. 1

froward, James.Independent study fortoday's sehooh.. Journal hocondary education,v. 46, January 1971 of Plunkett, William T. : c!,5-31. A design loi inckpendeiitstudy. Clearing house, v. 43, October 1968: 94-98. Independent studyat Syossetnth school. Phi Delta . 30, February 1969: 350-352. Kappa', Torrance, Paul E.Independent studyas an instructional tool. Educa- tion dicrest,v. 33, December 19q7: 27-30. Tripp, RZbert L. Self directed study,; a junior high school pilotpro- aram. Clearing house,v. 43, February 1969: 344-348. mp, J. Lloycl. Independentstudy. Catholic high v. 26, October 1968 : 2-7. school quarterly, Winn, Mildred. Independentstudy at seven. Childhood 47, November 1970: 72-74. educatior, v.

E. NON-GRADED SCHOOLS Anderson, Robert H.The nongraded school: an overview. National elementary principal,v. 47, November 1967 4-8. Beggs, David W., andEdward G. Baffle. Nongradedschools in action; bold new venture,Bloomington, Indiana 270 p. Uthversity Press, 1967. Besvinick, Sidney L., andJohn Crittenden. Theeffectiveness of anon- graded school. Schooland society,v. 96, March 16, 1968 : 181-184. Brown, B. Frank. Theappropriate placement school: a sophisticated nongraded curriculum.West Nyack, N.Y., Parker Inc., 1965. 198.P. Publishing. Co., The nongraded high school.Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Hall, 1963. 223.p. Prentice- Carbone, Robert F. Acomparison of graded andnongraded elementary schools. Elementaryschool journal, E8. v. 62, November 1961 : 82- Dufay, Frank R. Ungradingthe elementary school.West Nyack, N.Y., Parker PublishingCo., Inc., 1966. 230p. Glogau, Lillian, and MurrayFessel. The nongraded a case study. West Nyack, N.Y., primary school ; 294. p. Parker Publishing Co., rnc., 1967. Goodlad, John I. The nongradedschool. National elementaryprincipal, v. 50, September1970 : 24-29. The non-graded school inthe United States. Prospectsin education, no. 1, 1969: 31-36. Goodlad, John T., andRobert H. Anderson. The mentary school. New York, nonaraded ele- 24s p. Harcourt, Brace and 'World,1963. Joseph W. Comparison of pupilachievement in graded and nongraded primary classrooms.Journal of experimental education, v. Fa111963 : 59-63. Hillson, Maurie, J. CharlesJones, J. William Moore, and FrankVan Devender, A controlledexperiment evaluating the effects ofa nongraded organizationon pupil achievement. Journal of educational research, v. 57. July-August1964 : 548-550.. Hopkins, Kenneth D., 0. A. Oldridge,and Malcolm L. Williamson. An empirical comparison of pupilachievement and other variables in 135 graded and ungraded cla,s. Journal of educatona1 research 61, October 1967: 75-77. Lewin David. Go slowon nongrading. Elementary school journal, v. 67, necernber 1966: Lewis, William P. Dem onstration ofa nongiuded plan of an elementary school, utilizino team teaching andprogramed instruction to facilitate learningIn reading and inathematics. Alabama, Troy State College, 1966. 18p. [ED 010 329]. McCarthy, Robert J. How to organize andoperate an ungraded mid- dle school. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.,Prentrce-Hallt 1967. 68 p. McLaughlin William P. The nongradedschool; a critical assessment. Xtbany, N".Y., State Education Department, University of the State of New York, 1967. 56p. McLaufNin, WilliLun P. Nongrackdschoolswhere to find tl.em; directory of riongradecl slioolsiii the Uoited States. Bloomington, 1nd:ana Phi Deltq Kappan 1968.p. The phantom nongraderl school. PhiDelta Kapp an. v. 49, Jan- uary 1968: 248-250. Miller, Richard I, ed, The nongradedschool ; analysis and study. New York, Harper and Row, 1967.289 p. Morris, Vernon R., Barton B.Proger, and James E. Morrell.Pupil achievement in a nongradedpfimary plan after three and fiveyears of instruction. Educationalleadership, v. 28, March 1911: 621-625. Rollins, Sidney P. Developingnongraded schools. Itasca, Illinois,F. E. Peacock, Publishers, 1968.198 p. and appendices. Shearron, Gilbert F., and Hazel Wait.Nongraded elementary schools: a survey of practices. National elementary principal,v. 47, Novem- ber 1967 : 39-42. Smith, Lee L. A. practicalapproach to the nongradedelementary school. West Ny.ack, N.Y., ParkerPublishing Co., 1968. 268p. Teaching in a nongraded school.West Nyack, N.Y., Parker Publishing. Co., Inc. 1970, 319p. Tewksbury, John L. iongrading inthe elementary school. Columbus, Oluo, Charles Merritt Books, 1967.138 p. When nongrading fails. Schoolmamtgement, v. 11. February 1967: 110-113. F. FLEXIBLE SCHEDULING Abell, Victor A. Purdue academicstudent scheduling. (PASS ). Goals, guidelines, and operations 1,9 favettePurdue University Depart- ment of Schedules and Space, 1965. 43p. [ED 032 853] Allan, Blaine W. Individual learningthrough computerized modular scheduling, second report of schedulingproject at Virfrin Valley High School, Mesquite, Nevada.Carson City, Nevacra Western States Small Schools Project, 1964. 50p. [ED 021 669]. Allen, Dwight IV. A new perspectiveon the computerization of school ,schedules. Educational technology,v. 8, February 28, 1968 : 8-10. Flexibility for vocational educationthrough computr scheduling,. Stanford, Stanford University, Schoolof Education, 1966. 38 p. [ED 010 293]. Allen, Dwight IV., and Donald De Lay. Flexibilityschedu:ing: a reality. Stanford L niversity, School of Education.10 p. [ED 027 624]. 141 136

Allen. Dwight W., aiiciRobert Politzer. Asurvey of 1nvcstigttion of foreign langua

G. FREE SCHOOLS, SCHOOLS WITHOUT WALLS A school without walls a city for a classroom. Nation's schools, v. 84, September 1969 : 51+. Alternative learning environments. Childhood education, v. 47, Feb ruary 1971 : entire issue. The anywhere school ; one city district's break with the past. School management, v. 13, December 1969 : 46+. Barth, Roland S. When children enjoy school; SOMP lessOnS from Brit- ain. Childhood education, v. 46, January 1970 : 195-200. Bassett, G. AV. Innovation in primary education. London, Wiley-Inter- science. 1970. 209 p. Berson, Minnie P. Inside the open classroom. American educatioi 7, May 1971 : 11-15. Central Advisory Council for Education. Children and their primary schools (The Plowden Report). London, 11er Majesty's Stationery Office 1967. 2 v. Clegg, :Mee. The revolution in the English elementary schools. Na- tional elementary principal, v. 49, September 1969 : 23-32. Cook, Ann, and Herbert Mack. The BHtish primary school. Educa- tional leadorship, v. 27, November 1969 140-143. Does school ;joy =learning? Newsweek, May 3, 1971 : 60+. Featherston,!, Joseph. Experiments in !earning. New iepubbc v 159 December 14, 1968 : 23-25. How children learn. New republic, v. 157, September 2, 1967 : 17-21. Schools for children: what's happening in British classrooms. New republic, v. 157. August 19. 1967 : 17-21. Schools for learning. New republic, v. 159, December 21, 1968 : 17-20. Teaching children to think. New republic, v. .1.57, September 9 1967 : 15-19. .1. Why so few good schools ? New republic, v. 160 January 4, 1969 : 18-21. Greenberg, James D,, and Robert E. Roush. A visit to the 'school without walls :' two impressions. Phi Delta Kappan, v. 51, May 1970 : 480-484. 14 Gross, Beatrice, and. Ronald Gross.A lit tle bit of chaos. SatllrcIay v ievv-, v. 53 Miy 16,1070: 71 -F. re- .R'tc1ici1 school reform. New York,Simon and Schuster, 1969. 350 Hetzei, Donna C. An overviewof British infkuit1o1s, Young children, v. 25, September 1970: 336-339. . . Ifowsoa, Geoffrey. Childrenat school : p Lic,if i1,Yitain. . today. New York, Teachers CollegePress. 1 2 p. Informal education. Center forum.v. 3, July 1969 : entire issue. The informal school arrives.In The shape of education for 1971-72, v. 13, by the editors of Education U.S.A.Washington, National School Public Relations Association,1971 : 87-41. Marsh, Leonard. Alongside thechild ; experiences in the English mary school. New York, Praeger Publishers,1970. 154 p. McCracken, Samuel. Quackeryin the classroom. Commenttuy, 17 June 1970 : 45-58. Mike Krevitt finds his nichein 'school without walls.' Christi Science Mon itor, May 15, 1971: 9. National Association for the Educationof Young Children. Open education ; the legacy of the progressivemovement. Washington, The Association, 1970. 80p. O'Neill, Michael. Education withoutschools : idea and reality. Notre Dame jounial of education,v. 1, Spring 1970 49-59. Open education:can British school reforms work here? Nation's schools, v. 87, May 1971 :17-61. Profile of a high school. Plfi DeltaKappan, v. 52 May 1971: 513-530. Program Reference Service. "Open door;" New 17ork City. New Yoi.k, Center for Urban Education, 1970.48 p. Resnik. Henry S. High school withno walls. Think, v. 35, Novembei December 1969 : 33-36. Robinson, Donald . Alternativeschools ;ist;ie old order realiy changing ? Educational leadership,v. 28., March 1971 : 604-607. Rogers, Vincent R. English and Americanprimary schools. Phi Delta Kappan. v. 51, October 1969: 71-75. Primary education in England:an interview with John Coe. hi Delta Kappan.v. 52. May 1971 : 534-538. Teaching in the British primary school, NewYork, Macmillan Co., 1970, 307 p. Sargent, Betsye. The integrated day inan American school. Boston, National Association of Independent Schocls,1970. 80 p. Schneir. Walter, and Miriam Schneir. The joyof learningin the open corridor. New York times mao.azine, April 4, 1971: 30 ±. Silbeiman, Charles E. Crisis in the classroom.New York, Random HouSe, 1970. 553 13. Smith, Joshua L. Free schools;Pandora's box ? Educational leadership, v. 28, February 1971: 464-168. Staples. I. Ezra. The "open-space" plan ineducation. Educational leadership, V. 28, February 1971: 458-463. Stretch, Bonnie Barrett. The rise of the'free school.' Saturdayre- view, v. 53, June 20, 1970: 76+. Tunnel], Gayle. City's 1st 'school without opens door to 30. Washington post, March 9, 1971: C1 ±. 144 139

Willa, R. Cliff, and Patricia H. Mack. -Wide open for learning. Anieri- Call education, v. 6, November 1970 : 13-15. Yeomans, Edward. Education for initiative and responsibility. Bos- ton, National Association of Independent Schools, 1967.40 p.

H. EXTEN1M- -WOOL YEAR dams. A. Look hard at this year-round school plan. American school boad journal, v. 150, July 1968 : 11-15. Adams, Velma A. The extended school year : a status report. School management, v. 14, June 1970 : 13-19. Ameiican Association of School Adm;nistrators. 9 +; the year-round school. Washington, The Association. 1970.36 p. Ames, R. G. Why one district rejected year-round schools; Germ a toWn, Wisconsin. Nation's schools, v. 84, December 1969 : 94. Baumon, W. Scott. The flexible system ; an economic analysis of the quarterly calendar in public schools. Toledo, Ohio, Busmess Re- search Center, University of Toledo, 1966.37 p. Four-quarter plan uses schools all year long. Nation's schools, v. SO, November 1967 : 69-70. Beckwith, Robert M. The Valley View 45-15 continuous school plan. American school and university, v. 43, November 1970 : 19-28. Coutts, II. T., and J. J. Bergen. Modified school year. Education Can- ada, v. 9. September 1969 : 23-27. Lennard, R. Twelve-month four quarter school year. Journal of health, physical education, recreation, v. 40, October 1909: 40+. Driscoll, Thomas F. School around the calendar, American education, v. 7, March 1971 : 21-23. Engh, Jeri. Why not year-round schools. Saturday review, v. 49, Sep- tember 17,1966 : 82-84. Exploring the school year. Compact, v. 4, December 197a: entire issue. Finchum, U. N. Extended use of school facilities. Washington, U. Govt. Print. Off., 1967.103 p. Florida Educational Research and Development Council. Year-round schools, for Polk County, Florida. Gainesville, Florida, University of Florida, 1966.71 p. Hamann, H. A. Longer school year ? Illinois schools journal,v. 48, Spring, 1968 : 47-50. Humphrey, H. H. Let's take off the padlocks. American education,v. 4, July-August 1968 : 2-3. Increased interest in longer school year. School and society,v. 97, March 1969 : 155-156. Jensen, G. M. Year-round school: can boards sidestep it much longer ? American school board journal, v. 157, July 1969: 8-12. McLain, J. D. Developing flexibie all-year schools. Educational leadership, v. 28, February 1971 : 472-475. Major thrusts for a flexible ell-year school. Pennsylvania school journal, v. 118, February 1970 : 157+. Year-round educationtransition toward flexibility. State government, v. 44, Winter 1971 : 1925;- National Education Association, Ileetirch Di-vision. The rescheduled school year. Research summary 1968-52. Washington, Tite Asso- ciation, 1968.39 p. 145 140 New York. State Education Department,University of the State of New York. The impact ofa rescheduled school year. Albany, The Department, 1970 : 158 p. Setting the stage for lengthened schoolyear programs. lbany, The Department, 1968. 113p. The ivscheduled schoolyear; summary. NEA research bulletin,v. 46, October 1968 : 6740. S:nidlin, James and M. E. Combs. The extended schoolyeal feasibility study. Research reportno. 52. Frankfort, Kentucky, Leg- islative Research Commission, 1969. GSp. ala, A. W. Year-round school_ NASSP bulletin, 7949. V. 54, Mai ch 1970 :

Schoenfeld, Clarence A.. and Neil Schmitz.Year-round education; its problems and prospects fromkinder.aarten to college. Madison, Dembar Educational Research Services,Inc., 1964. 111 p. Schoolmen visualize need for extended schoolyear; school administrators opinion poll. Nation's schools,v. 83, March 1969 : 101. Teachers views on pupils' schoolday and year NE2, reseqrch bulletin, v. 47, March 1969: 20-22. Thomas, George Isaiah. Extended schoolyear designs. Albany, New York, State Education Department, Universityof the State of New York, 1966. 126 p. White, R. E. A board member looksat the extended schoolyear. Edu- ation, v. 88. FebruaryMarch1968:245-248. Year-round school-reporton the latest test. US wsss and worldre- port, August 18,1969: 32 +. Yevish, Irving A. Dowe need a longer school year.Educational forum, v. 35, January 1971 193495.